Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes general administrative, material, and procedural requirements for Division 26 to
expand the requirements specified in Division 01.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Work and materials shall conform to and be executed, inspected and tested in accordance with the latest
edition of the National Electric Code and with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state and
local governmental agencies. References to “NEC” within the Division 26 Sections shall be considered
synonymous to this electrical code.
B.
Other codes which will apply to this installation include the current editions of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.3
ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.
NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workspaces.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
Underwriters Laboratories.
Where governing codes indicate the Drawings and Specifications do not comply with the minimum
requirements of applicable codes, be responsible for either notifying the Architect in writing during the
bidding period of the revisions required to meet code requirements, or providing an installation which will
comply with the code requirements.
PERMIT AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Permits: Obtain and pay for all permits, bonds, licenses, tap-in fees, etc., required by the City, State or
other authority having jurisdiction over the work, as a part of the work of the affected sections.
B.
Inspections: Arrange and pay for all inspections required by the above when they become due as part of
the work of the sections affected. Conceal no work until approved by these governing authorities.
Coordinate inspection period with Authorities Having Jurisdiction and Engineer through Construction
Manager. Present the Engineer with properly signed certificate of final inspection.
1.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 01 Section "Shop Drawings, Product Data &
Samples."
1.
Include and execute additional items as defined in Part 3.
B.
Submit general informational submittal coordination drawings for all areas of the project. Submit specific
coordination drawings defined in Part 3.
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
C.
Definitions:
1.
Submittals: A written or graphic expression of the Contractor’s interpretation of requirements in
the Contract Documents to show how the Contractor intends to fulfill those requirements. Identify
deviations from Contract Documents.
2.
Action Submittals: Required submittal which Engineer reviews and approves or takes other
appropriate action to communicate to the Contractor the status if the submittal and subsequent
action required.
3.
Other (Information, Closeout and Maintenance and Material) Submittals: Required submittals
which Engineer reviews and may elect to respond. If rejected by Engineer for not complying with
requirements, resubmittal or other action may be required on the part of the Contractor.
D.
Failure to Submit:
1.
Contractor’s failure to provide submittals does not alleviate the responsibility to provide the
requirements in the Contract Document as interpreted by the Engineer. Correct non-compliant
items.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
General: Refer to Division 01 for quantities and types of submittals.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit action submittals in groups by systems. For example, all lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts and
accessories shall be submitted simultaneously in one package.
B.
Submit the following action submittals as qualified in associated Division 26 Sections:
1.
2.
Dimming systems.
3.
Disconnect switches.
4.
Electrical identification.
5.
Lighting
6.
Lighting control equipment.
7.
Motor controllers.
8.
Panelboards.
9.
Protective devices.
10. Surface raceways.
11. Wiring devices.
C.
Action submittals submitted for other than those listed above or specifically required in the appropriate
Specification Section will not be reviewed or returned.
D.
Contractor Certificates:
1.
Contractor certification forms may be submitted in accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures" in lieu of system action submittal product data requirements except for the systems or
products listed below:
a.
Dimming systems.
b.
Electric power management systems.
c.
Luminaire and lighting systems.
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
d.
e.
1.7
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
Networked lighting control systems.
Protective devices.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Coordination Drawings
1.
Submit general coordination drawings in accordance with Division 01 Section "Project
Management Coordination," to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements,
components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems,
installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation
and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the
efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:
a.
Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and materials.
Include the following:
1)
Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly
required for periodic maintenance.
2)
Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
3)
Wall and floor sleeve penetrations.
4)
Floor box and poke-through assembly installations.
5)
Equipment connections and support details.
6)
Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
b.
Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the
building during construction.
c.
Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
d.
Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and
inlets, luminaires, communications systems components, sprinklers, and other ceilingmounted devices.
2.
Submit the following specific coordination drawings and others as defined in other Division 26
Sections:
a.
Access door locations and sizes (as specified in Division 08).
b.
Electrical equipment rooms.
c.
Feeder routings.
d.
Mechanical equipment rooms.
3.
Contract Document Drawing copies may be used as base for coordination drawings, then marked
to depict actual equipment sizes and other requirements of coordination drawings. Those not
marked will be rejected.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.
Prepare and submit operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01 Sections
"Operation and Maintenance Data" and “Closeout Procedures”. In addition to the requirements
specified in Division 01, include specific Division 26 Section requirements, and the following
general information for equipment items:
a.
Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance
curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers
of replacement parts.
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
b.
2.
B.
Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and
normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency
instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
c.
Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
d.
Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
Include the following minimum information in the operations and maintenance manual:
a.
Individual characteristics for trouble shooting sequences for each item of each:
1)
Branch circuit panel.
2)
Distribution panel.
3)
Fire alarm system.
4)
Individual motor controller.
b.
Catalog cut sheets for every item for which a shop drawing is required.
c.
Schedule of loads served from each:
1)
Branch circuit panel.
2)
Distribution panel.
d.
On-hand spare parts list and complete parts list for each:
1)
Distribution panel.
2)
Individual motor controller.
e.
Overload element schedule for each motor controller whether individual or in a motor
control center.
f.
g.
Bolt tightening torques and inspection intervals on each:
1)
Bolted bus connection.
2)
Busway connection.
3)
Cable connection.
4)
Miscellaneous bolted electrical connections.
h.
Manufacturers' recommended cleaning intervals and special procedures for each:
1)
2)
Electrical equipment interior.
3)
Electrical equipment ventilation opening.
4)
Luminaire lenses, louvers, and reflectors.
i.
"As designed" and "as left" relay settings.
j.
k.
Testing interval and target values for ground fault protection circuit relays.
l.
m.
Testing and troubleshooting procedures unique to special systems. For example:
1)
2)
Infrared scanning.
3)
Phase balancing.
4)
High-pot tests.
n.
Approved special construction details that differ from the details shown on Drawings.
o.
Permits and inspections certificates.
p.
Testing and Commissioning results.
q.
Final submittal copy.
r.
Special warranty information.
s.
Service contract data.
Record Documents
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
1.9
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 01 Section "Project
Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate installed
conditions for:
a.
Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control
devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and
arrangements.
b.
Major equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building
lines.
c.
Contract Modifications and actual equipment and materials installed.
d.
Training and demonstration videos.
e.
Keying schedules.
f.
Software CD’s.
g.
Final field quality control test reports.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.10
Extra Material:
1.
Provide four (4) keys for every different piece of electrical equipment which is equipped with a
lock.
2.
Provide all other loose equipment and extra material specified or supplied for use with all systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
B.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use.
C.
Obtain similar products through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
For electrical power equipment and systems, the agency shall be a member company of the
International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory
(NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
2.
For other than electrical power equipment or where NETA is not a recognized testing agent, the
testing agency shall be as defined in the appropriate Division 26 Section.
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance
labels, and other information needed for identification.
COORDINATION
Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of Division 26 equipment:
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
2.
3.
4.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are
indicated.
To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
To assure connections of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry
walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or
otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
1.
Ensure access doors are sized to permit complete access for concealed or inaccessible junction
boxes, control and monitoring devices, elevator shaft and duct mounted fire alarm detectors and
other items of equipment requiring access, maintenance, and/or operation.
a.
D.
Assure access to devices per codes and local authorities having jurisdiction.
Wiring and Controls:
1.
Coordinate equipment furnished by Division 26: Install and wire in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable standards and codes. Provide installation
instructions, locating dimensions and wiring diagrams for the other trades. Supervise the
installation and start-up and test the equipment unless otherwise specified.
2.
Coordinate Equipment Furnished by Other Divisions: Equipment specified in other Divisions and
requiring electrical supply will be erected, aligned, leveled and prepared for operation. Provide
required controls and accessories along with installation instructions, diagrams, dimensions and
supervision of installation and start-up. Provide the required electrical rough-ins and confirm the
electrical controls and accessories furnished under the specifications for the other divisions. Install
those controls and accessories not located in the mechanical piping and ductwork. Provide
additional electrical controls, accessories, fittings and devices not specified under the equipment
but required for a finished, operating job. Make final electrical connections. Participate in the
start-up and test services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Products and the terms materials, equipment, devices, components, assemblies and systems are
considered synonymous.
B.
All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the manufacturer.
Seconds, rejects, or damaged materials will be rejected.
C.
The materials to be provided under these Specifications shall be essentially the standard commercial
grade product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are
required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer.
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
D.
The listing of a manufacturer for certain products does not indicate acceptance of a standard or
catalogued item of equipment. All products shall conform to the Specifications.
E.
All equipment and materials specified shall be products currently in production.
1.
If the specified item is not available or is discontinued, a similar product with the same features
and functionality shall be provided from the same manufacturer in the newer/upgraded series of
product.
2.
Equipment and/or devices discovered to be discontinued after submission approval will not be
accepted and will require resubmittal for an approved replacement.
F.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicated maximum dimensions for products including
clearances between products and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum
product dimensions.
1.
Assembly Selection: The Drawings indicated sizes, profiles and dimensional requirements of
assembly equipment. Equipment having equal performance characteristics and complying with
indicated maximum dimensions and profiles may be considered, provided deviations do not
change the design concept intended performance, or code/future extension provision clearances.
The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer a minimum of 10 days prior to bid.
2.2
U.L. LISTING
A.
All electrical equipment, products and materials shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories (UL), or other
approved agency, listing label. Acceptable alternates include:
1.
2.
B.
2.3
Intertek Testing Service NA, Inc. (ITSNA) (formerly ETL).
Wherein an item of equipment is specified to be U.L. Listed, the entire assembly shall be listed by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Any modifications to suit the intent of the Specifications shall be
performed in accordance with the National Electrical Code and listed by U.L.
Definitions:
1.
Listed: Equipment or materials included in a list published by an organization acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, that maintain periodic
inspection of production of listed equipment or materials, and whose listing states either that the
equipment or material meets appropriate designated standards or has been tested and found
suitable for use in a specified manner.
2.
Labeled: Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol or other identifying
mark of an organization that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with
product evaluation that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or
materials and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicated compliance with appropriate
standards or performance in a specified manner.
LEAP YEAR SOFTWARE PROTECTION
A.
All software supplied with new equipment shall be warranted against leap year program failure.
B.
All software supplied with the new equipment shall be warranted against Daylight Savings Time program
disruption or failure. Refer to Division 01 Section “Warranties and Supplementary Conditions for
Requirements”.
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
C.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
All software shall be the most current release of the latest available software of the equipment provided.
1.
BETA software versions will not be accepted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
General:
1.
Comply with NECA 1 – "Standard For Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting."
2.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for
wall-mounting items.
3.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange
and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with
these requirements.
4.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of
both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate
future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
5.
Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
B.
Manufacturer's Directions And Supervision:
1.
Follow all instructions where supervision by a manufacturer is specified. Provide recommended
manufacturer and specified field tests, and other recommendations of the manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall supervise the installation, connection, start-up, testing, adjustment, instruction
of the Owner and final tests of such equipment or system. Where two or more manufacturer's
equipment are interrelated, take responsibility to coordinate their work and provide supervision.
2.
Have the manufacturer instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance techniques of
all equipment, systems, etc., at the time of completion of all work.
C.
Rough-In:
1.
Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual
equipment to be connected.
2.
Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 28 for rough-in requirements.
3.2
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and
equipment.
2.
Workmanship shall conform to NECA 1 – "Standard For Good Workmanship in Electrical
Contracting" published by the National Electrical Contractors Association.
B.
Locations:
1.
When Drawing details are not available, the Architect shall control the placement of wall and
ceiling mounted electrical devices, luminaires and outlets. The intent is to aesthetically locate
luminaires/outlets by providing rough-in hardware, boxes and/or mounting plates, as required,
when stud or furring may not be readily available for direct mounting. Consult with Architect's
representative for actual placement.
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building
components. Be responsible for any changes in openings and locations necessitated by the
equipment installed.
Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
Install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, where
mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned.
Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including
coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the
Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form.
Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the
Architect.
Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components.
Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum of interference with other installations.
Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be
installed at a specified slope.
Field Coordination:
1.
Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of
construction, to allow for electrical installations.
2.
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
3.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing
in the building.
4.
Protect all equipment and materials from the elements, dirt and other damage from the time it is
removed from the point of storage until final acceptance.
5.
Include setting equipment to accurate line and grade, leveling equipment, aligning equipment
components, providing and installing couplings, bolts, guards, and anchor bolts.
6.
Alignment and level and meet the quality of workmanship subject to manufacturer's installation
instructions.
7.
Provide all trench and conduit excavation and backfilling required for his work inside and outside
the building, including repairing of finished surfaces, all required shoring, bracing, pumping, and all
protection for safety of persons and property. In addition, check the indicated elevations of the
utilities entering and leaving the building. If such elevations require excavations lower than the
footing levels, the Architect shall be notified of such conditions and a redesign shall be made
before excavations are commenced. Make the excavations at the minimum required depths in
order not to undercut the footings.
8.
Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of
equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from the
premises when no longer required.
9.
No electrical equipment, raceways or other work of any kind shall be covered up or hidden from
view before it has been examined and approved. Any unsatisfactory work or materials shall be
removed and corrected immediately.
10. Coordinate installation of access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished
surfaces.
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
D.
Equipment Manufacturer Coordination:
1.
Distribution Equipment Assembly Selection: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and
dimensional requirements of assembly equipment. Equipment having equal performance
characteristics and complying with indicated maximum dimensions and profiles may be
considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept, intended performance, or
code/future extension provision clearances. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer a
minimum of 10 days prior to bid.
2.
Include the component parts thereof equipment such as disconnect switches, motor controllers,
motors, drives, and guards necessary to the satisfactory and safe operation of the equipment.
3.
All manufacturers' finished equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall be brought to
an "as new" condition by touch up or repainting. Any rust shall be completely removed and the
surface primed prior to repainting as specified in Division 09.
E.
Cutting And Patching:
1.
General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01 Section "Cutting and
Patching." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, the following requirements
apply:
a.
Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to:
1)
Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
2)
Remove and replace defective Work.
3)
Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
4)
Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
5)
Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
6)
Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide for
Architect observation of concealed Work.
b.
Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and
materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of electrical items indicated to be
removed and items made obsolete by the new Work.
c.
Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or
scheduled to be removed.
d.
Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread
of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
e.
Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent
installations.
f.
Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching
existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials
and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.
1)
Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for definition of experience
"Installer."
g.
Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the
original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the
materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.
1)
Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for definition of experienced
"Installer."
F.
Painting:
1.
Provide the prime painting of all equipment and materials furnished under Division 26
specifications, unless specifically stated otherwise. In general, all equipment except raceways and
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 10 – Basic Division 26 Requirements
galvanized boxes that are not provided with a factory-applied final finish shall be delivered to the
job site with a shop applied prime coat of paint. Refer to Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting"
and "Exterior Painting."
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Refer to Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections and Testing”.
B.
END OF SECTION 26 00 10
BASIC DIVISION 26 REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10 - 11
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 11 – Selective Removals, Relocations, and Rearrangements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
The Drawings indicate renovated areas and identify those portions of buildings where renovation work
shall be provided. Identified areas of buildings show electric work that shall be provided.
B.
Removals, relocations and rearrangements shall be performed in all identified areas, as shown on
Drawings.
C.
The Contract Documents include DE series Demolition Drawings. These Demolition Drawings shall be
interpreted as incomplete, and in general represent existing building electrical conditions.
1.
2.
D.
Examine the existing structures and installations for the work of other trades which will influence the cost
of the work on this project. The work shall include removals, relocations and rearrangements affecting
the work of this Division as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
The Demolition Drawings included in the Contract Documents are not to be considered complete
or accurate, and are included only to provide the general scope and extent of selective removals,
relocations and rearrangements to be included. Visit the site prior to submitting the bid, to verify
existing building conditions, in order to more accurately establish the removals, relocations and
rearrangements required.
The Demolition Drawings include description notes that provide an overall intent of removals,
relocations and rearrangements.
Relating directly or incidental to the construction.
The work of other Divisions which may interfere with, disturb, or complicate, the performance of
the construction.
Involving systems and/or equipment and relocated service lines which shall continue to be used or
operated as part of the finished project.
Luminaires, lamps, and ballasts.
Include in the base bid a dollar amount to provide the following scope of work associated with the survey,
and determination of, the extent of removals required for this project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Survey existing fluorescent luminaires within the project spaces and work areas, scheduled for
removals, for the purpose of determining whether or not PCB containing ballasts are present in
existing luminaires, and whether or not the ballast(s) are leaking.
Provide a non-destructive survey and investigation of existing fluorescent luminaires, including
opening recessed troffer lens doors, temporarily removing lenses (on luminaires without lens
doors), lamps, ballast covers, etc., in order to visually inspect and record luminaire ballast data.
In any given room or space, where existing fluorescent luminaires are scheduled to be
disconnected and removed, and potentially reinstalled, survey and inspect each luminaire for the
purpose of determining whether or not a PCB containing ballasts exists, and whether or not it is
leaking.
Record the data for future action, and provide copies of the data to the Owner and Architect.
SELECTIVE REMOVALS, RELOCATIONS AND REARRANGEMENTS
26 00 11 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 11 – Selective Removals, Relocations, and Rearrangements
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
3.2
Existing device locations have been identified as completely as possible by a site survey and by record
documents as available. Be responsible for proper removal and rework of devices, equipment, and their
associated work, not shown on Drawings to conform with intent of documents.
PREPARATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors and ceiling scheduled for removal.
Coordinate utility outages with the Electric Utility Company and the Owner.
Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel
experienced in such operation.
B.
Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new systems are complete and ready
for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the
Owner at least two weeks before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration.
Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
C.
Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make
switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner and local fire service at least 72 hours before partially or
completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service
in areas adjacent to work area.
D.
Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service.
3.3
GENERAL RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Remove all electric work presently installed on or in existing walls, ceilings and partitions which are to be
demolished. Remove all exposed portions of wiring and raceways.
B.
Remove all exposed raceways, exposed and concealed outlet boxes, etc. that are not to be reused where
existing walls are to remain. Where new raceways and outlet boxes are shown on existing walls in
finished rooms, they shall be installed concealed by cutting and patching method.
C.
Reuse existing outlet boxes and raceway systems wherever practical in renovation areas. Install new
wiring devices, coverplates, and wiring per applicable specification sections, where such existing outlet
boxes are used. Special coverplates may be required to suit conditions.
D.
Disconnect and remove exposed feeder, branch circuit, remote control, power limited, non-power limited,
and signal line system raceways and their associated circuits and wiring, including wiring for systems and
equipment operating at 50 volts or less not installed in raceway rendered inoperable due to removals,
SELECTIVE REMOVALS, RELOCATIONS AND REARRANGEMENTS
26 00 11 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 11 – Selective Removals, Relocations, and Rearrangements
relocations and rearrangements. This shall include the complete removal of wiring and cable abandoned
by other Divisions, above or below ceilings, as part of this project.
E.
Disconnect, remove, rework and otherwise rearrange existing raceways and wiring to accommodate new
circuit arrangements indicated and/or required to maintain continuity of existing circuits feeding devices
that are to remain.
F.
Be responsible for removal and reinstallation of existing electrical equipment to accommodate the work of
or disturbed by other trades.
G.
In such cases where new circuit breakers or fusible switches are to be added to existing electrical
distribution equipment, they shall be of the same manufacturer and design as the existing breakers or
fusible switches with matching AIC ratings, except as otherwise noted, and shall be of the sizes as shown
on Drawings.
1.
2.
H.
3.4
Be responsible for rearranging any and all existing circuit breakers within the existing equipment,
to facilitate the installation of new circuit breakers being added. Provide additional bus, bus
extensions, bolts and hardware, enclosure modifications, directory modifications, etc., required to
accomplish these modifications.
Provide new arc-fault signage per Division 26 Sections "Protective Device Coordination" and
"Electrical Identification", where changes to the electrical distribution system alter or change the
rating, hazard or safety requirements for the room, space, or area.
Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged
circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide types circuits directory showing
revised circuiting arrangement.
SALVAGING
A.
Stockpile removed, electrical equipment, devices, components, luminaires, etc. on job site, for reuse, until
project closeout, unless specifically directed otherwise.
B.
Legally remove items from site that the Owner does not wish to salvage.
3.4
LUMINAIRE REMOVALS
A.
Remove from the site, and legally dispose of, disconnected and removed luminaires, that have been
previously determined to not contain PCB fluorescent ballasts, and that the Owner does not wish to
retain.
1.
3.5
Remove lamps from luminaires and dispose of separately.
LAMP DISPOSAL
A.
Fluorescent, mercury vapor, metal halide, high pressure sodium, and neon lamps, contain some amount
of the chemical mercury, and as such shall be handled as hazardous waste.
SELECTIVE REMOVALS, RELOCATIONS AND REARRANGEMENTS
26 00 11 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 11 – Selective Removals, Relocations, and Rearrangements
B.
Lamp removal and disposal (both mercury containing and low-mercury types) shall be legally disposed of,
in accordance with the requirements of the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA)
Universal Waste Rule (64 FR 36465-36490), and the state and local level project locale disposal
requirements.
C.
Remove lamps separately from their respective luminaires, and place (unbroken) into approved, labeled
containers.
1.
D.
3.6
Containers may be new cardboard boxes with cardboard lamp sleeves, or discarded cardboard
boxes from new lamps with the lamp spacers left intact.
The total weight for all on-site, project related, disposed lamp containers, cannot exceed 500 lbs. at any
one time. The containers shall be removed from the project site, delivered or picked-up by a licensed
lamp recycler, and legally disposed of, within 1 year of lamp removal.
FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLAST DISPOSAL
A.
Dispose of ballasts identified or labeled "NON-PCB", "NO PCB", or similar marking, (indicating that the
ballast does not contain PCB), as ordinary construction waste.
B.
Ballasts not identified or labeled "NON-PCB", "NO PCB", or similar marking (indicating that the ballast
does not contain PCB), shall be presumed to be PCB containing, and shall be handled as hazardous
waste.
C.
Remove non-leaking ballasts containing PCB, or presumed to be containing PCB, from their respective
luminaires.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Provide protective gloves, eye protection, and protective clothing, for the person(s) removing
ballasts.
Place removed ballasts in contractor provided 55 or 30 gallon, US DOT approved, type 17C, or
17H drums (barrels). The quantity and size of the drums shall be determined by the Contractor.
Provide approved PCB absorbent materials placed and stored immediately adjacent to the drum
storage area. Do not place loose absorbent material inside the drums.
Label and mark the PCB ballast storage drums with EPA approved PCB labels, and provide the
appropriate warning signs, markings, and clearance lines, to meet the federal, state, and local
hazardous materials handling regulations.
Place barrels containing removed PCB containing ballasts at an on-site, indoor storage location,
sealed with the cover that came with the barrels. Barrels shall not be placed outside exposed to
weather.
Provide to the Project representative, in written form, the total count of the ballasts removed (or
their total weight by barrel), and where they are stored.
Barrels containing removed PCB ballasts shall not to be removed from the work site by the
Contractor. To do so, would be a violation of DOT hazardous waste regulations and may result in
a fine. Provide for the services of an authorized hazardous waste hauler to remove and deliver the
ballasts to an authorized recycler, or PCB incinerator facility.
Do not remove ballasts containing PCB, or presumed to be containing PCB, that are visibly showing signs
of leakage (evidenced by potting compound leakage or by an oily film on the ballast surface), from their
SELECTIVE REMOVALS, RELOCATIONS AND REARRANGEMENTS
26 00 11 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 11 – Selective Removals, Relocations, and Rearrangements
respective luminaire. The entire luminaire shall be presumed to be contaminated, and shall be handled
as a hazardous material.
1.
Notify the project Owner, and proceed no further.
responsibility of the Owner.
Removal of the luminaire shall be the
END OF SECTION 26 00 11
SELECTIVE REMOVALS, RELOCATIONS AND REARRANGEMENTS
26 00 11 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables (100-600 Volts)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes conductors, cables, and connectors rated 100 to 600 volts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Field quality control test reports.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Documents:
1.
2.
1.5
Indicate all feeder sizes on the record drawings riser diagrams.
Indicated homerun junction box locations for all branch circuits.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code:
1.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
a.
2.
Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of
insulating materials.
NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards:
a.
3.
IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standard:
a.
B.
WC-70 – Standard for Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 volts or less.
Std. 82 - Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors.
Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems for field testing.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (100-600 VOLTS)
26 05 19 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
C.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables (100-600 Volts)
Maximum Cable Pull Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s maximum cable tension pulling
characteristics so as not to damage wire and cable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Conductors and Cables:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Connectors and Splices for Conductors and Cable Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.2
Aetna Insulated Wire, Inc.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc., a Division of Tyco.
Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
Cerro Wire LCC.
Encore Wire Corporation.
General Cable Corp.
Nexans
Senator Wire & Cable Co.
Southwire Company.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc., a Division of Tyco.
AMP.
Burndy Corporation.
Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
O-Z/Gedney Co.; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
Raychem Corporation.
Square D Company.
Thomas and Betts Corporation.
Tyco Electronics Corp.
WIRES AND CABLES
A.
General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where indicated.
1.
Derate conductors per the NEC for installations that are exposed to direct sunlight, are on and/or
above rooftops where ambient temperatures are other than 30 deg. C (86 deg. F).
B.
Conductor Material: Copper.
C.
Conductors: Provide solid conductors for power and lighting circuits sizes No. 12 AWG and smaller.
Provide stranded conductors for sizes No. 10 AWG and larger.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (100-600 VOLTS)
26 05 19 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables (100-600 Volts)
D.
Insulation: Provide insulation type in accordance with Part 3 below.
E.
Color Coding:
208/120Volts
Phase Color
A
Black
B
Red
C
Blue
Neutral
White
Ground
Green
IsoGround
Green w/Yellow Strips
480/277 Volts
Phase
A
B
C
Neutral
Ground
IsoGround
Color
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Gray
Green
Green w/Yellow strips
F.
Jackets: Factory-applied nylon or PVC external jacketed wires and cables for pulls in raceways over 100feet in length, for pulls in raceways with more than three equivalent 90 deg. bends, for pulls in conduits
underground or under slabs on grade, and where indicated.
G.
Multiconductor Cables: Provide the following type(s) of cables in NEC approved locations and
applications where indicated. Provide cable UL listed for particular application:
2.3
CONNECTORS FOR CONDUCTORS
A.
Provide UL listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials,
types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings
equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.
1.
2.4
Split-bolt connectors shall not be used for any application.
CONDUCTOR PULLING GRIPS
A.
At contractor’s option, factory installed pulling grips may be provided to allow potential reduced pulling
tension and a low profile head.
B.
Basis of Design shall be Southwire SIMpull HeadTM.
2.5
CONDUCTOR PULLING JACKET
A.
At contractor’s option, lubricated type conductor pulling jackets may be provided for THHN and XHHW
conductors to allow potential reduced pulling tension.
B.
Basis of design shall be Southwire NoLube® SIMpull cable series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (100-600 VOLTS)
26 05 19 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
A.
General: Install electrical cables, conductors and wiring connectors as indicated, in compliance with
applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance
with recognized industry practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Install all conductors within raceways or approved cables.
Install conductors and cables run under the building slab in raceways.
Install minimum No. 12 AWG for circuits 100 volts and above.
Increase conductor size as required due to NEC derating requirements and availability. Minimum
feeder conductor sizes, based upon NEC Table 310.16 and maximum 40% conduit raceway fill,
are shown on Drawings. If conductor size increased, be responsible for associated feeder conduit
size, based upon NEC Table 310.16 and maximum 40% conduit raceway fill, and increased
ground conductor size per NEC. If raceway type altered, also be responsible for associated feeder
conduit raceway size per NEC to meet 40% maximum fill.
Keep conductor splices to a minimum.
Do not bend conductors and cables, either permanently or temporarily during installation to radii
less than that recommended by the manufacturer.
Provide slack wire for all future connections with ends of wires taped and blank box covers
installed.
Provide conductors of the same size from the protective device to the last load.
Make conductor length identical for parallel feeders.
Ground and continuously polarize systems properly throughout following the color coding
specified.
Support conductors in vertical raceways. One cable support shall be provided at the top or as
close to the top as practical, plus a support for each additional interval of spacing per NEC.
Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural members, and
following surface contours, where possible.
Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring
or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300,
without pigtails.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15 – 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG
pigtails for device connections.
Existing Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
C.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables (100-600 Volts)
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
Coordinate conductor and cable installation work including electrical raceway and equipment installation
work, as necessary to properly interface installation of wires and cables with other work.
1.
Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (100-600 VOLTS)
26 05 19 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
Use of pull compound or lubricant is to be avoided unless absolutely necessary and other reduced
cable tension pulling methods exhausted; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or
insulation, and be one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
D.
Ideal-Aqua-Gel.
Polywater.
Yellow 77.
Use pulling means including lubricated conductor jackets, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave
wire and cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway.
Use conductors with 90 degree C insulation and appropriate NEC derating factors when wiring is within
seven feet of passing over or attached to the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables (100-600 Volts)
Boilers and other heat producing equipment.
Hot water heaters.
Rooftop and exposed exterior locations.
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders: Copper.
B.
Branch Circuits: Copper.
C.
Ground conductor material shall match feeder type.
3.3
CONDUCTOR APPLICATIONS
A.
Install UL Type THHN or THWN wiring in conduit, for branch circuits #10 and smaller.
1.
B.
Include wet location label when installed in underground or above grade exterior raceways.
Install UL Type XHHW or THHN wiring in conduit, for feeders and branch circuits #8 and larger.
1.
Include wet location label when installed in underground or above grade exterior raceways.
C.
Install UL Type XHHW or THWN wiring in conduit, for feeders and branch circuits installed outside of the
building envelope, in raceway in contact with soil, or whenever raceway may be subject to moisture
and/or condensation.
D.
Install SO hard service cord with stainless steel, wire mesh, strain relief at terminations to suit application.
3.4
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Follow circuit numbers shown on Drawings in connecting circuits to panelboards. In the event that field
observation shows that the indicated circuit numbers are not connected to the corresponding panel
overcurrent device, make all corrections necessary. Each branch circuit homerun containing two or more
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (100-600 VOLTS)
26 05 19 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables (100-600 Volts)
circuits with a common neutral shall be connected to the circuit breaker or switch in a three- or four-wire
branch circuit panelboard so that no two of the circuits will be fed from the same phase.
B.
Provide all wiring to and between motors, controllers, line voltage (120-600 volt) control devices,
disconnect switches and other related electrical equipment, except where such items are factory wired.
C.
Provide power and all wiring connections to the control devices for electrically operated overhead doors,
door operators and control devices which will be provided under another division.
D.
Connectors for Splices, Taps, and Terminations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.5
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements
are not indicated, tighten connector and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL
Std. 486A and B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or
better mechanical strength and insulation ratings that unspliced conductors.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
Make splices and taps in wiring No. 10 AWG and smaller mechanically and electrically secure with
mechanical pressure type splicing devices.
Make splices and taps of conductors No. 8 AWG or larger and all splices in motor terminal boxes
using compression connectors requiring the use of compression tools for securing the conductors
in the connectors. Termination of conductors at all distribution equipment, except transformers,
shall be made using mechanical lugs. Connectors shall be of high conductivity, corrosion-resistant
material and have actual contact area that shall provide at least the current carrying capacity of the
wire or cable. For conductors No. 1/0 and larger, connector lugs shall be of the two-hole type.
Connector lugs shall be bolted to bussing using Belleville washers in combination with flat washers
and nuts. Compression connectors shall be as manufactured by Thomas & Betts, Burndy, or
approved equal.
Each conductor lug or bus connection shall be individually made with separate lug and/or bolt as
required for the termination.
Provide insulated connectors for splices and taps with a self-fusing rubber insulating tape that is
non-corrosive to the connector and the conductor. Insulation tape shall have a minimum of 350
volts per mil dielectric strength. Friction or vinyl tape shall be applied directly over rubber
insulating tape equal to 3M Scotch 88 type.
MAXIMUM BRANCH CIRCUIT LENGTHS
A.
3.6
Per NEC and as shown on Drawings.
SPECIAL BRANCH CIRCUIT (NEUTRAL) PROTECTION
A.
Pull separate neutral conductors as shown on Drawings and to branch circuits serving or having:
1.
2.
Dimmers.
Ground fault protected devices.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (100-600 VOLTS)
26 05 19 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.
4.
3.7
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables (100-600 Volts)
Surge suppression devices.
Other non-sinusoidal loads.
CONDUCTOR AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.8
Color code cable at splices and terminations per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
WIRING METHODS
A.
The following wiring methods shall not be used:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.9
Non-metallic sheathed cable.
AC cable.
AC cable with aluminum sheath (sometimes call "AC light" or "AC HCF light").
MC cable.
Aluminum wire and cable.
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling".
FIRESTOPPING
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fireresistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping".
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspection and Tests:
1.
Perform inspections and test procedures as required by Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections
and Testing", ANSI/NETA ATS "Cables, Low-Voltage, 600-Volts Maximum", "System Functional
Tests", and "Thermographic Survey" requirements, and the following additional requirements:
a.
Limit tests to:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
Service entrance conductors.
Feeder and 3 phase motor conductors.
Branch circuit conductors feeding generator loads.
Follow-up thermographic survey shall not be required.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (100-600 VOLTS)
26 05 19 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables (100-600 Volts)
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (100-600 VOLTS)
26 05 19 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes solid grounding of building structures and electrical and communications systems
and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and
systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of
these Specifications. Types of grounding systems include the following:
1.
2.
Electrical Equipment Grounding.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
C.
Comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-607A – Commercial Building Grounding, Earthing and Bonding Requirements
for Telecommunications.
D.
Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems for field testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following listed
manufacturers:
1.
Molded Fusion Welding Material:
a.
Burndy.
b.
Cadweld.
c.
ThermOweld.
2.
Ground Clamps/Connectors:
a.
Adalet – PLM Division; a Division of Scott Felzer.
b.
Anderson Corp.
c.
Anixter Bros., Inc.
d.
Burndy.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
3.
2.2
e.
Chance – A.B. chance Co.
f.
Crouse-Hinds, a Division of Cooper Industries.
g.
Erico Products.
h.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
i.
Joslyn Corporation.
j.
O-Z/Gedney Co.
k.
Raco, Inc.
l.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
Enclosure Equipment Grounding Kits:
a.
Same manufacturer as box/cabinet or per 2.1 A.3.
GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
A.
2.3
Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC requirements. Where types,
sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent
requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.
WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS
A.
General: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG
and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated. Conductors No. 8 and larger may use green taped
conductor ends.
D.
Grounding Electrode Conductor: Bare stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed, copper wire.
2.4
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors
and other items connected.
B.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least
two bolts.
1.
Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
2.
Split-bolt connectors shall not be used for any application.
C.
Molded Fusion Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer
for materials being joined and installation conditions.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Ground all equipment, furnished by this Division or by others.
1.
Split-bolt connection methods shall not be used.
B.
Make molded fusion welds and irreversible compression connections in strict accordance with supplier's
instructions. Clamp cables securely in place, independent of connection. Clean and inspect all
connections.
C.
Grounding cable shall not be buried directly in concrete, but a conduit sleeve shall be provided where
cable passes through concrete.
D.
Where ground conductors are shown on Drawings and for all feeders, the use of the metallic raceway in
place of the ground conductor shall not be permitted. Provide grounding bushings at each end of all low
voltage [and medium voltage] feeder raceways. Where non-metallic conduit is used, be responsible for
installing a code sized ground conductor, whether indicated or not.
E.
All grounding conductors run inside the building shall be run within NEC sized metallic raceways with
raceway grounding bushings at each end and bonding jumper to the enclosure or ground bus. Extend
raceway to associated equipment enclosures and to within 6 inches of exposed ground terminal bar
installations. Raceway installations shall be in accordance with Division 26 Section "Raceways."
1.
Each ground conductor bus connection shall be terminated with individual compression lug and
associated individual lug bolt.
2.
Split-bolt connection methods shall not be used for any application.
F.
Welded connections may have multiple ground conductors to suit mold and may be considered
"continuous."
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated
or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except
where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts.
2.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration
is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3.
Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations. Only when a disconnect-type connection
is indicated, use a bolted clamp.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
3.3
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR INSTALLATIONS
A.
Unless indicated otherwise, form one equipment ground circuit with rigid metallic raceways (e.g. EMT,
rigid steel conduit) where used. Install a bonding jumper for continuity around all fittings and terminations
where the conductive raceway is made non-continuous (i.e. underground feeder non-metallic raceways).
1.
Bond all grounding conductors to boxes or enclosures at each access point utilizing approved
grounding kits. Do not use building steel as equipment grounding path.
2.
Bond all conductive metallic piping system in each mechanical equipment room as required by
NEC 250-104B utilizing approved clamps. Minimum size of conductors as required by NEC.
Locate all connections where access is unrestricted for inspection. Looping of conductor from one
system to another is acceptable provided the conductor is without splice and has each end of loop
bonded.
3.
If non-metallic raceways are used for power distribution feeders (i.e., panels, transformers, HVAC
equipment), where the feeder is a single feeder and not a parallel feeder, a second insulated
grounding conductors shall be provided inside the conduit (conduit size shall be adjusted
accordingly), or a bare grounding conductor shall be provided strapped to the outside of the
conduit. The grounding conductor shall be the same size as the grounding conductor provided
inside the conduit. Terminate at grounding bushings or bus on each end. Where the feeder is a
parallel feeder, a second grounding conductor shall not be required.
4.
Where non-metallic raceways are used for branch circuit wiring (such as lighting, receptacles and
miscellaneous equipment circuits), a second insulated grounding conductor shall be provided
inside the conduit (conduit size shall be adjusted accordingly), or, a bare grounding conductor
shall be provided strapped to the outside of the conduit. The grounding conductor shall be the
same size as the grounding conductor provided inside the conduit.
B.
Provide, in the same raceway with the associated phase and/or neutral conductors, a green colored
equipment ground conductor having the same type insulation and connected as described below to
provide equipment ground redundancy.
1.
Install a ground conductor in each raceway to augment the circuit formed by the metallic raceway
system. Bond the conductor to each box or enclosure in which access is possible utilizing
enclosure equipment ground kits, through metallic conduit insulated ground bushings or wedges
and/or enclosure threaded grounding studs. Size conductor as specified, shown or required by
Code, whichever is larger. Install a raceway grounding bushing and bonding jumper to the
enclosure or contained ground bus for the following: each termination of conduits 1 inch trade size
and larger at a switchboard, panelboard, or other enclosure, each location where multiple ring
knockouts are damaged during conduit installation, each location where conduits are stubbed up
into floor mounted enclosures; each conduit termination at a painted enclosure where paint is not
removed before installation of raceway and each feeder.
a.
All branch circuits shall be provided with an equipment grounding conductor sized per NEC
Table 250-122. This includes all lighting and power branch circuits.
b.
Provide a ground conductor to all light switches, receptacles, motors, light fixtures and all
other branch circuit loads.
c.
Install a ground conductor inside all flexible raceways (e.g., flexible steel, liquid tight).
Bond the conductor to the enclosure or ground bus in the nearest box or access on either
side of the flexible section. Size conductor as specified, indicated, or required by Code,
whichever is larger.
d.
Install a ground conductor in all sectional raceways with removable covers for access (e.g.
plug-in strips, surface raceway systems, and wireways) unless specified otherwise. Size
conductor in accordance with the NEC for the largest phase conductor size installed in
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
raceway, or as indicated. Bond all sections of the raceway to the ground conductors.
Connect all receptacle ground terminals in the raceway to the ground conductor, and make
other ground connections shown on Drawings.
3.4
LABELING
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for
instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.
B.
Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding
electrode conductor where exposed.
1.
Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the
facility manager."
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform inspections and test procedures as required by Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections
and Testing”, ANSI/NETA ATS “Grounding Systems” requirements and the following additional
requirements:
a.
Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and
key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their
depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that
may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
b.
Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
c.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
B.
Provide bases, inertia pads, steel supports, anchor bolts, inserts, etc., for all equipment and apparatus
shown on Drawings.
C.
Floor mounted electrical equipment shall be installed on 4 inch high floor doweled concrete housekeeping
pads with 4 inch equipment inset all sides. Concrete shall be in accordance with referenced concrete
specification section.
D.
Provide formed steel support channels extending from the solidly anchored to floor and ceiling slabs and
mount the designated equipment thereto.
E.
Provide steel support channels for wall mounted equipment such as:
1.
Battery Chargers.
2.
Cable Trays.
3.
Communication and Special Systems Cabinets.
4.
Disconnect Switches.
5.
Fire Alarm System Cabinets.
6.
Individual Motor Controllers.
7.
Panelboards.
8.
Raceways.
F.
Coordinate and provide concrete pads under wall mounted equipment installed six inches or less from the
floor. Provide consideration for maximum protective device height on larger distribution panelboards.
G.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and
installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
1.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and
its contents.
C.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and
connected systems and components.
D.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or
imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections, and Division 26 Section “Basic Division 26 Requirements”.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1.
Trapeze hangers.
2.
Steel slotted support systems.
3.
Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
4.
Rubber mats.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
2.
Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
a.
Trapeze hangers. .
b.
Steel slotted channel systems.
c.
Nonmetallic slotted channel systems.
d.
Equipment supports.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Qualification Data:
1.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code Steel."
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
Concrete,
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
3.
4.
5.
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
a.
Allied Tube & Conduit, a Division of Tyco.
b.
Line Systems.
c.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries.
d.
ERICO International Corporation.
e.
GS Metals Corporation.
f.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
g.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
h.
Wesanco, Inc.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied
according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and
angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1
surface.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
b.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries.
c.
Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.
d.
Seasafe, Inc.
2.
Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with
those items.
3.
Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles[, except metal items may be
stainless steel.
4.
Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
D.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types
and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and
insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs
shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors
or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
F.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black
and galvanized.
G.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports
to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Power-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete,
steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
b.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1)
Hilti, Inc.
2)
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a Division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
3)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
4)
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, steel, for use in hardened Portland cement
concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials in which used.
a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
b.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1)
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries.
2)
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3)
Hilti, Inc.
4)
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a Division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18;
complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of
supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and
plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Comply with NEC, NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Take care not to weaken concrete or penetrate waterproofing where equipment supports are on concrete
construction.
C.
Obtain prior approval for installation method of structural steel required to frame into building structural
members for the support of equipment, conduit, etc. Welding shall be permitted only when approved by
Engineer’s field representative.
D.
Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.
1.
Metal Decking: Nothing is to be suspended from metal roof decks (no concrete).
E.
Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same
structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel or angle iron racks for
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices.
F.
In overhead spaces, boxes shall be supported independently of raceways and raceways independent of
the boxes. Support boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers.
1.
Where bar hangers are used for boxes, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box
and support the raceway with an independent approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches
from the box. To clarify, box or raceway removal should not require re-supporting of the other.
G.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC,
and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in
NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
H.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system,
sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design
load limits.
1.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction
action for retention in support channel.
I.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings
and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NEC, NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be
supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be
adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design
load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical
items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise
indicated by code:
1.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners
on solid masonry units.
4.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers
and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do
not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm)
thick.
6.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts.
7.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and
other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint
strength and anchorage requirements.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
E.
3.3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal
supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support
and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Coordinate dimensions of concrete housekeeping pads with requirement for equipment supplied.
B.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the
base.
C.
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D.
Anchor equipment to concrete base:
1.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after
erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1
requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of
field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes raceways for electrical wiring. Types of raceways in this Section include the
following:
1.
Rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS).
2.
Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
3.
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
4.
Flexible metal conduit.
5.
Conduit bodies.
6.
Conduit fittings.
7.
Surface raceways.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways and all conduit fittings only.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Layout Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved.
a.
Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
b.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
c.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Record Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways.
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.6
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
NEMA, FB1
Fittings for Metallic Conduit.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
ANSI-C80.1
Rigid Steel Conduit.
b.
ANSI-C80.2
Rigid Steel Conduit, Enameled.
c.
ANSI-C80.3
Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-coated.
d.
ANSI-C80.5
Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
e.
ANSI-C80.6
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC).
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
a.
ASTM F 512-84
Standard Specification for Smooth Wall Poly Vinyl Chloride
UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards pertaining to
electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components listed and labeled by UL, or ETL:
1.
UL 1
2.
UL 5
3.
UL 6
4.
UL 360
5.
UL 514B
6.
UL 797
7.
UL 1242
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate with other Work, including metal and concrete deck installation, as necessary to interface
installation of electrical raceways and components with other Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
B.
Rigid Metallic Conduit:
1.
Allied, a Division of Tyco.
2.
Republic Conduit.
3.
Wheatland Tube Co.
C.
Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings:
1.
AFC Cable Systems, a Division of Tyco.
2.
Al-flex (Steel).
3.
Liquatite.
D.
Conduit Bodies:
1.
Appleton Electric Co.
2.
Carlon (PVC).
3.
Crouse-Hinds Division, Cooper Industries, Inc.
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 2
Fittings fo
Intermed
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
4.
5.
Killark Electric Mfg. Co.
O-Z/Gedney.
E.
Conduit Fittings:
1.
Allied, a Division of Tyco.
2.
Arlington.
3.
Bridgeport Fittings, Incorporated.
4.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
5.
Midwest Electric.
6.
O-Z/Gedney.
7.
RACO.
8.
Steel City.
9.
Thomas and Betts.
F.
Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:
1.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
2.
Lee Products Co.
3.
Walker-Parkersburg.
2.2
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B.
Intermediate Steel Conduit: UL 1242.
C.
Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
D.
Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, zinc-coated steel.
E.
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: UL 360. Fittings shall be specifically approved for use with
this raceway.
2.3
CONDUIT BODIES
A.
General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements for
feeder runs only. Branch circuit use is prohibited. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with
corrosion-resistant screws.
B.
Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for threaded
raceways. Use bodies with set screw or compression type hubs for EMT according to fitting application
specified below.
2.4
CONDUIT FITTINGS
A.
General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Die
cast fittings are not acceptable.
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
B.
Rigid Galvanized Steel, Intermediate Steel and Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Use threaded type with bushed
connections. Factory-installed conduit couplings are acceptable.
C.
Electrical Metallic Tubing Conduit: Use nylon insulated fittings. Steel body or integral conduit sleeve dual
double set-screw type fittings are acceptable for EMT conduits except for mechanical rooms, kitchens and
damp locations where threaded compression types are required. Die cast fittings are not acceptable.
1.
Nylon fittings may be eliminated if rounded box teeth type fitting are used (i.e. Cooper Crouse
Hinds Space Saver).
2.
Colored fittings may be used to meet raceway identification requirements of Division 26 Sections
"Boxes and Cabinets" and "Electrical Identification."
D.
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Use fittings designed specifically for conduit type of same manufacturer.
E.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Use nylon insulated throats of the following type:
1.
Wedge and screw type.
2.
Squeeze on clamp type with one or two screws.
3.
Steel multiple-point type for threading into internal wall of conduit.
F.
Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: Use threaded grounding cone with steel compression ring and tightening
gland, steel body with insulated throat.
G.
Unlike Conduit: Use connectors which meet individual conduit fittings requirements for both and are UL
listed and labeled for such use.
H.
Expansion and Deflection Fittings:
1.
Conduit movement in straight line direction:
a.
O-Z/Gedney type AX series.
2.
Up to 3/4 inch deflection and movement in all directions:
a.
O-Z/Gedney type DX series.
3.
Deflection and movement beyond 3/4 inch in all directions:
a.
O-Z/Gedney type AXDX series.
I.
Conduit Bushings:
1.
Rigid Steel and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Threaded, grounded, insulating type with
thermosetting or fiber insert in a metal body.
2.
Electrical Metallic Tubing Conduit: Identical to rigid steel or intermediate steel conduit bushing on
electrical metallic tubing combination coupling.
3.
Insulated Grounding Bushings or grounding wedges on metallic conduits shall be installed per
Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
4.
Plenum Conduit: UL approved for air handling spaces when so installed.
J.
Conduit Seals:
1.
Cast in place with pressure ring and sealing grommet:
a.
O-Z/Gedney type FSK series with FSKA membrane clamp adapter.
2.
Cast in place with two pairs of pressure rings and sealing grommets:
a.
O-Z/Gedney type WSK series.
3.
For sealing conduits installed in core-drilled, sleeved, or precast holes:
a.
O-Z/Gedney type CSM series with CSMC membrane clamp adapter.
b.
Thunderline Link-Seal series.
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
2.5
SURFACE RACEWAYS
A.
2.6
General: Sizes and channels as indicated. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway.
WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
General: Electrical wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be generally NEMA 1 construction of types, sizes,
and number of channels as indicated. Fittings and accessories including but not limited to couplings,
connectors, tees, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, and end caps shall match
and mate with wireway as required for complete system. Provide corrosion resistant phosphate primer
and baked gray epoxy finish. Where features are not indicated, select to fulfill wiring requirements and
comply with applicable provisions of NEC and NEMA standards.
B.
Wireway covers shall be hinged type, as indicated, otherwise screw cover type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUIT RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
1.
May be used in:
a.
Interior locations.
b.
Direct contact with concrete.
2.
Shall be used in:
a.
Exposed exterior locations.
b.
Exposed interior damp or wet locations.
c.
Hazardous locations.
d.
Medium voltage interior applications (throughout).
e.
Within seven foot area around boilers, incinerators and other heat producing equipment.
f.
Exposed interior locations within seven feet of the floor for all low voltage power and signal
conductors (except electrical rooms).
g.
Interior parking levels and exterior decks where exposed.
h.
Biological and bio-safety laboratories.
i.
Metal decking cells above beams.
B.
Intermediate Metallic Conduit:
1.
May be used in:
a.
All applications noted for rigid galvanized steel conduit except hazardous locations and
interior medium voltage cable installations.
C.
Electrical Metal Tubing:
1.
May be used in:
a.
Concealed interior locations above ceilings, in hollow studded partitions and in the cores of
concrete masonry unit partitions.
b.
Exposed interior locations above seven feet.
c.
Low voltage electric and communication room applications.
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
2.
Shall be used:
a.
All exposed interior locations above seven feet for conductors of any type.
D.
Flexible Metal Conduit:
1.
May be used in:
a.
Four to six feet long lengths for final connection to luminaries.
b.
Steel studwalls between outlets and from outlet to rigid raceway leaving wall.
2.
Shall be used in:
a.
18 inches to 22 inch long lengths to form a slack "U" between rigid raceway system and:
1)
Busway plug-in devices.
2)
Rotating equipment.
3)
Vibrating equipment.
4)
Equipment requiring adjustments in position.
5)
Transformers.
E.
Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used as specified for flexible metal conduit as follows:
1.
Shall be used in:
a.
Final connection to fire pump motor.
b.
Final connection to all kitchen and laboratory equipment.
c.
Damp locations.
d.
Mechanical rooms.
e.
Wet locations.
f.
18 inch to 22 inch long lengths to form a slack "U" between rigid raceway system and
motors.
2.
Shall not be used in HVAC plenums.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC, NECA1, and as follows:
1.
Provide power and wiring raceways to control devices for equipment by this or other Divisions.
2.
Minimum conduit raceway size shall be 3/4 inch except switch legs, which may be 1/2 inch and 3/8
inch flexible conduit may be use for final connection to luminaires.
3.
Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Division 26 Section "Hangers and
Supports for Electrical Systems."
4.
Cut square, free of burrs due to field cutting or manufacture, and use bushings approved for use
where necessary.
5.
Increase conduit raceway size as required due to NEC conductor derating requirements and
availability. Minimum feeder conductor sizes, based upon NEC Table 310.16 and 40% maximum
conduit raceway fill, shall be as shown on Drawings. If raceway type altered, be responsible for
associated feeder conduit raceway size per NEC to meet 40% maximum fill.
B.
Raceway Routing:
1.
Conceal in finished rooms except where exposure is clearly indicated. Provide stainless steel
escutcheon plates for all finished wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations.
2.
Install raceways exposed in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms and electrical closets.
Maintain a minimum 7 ft. head room.
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
Install raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow
the surface contours as much as practical.
Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from
the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs
only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the
run such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases provide
field bends for parallel raceways.
Route raceways as required by job conditions unless dimensioned positions are shown on
Drawings. Verify exact locations of all raceways, pull boxes, and junction boxes; resolve any
conflicts before installation. Give priority in available space to large steam mains, steam lines that
pitch, waste lines, drain lines, large air ducts, and all structural steel, unless indicated otherwise.
a.
Maintain raceway and box separations per NEC.
Elevation of Raceway: Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam
piping.
Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise
indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.
Bends shall exceed minimum bending radii of wire and cable to be run within.
Install with not more than three 90 degree bends or more than 100 feet of straight conduit between
pull boxes. Provide and install all additional pull boxes to meet this requirement.
Minimum Spacing: 3 inches between raceways and cold water or waste piping, and 12 inches
between raceways and parallel steam pipes, condensate pipes, hot water pipes and air ducts.
Do not place raceway less than one inch apart where they cross each other.
Install to provide adequate grounding between all outlets and the established electrical system
ground.
Install to prevent water pockets.
Make no horizontal raceway runs in masonry walls.
Raceway Installation:
1.
Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection.
2.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of
bends is not visible above the finished slab.
3.
Raceways embedded in slabs:
a.
Refer to Division 03 Section "Cast-in Place Concrete" for limitation on placement of conduit
in concrete.
b.
Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure them to prevent sagging or shifting
during concrete placement.
c.
Do not embed any aluminum raceways in concrete unless a special coating is applied that
prevents chemical reaction between conduit and concrete.
d.
Maximum outside diameters of embedded conduit shall be 1 inch. Minimum spacing
between conduits shall be 3 conduit diameters clear.
e.
Where conduit runs perpendicular to steel deck flutes, place conduit directly on steel deck.
Where conduit runs parallel to steel deck flutes, place on ¾ inch chair in low flute, with one
conduit per flute maximum.
f.
Do not place conduit between reinforcing bars and concrete surface. Provide minimum 11/2 inch concrete cover over conduits.
g.
Do not lap or cross conduits at any point.
h.
Do not tie conduits to headed shear studs. Place conduits parallel to beams with headed
shear studs at least 18 inches away from studs.
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
i.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Single conduit penetrations shall not be permitted in more than 3 consecutive deck flutes.
Submit all variations to the Architect for review prior to the routing of conduits.
When installed embedded in concrete, or, in direct contact with the earth:
a.
Provide rigid galvanized steel or IMC elbows for vertical rise through the concrete.
b.
Provide rigid galvanized steel or IMC conduit for the first ten foot section when leaving or
entering a building.
c.
Make watertight with asphaltum or other approved compound applied to conduit joints
before assembled.
Join raceways with fittings and make joints tight. Use bonding jumpers to provide electrical
continuity of the raceway system for all metallic feeder conduits one inch and larger. Make
raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or
wedges to assure electrical continuity. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to
enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations
cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box.
Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end
bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so
the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within
raceways.
Install a bonding wire in all flexible metal conduits.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic
line having not less than 200 lbs. tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each
end of the pull wire. Tag at each end identifying other end location.
Refer to Division 26 "Conduit Rough-In Systems" for special raceway installation requirements for
telecommunications, systems (low-voltage, signaling systems) cabling.
Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid galvanized steel conduit; flexible metal
conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under
this contract, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs with floor.
Whenever conduit is installed on exposed steel columns, the conduit shall be installed on the
column web, and not on the flange.
All penetrations through existing floors shall be core drilled and sleeved.
All conduit knockouts or holes on electrical apparatus which are not used shall be provided with
new plugs to match the NEMA rating of the enclosure.
D.
Conduit Fittings:
1.
Run with couplings approved for the conduit being used. Running threads and chase nipples will
not be accepted in runs of threaded conduit.
2.
Generally use mechanical dual set-screw type on EMT conduit except-use threaded compression
type on EMT conduit within mechanical rooms, kitchens, and damp locations.
3.
Install grounding bushings per Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
E.
Raceway Identification:
1.
Provide raceway identification per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
F.
Expansion-Deflection Fittings:
1.
Install in all raceways at the expansion joints of the building in such a manner that the expansion
joints of the building will function properly and not stress any electrical raceways. Movement will
be required in all directions. Refer to "A" series Drawings for facility expansion joint locations.
2.
Install on all straight conduit runs 1 inch trade size or larger in excess of 100 feet. Movement will
be required in straight line direction only.
3.
Maintain grounding continuity at each expansion-contraction fitting.
G.
Conduit Seals:
1.
Use type "FSK" cast-in-place where conduit passes through foundation walls less than 60 inches
below finished grade.
2.
Use type "WSK" cast-in place where conduit passes through foundation walls at 60 inches or more
below finished grade.
3.
Install watertight seals at all conduits passing through horizontal barriers. These seals may be
types "FSK," "WSK," or "CSML." Sleeves shall extend at least two inches above the finished floor
with 1/2 inch space around the conduit and this space sealed permanently watertight with a
removable material (concrete not acceptable).
4.
Install where conduits pass through barriers having a 30 degree F or greater temperature
differential in the spaces on either side at anytime, and in conduits entering or leaving supply and
return air plenums. Install pliable removable plastic compounded in the nearest box at the top of
vertical runs and at the hot end of horizontal runs.
H.
Surface Raceways:
1.
Support with expansion shields, concrete inserts or masonry shields, as required for wall where
wireway is mounted. Provide supports at 5 foot centers.
I.
Surface Non-Metallic Raceways: Install only as specifically indicated on Drawings. Substitute surface
metal raceways in areas of public assembly.
J.
Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:
1.
Support horizontally with expansion shields, concrete inserts or masonry shields, as required for
wall where wireway is mounted. Provide supports at 5 foot centers.
2.
Provide at least 42 inch clear in front of all wireways with front covers.
K.
Multi-Outlet Assemblies:
1.
Support assemblies at 18 inch centers maximum, at each end, branch, and box. Provide blank
cover sections at sinks and basins extending 6 inches on either side of basin. Make transition to
other wiring method with proper fittings.
3.3
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 33 – Raceways for Electrical Systems
1009/4010.01
3.4
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.5
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 "Penetration Firestopping."
PROTECTION
A.
3.6
Protect coatings, finishes and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and remove
burrs, dirt, and construction debris before installing or pulling conductors.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes cabinets, boxes and fittings for electrical installation and certain types of electrical
fittings not covered in other sections. Types of products specified in this Section include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
Steel Device Boxes.
Cast Device Boxes.
Single Service Floor Boxes.
Multi-Service Floor Boxes.
Multi-Service Wall Boxes
Pull and Junction Boxes.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Divisions 26 Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
For the following raceway components.
attachments to other work.
a.
b.
1.4
Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
Conduit fittings.
Back to back recessed box or cabinet installation locations list, if any.
COORDINATION
A.
1.5
Coordinate wall and floor box and cabinet penetration in rated walls with Division 07 firestopping installer
to ensure rating is maintained.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
UL Listing and Labeling: Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL.
B.
National Electrical Code Compliance: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National
Electrical Code."
C.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standard 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum)."
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
B.
Steel Device Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Cast Device Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
EGS/Appleton Electric Co.
Midland Ross Corp. (Steel City).
Raco; a Hubbell Co.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
EGS/Appleton Electric Co.
Crouse Hinds Electrical Construction Material; Div. Of Cooper Industries, Inc.
Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
O-Z/Gedney, a General Signal Co.
Single and Ganged Service Floor Boxes:
1.
Visible:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Concealed:
a.
b.
E.
FSR, Inc. FL-600P Series.
Hubbell HBLCFB Series.
Mystery Electronics FMCA Series.
Multi-Service Wall Boxes
1.
2.
3.
G.
Raceway Components, Inc. Series RC560.
Midland Ross 664 Series.
Multi-Service Floor Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Carlon.
Hubbell.
Lew Electric Fittings Co.
Midland Ross (Steel City) 640 Series.
FSR Inc. – PWB-100 Series.
Hubbell – “NetSelect Advantage” NSA Series.
Or equivalent.
Pull and Junction Boxes:
1.
2.
O-Z/Gedney, a General Signal Co.
Crouse Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Appleton Electric Co.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
Lee Products.
Hammond Manufacturing.
Electromate Corporation.
Cabinets:
1.
Galvanized Sheet Steel:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
2.2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
Square-D.
Chicago Switchboard.
Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse.
General Electric.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
Illinois Switchboard.
Lee Products.
Crenlo, Inc.
Hammond Manufacturing.
Electromate Corporation.
Sheet Aluminum.
Siemens.
Hennessy Products, Inc.
Wiegman, a Division of Hubbell, Inc.
CABINETS AND BOXES - GENERAL
A.
2.3
Electrical Cabinets and Boxes: Of indicated types, sizes and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not
indicated, provide units of types, sizes and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items
complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or
wet locations. Box depth shall exceed depth of installed device by 1/4 inch.
MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A.
Sheet Steel: Flat-rolled, code-gage, galvanized steel.
B.
Fasteners for General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated
items.
C.
Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware.
D.
Cast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures and Covers: Copper-free aluminum except as otherwise specified.
E.
Exterior Finish: Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise indicated.
F.
Painted Interior Finish: Where indicated, white baked enamel.
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
G.
2.4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets and Enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel for
conduit hubs, with ground terminal bushings and box connectors.
STEEL DEVICE BOXES
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Switch Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
C.
4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch depth minimum, without clamps for either conduit or tubing.
4-11/16 inch square by 1-1/2 inch depth minimum, without clamps for either conduit or tubing.
Wall and Ceiling Luminaire Boxes:
1.
2.5
Single gang - 2 inch wide by 3 inch long by 1-1/2 inch depth minimum.
Two gang - 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep.
Multi-gang - 4-1/2 inch high by 2-1/8 inch deep by width as required by number of gangs.
Outlet, Receptacle, Device, and Junction Boxes:
1.
2.
D.
Fabricate from galvanized or cadmium plated pressed sheet steel, with covers, extension, etc., as
required by the installation.
Box depth shall exceed depth of installed device by 1/4 inch.
Listed and identified for weight supported.
CAST DEVICE BOXES
A.
General:
1.
B.
Switch Boxes:
1.
C.
FS or FD series, single, two, multi-gang as required for wiring device arrangement.
Outlet, Receptacle, Device, and Junction Boxes:
1.
2.6
Copper-free aluminum or malleable iron with matching cast cover.
FD series, single, two, multi-gang as required for wiring device arrangement.
SINGLE AND GANGED SERVICE FLOOR BOXES
A.
Visible:
1.
Bronze brass edge ring and floor plate, exterior leveling screws, vertically and angularly adjustable
both before and after concrete pour. Carpet, wood, sport mat or tile plate assemblies as required
by outlet and floor construction.
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
Water Tight:
a.
b.
3.
Brushed aluminum brass finish on all exposed surfaces.
Type and quantity of outlets shown on Drawings. Telephone and computer outlets shall
have 3/4 inch diameter grommeted holes.
Concealed:
1.
2.7
1/2 inch diameter by one inch high of same material as service fitting.
Above Floor Service Fitting:
a.
b.
B.
Same as for flush type except box adjusted to allow covering removable material to ride
over waterproof cover.
Floor Station Stem:
a.
7.
Receptacles - hinged lift lid.
Telecommunications – hinged lift lid.
Scoreboard – hinged lift lid.
Rectangular Watertight Recessed Floor Plates:
a.
6.
Galvanized stamped steel 4-11/16 inch square.
Rectangular Watertight and Scrub-Tight Flush Floor Plates:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Cast iron (or non-metallic box sized to accommodate housed device) with threaded conduit
openings and depth as required for floor construction.
Corrosion-resistant finish.
Concrete Tight:
a.
4.
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
Recessed galvanized stamped steel floor box with space for both high tension and low tension
wiring. Fully adjustable prior to and after concrete pour. Hinged access cover to accept floor
covering and be operable without exposing any metal parts.
MULTI-SERVICE FLOOR BOXES
A.
Flush concrete-tight steel floor box housing a minimum of three independent wiring compartments for
separation of systems. Unit shall be complete with exterior leveling screws for vertically and angular
adjustment both before and after concrete pour and carpet or tile plate assemblies as required by outlet(s)
and floor construction.
B.
Outlet types shall be as shown on Drawings. Provide steel floor box accessories and inserts to
accommodate specific requirements of wiring separation including:
1.
2.
3.
Line Voltage: Low Voltage: Other.
Emergency: Normal: Other.
Data: Other.
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
4.
AV: Other.
5.
Microphone: Other.Flush hinged door shall have carpet or wood insert flange for application and
shall provide access to jacks and cable exiting with door closed. Finish shall be brushed satin brass.
D.
2.8
Hardware for wiring separation.
MULTI-SERVICE WALL BOXES
A.
Multi-gang, sheet steel box assembly, designed and fabricated for concealed rough-in to wall
construction, behind a single, flush to wall, finished faceplate.
B.
Backbox assembly shall be of sheet steel fabrication, designed to provide mounting provisions for multiservice/multi-gang, line and low voltage types of electrical wiring devices such as; AC receptacles, A-V
wiring connectors, and voice/data modular plug-in jacks.
1.
Overall backbox depth, with separate AC and low voltage boxes installed, shall be not greater
than 3.6 inch deep, designed for flush, concealed rough-in into 3.5 inch stud wall construction.
2.
Shall be provided with individual, separate metal outlet boxes for field connection to AC wiring
raceways and cables, and to low voltage wiring raceways and cables.
3.
Compartments for AC wiring devices and low voltage jacks shall be physically and electrically
separated and isolated.
C.
Interior of backbox assembly shall be open, free of outlet devices, and designed to allow field connection
of cables to the wiring devices contain therein.
1.
D.
Wiring devices shall be physically installed flush to the top, bottom, or back faces of the backbox,
leaving the interior of the backbox open to allow for cable connections.
Outlet types shall be as shown on Drawings. Backbox assembly shall be designed to allow for installation
of not less than the following devices:
1.
2.
3.
AC duplex receptacle (one)
Modular A-V adapter plate inserts (multiple)
Modular voice/data plate inserts (multiple)
E.
A flat, sheet metal coverplate, with beveled edges and slotted opening for cable egress shall be provided;
designed for flush to wall installation over concealed backbox assembly.
1.
Coverplate shall have white factory painted, smooth finish.
F.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.9
FSR Inc. - PWB-100 Series
Hubbell – “NetSelect Advantage” NSA Series.
Or equivalent.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
General:
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
B.
Non-rusting, non-sparking, non-magnetic and bolt on cast cover utilizing stainless steel screws.
Cast Bronze:
1.
2.10
Corrosion resistant, hot-dip galvanized and bolt on cast cover utilizing stainless steel screws.
Cast Aluminum:
1.
E.
Minimum 14 gauge, solder or braze all seams, roll edges at openings and bolt on covers.
Cast Iron:
1.
D.
NEMA type and size as required by area or as shown, complete with matching cover. Where
necessary, gaskets shall be used to prevent entrance of moisture.
Galvanized Sheet Steel:
1.
C.
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
Non-rusting, non-sparking, non-magnetic and bolt on cast cover utilizing brass screws.
CABINETS
A.
Comply with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes."
B.
General: NEMA type and size as required by area, application, or as shown. Cabinet shall consist of a
box and a front consisting of a one piece frame and hinged door. Hinged side shall be dependent upon
physical application. Arrange door to close against a rabbet placed around the inside edge of the frame,
with a uniformly close fit between door and frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not over 24 inches apart,
to hold fronts to cabinet boxes and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not
over 24 inches apart and not over 6 inches from top and bottom of door. Louvers for cabinet ventilation
shall be provided as required by application. For flush cabinets, make the front approximately 3/4 inch
larger than the box all around. For surface mounted cabinets make front same height and width as box.
C.
Doors: Double doors for cabinets wider than 24 inches. Cabinets wider than 48 inches may have sliding
or removable doors.
D.
Locks: Combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same system keyed alike.
Locks may be omitted on signal, power and lighting cabinets located within wire closets and mechanicalelectrical rooms. Locks shall be of a type to permit doors to latch closed without locking. Latch shall be
padlocking type for exterior applications.
E.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Minimum 14 gauge, solder or braze all seams, roll edges at openings and
minimum 12 gauge doors to match panelboard enclosures.
F.
Sheet Aluminum: Minimum .125 inch 5052-H32 sheet aluminum thickness, welded seams, gasketed
weathertight door, weather-resistant hinge, and weather-resistant padlockable latching mechanism.
2.11
A.
ACCESSORIES
Provide grounding kits and/or stabs for each box and cabinet.
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and installation conditions.
B.
Maintain the environmental rating of the enclosures. Install in the openings only listed or recognized
conduit hubs or control devices with the same integrity as the enclosure, in compliance with the
installation instructions of the device.
1.
2.
C.
Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs.
Use listed enclosure conduit connectors to maintain raceway to enclosure ground integrity. Cut
through paint as applicable. Cutting slots shall not be acceptable for conduit entries into
enclosures.
Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems."
1.
Fasten boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by raceways.
D.
Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes indicated.
E.
Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel.
F.
Refinish and paint enclosures in field due to any field modifications.
3.2
APPLICATIONS
A.
Furnish electrical identification as indicated in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
B.
Cabinets: Flush mounted, NEMA enclosure type 1 except as otherwise indicated.
C.
Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of materials
and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Interior Dry Locations: NEMA type 1, sheet steel or nonmetallic as permitted by local code.
Interior Dry Locations: Sheet steel, NEMA type 1.
Interior Dry Locations: Nonmetallic, NEMA type 1.
Interior Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Cast metal, NEMA type 3.
Wet Locations: NEMA type 4 enclosures.
Corrosive Locations: NEMA type 4X enclosures.
D.
Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for each
location except as otherwise indicated.
E.
Floor Boxes: In slabs on grade and wet locations use cast iron (or non-metallic) boxes. At other locations
in slabs, use concrete-tight stamped steel boxes.
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
2.
3.3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
When non-metallic is used, assure ground continuity to wiring devices and for through box branch
circuits.
Coordinate plate assemblies for applicable floor construction.
INSTALLATION OF BOXES
A.
Size all boxes as required by the National Electrical Code with oversize boxes as shown on Drawings.
Obtain special backboxes with associated equipment when available.
B.
Provide where required for outlet facility and rough-in requirements. Securely support from building
construction with rods or bar hangers independent of raceways. Provide backing extension for all steel
device boxes in stud walls or support box on two opposite sides such that cover plate and drywall is not
stressed to hold box in position.
C.
Give priority in available space to large steam mains, steam lines that pitch, waste lines, drain lines, large
air duct, and all structural steel, unless shown otherwise.
1.
2.
3.
Minimum Spacing: 3 inches between boxes and cold water or waste piping and 6 inches between
boxes and parallel steam pipes, condensate pipes, hot water pipes and air ducts.
Do not support from ceiling supporting system, mechanical system supports or mechanical
systems.
Do not penetrate or anchor into mechanical ductwork.
D.
Install concealed, flush to finished wall, floor or ceiling construction materials except where otherwise
shown or specified as surface mounted. To maximize available future wall space, do not assume surface
mounted boxes or associated raceways in equipment or electrical rooms.
E.
Maintain accessibility to all boxes. Z-spline ceilings are considered not accessible.
F.
Size and install so no part is visible and is completely covered by wall plate or fixture.
G.
Do not cut insulation in walls to install boxes.
H.
Do not use through-the-wall boxes.
I.
Do not install concealed, flush boxes back to back for both fire and sound rating issues. Drawings are
considered diagrammatic. Those installations not approved shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner.
J.
Install boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
K.
Where two or more devices are shown or otherwise specified to be installed at the same location and at
the same height, rough those devices in a common multi-gang barriered box as appropriate for the device
types.
1.
L.
Maintain box and raceway separations per NEC. Pullbox barriers will not be acceptable except for
special cases brought to the engineer's attention prior to installation.
Where two or more devices are shown or otherwise specified to be installed at the same location but at
different height elevations, rough the boxes vertically on a common center line.
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
M.
Install in center of glazed tile, brick, block or other masonry wall material with square cornered tile or
masonry extension rings of proper depth.
N.
Install outlet boxes in sheet rock walls with square cornered tile or masonry rings of proper depth.
Standard drywall rings will not be acceptable. Maintain NEC required tolerances.
O.
Close off all unused openings with proper fittings.
P.
Install outlet boxes for electric water coolers concealed inside cooler cabinet. Locate outlet boxes using
rough-in template furnished with cooler.
Q.
Combination devices (i.e. switch and receptacle) installed in minimum 2 gang box under common wall
plate.
R.
Provide box and cabinet barriers to segregate voltages 300 volts and greater and to segregate normal
and emergency distribution system branches.
S.
Set floor boxes level at height to match trim with flooring type.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
All boxes shall be concealed and accessible after completion of building.
B.
Installation in finished spaces requiring access panels is prohibited except where specifically shown or
directed.
3.5
BOX IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.6
Per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
BOX COVERS
A.
Provide appropriate screw cover for all boxes dependent upon type and application.
B.
Provide spannerhead screws for exposed covers in psychiatric and high security areas.
3.7
BOX APPLICATION
A.
Exterior walls shall not be considered interior dry locations for recessed exterior devices. Sheet steel
boxes shall not be used.
B.
Galvanized steel boxes may be used in:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Concealed interior locations above ceilings and in hollow studded partitions.
Exposed interior location above seven feet.
Direct contact with concrete except slab on grade.
Stud walls of kitchens and laundries.
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
C.
Cast boxes shall be used in:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Exterior locations.
Hazardous locations.
Within seven feet area around boilers, incinerators and other heat producing equipment.
Exposed interior locations within seven feet of the floor.
Direct contact with earth.
Direct contact with concrete in slab on grade.
Wet locations.
Kitchens and laundries except in stud walls.
Sectional Boxes:
1.
3.8
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 35 - Boxes and Cabinets
Shall not be used in any application.
INSTALLATION OF CABINETS
A.
3.9
Support securely independent from building construction and align with adjacent equipment. Top shall be
6 foot - 2 inches to top of trim.
GROUNDING
A.
3.10
Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a grounding
conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or enclosure.
CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR
A.
Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt and construction debris and
repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions and weld marks.
B.
Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the tray manufacturer.
C.
Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating.
END OF SECTION 26 05 35
BOXES AND CABINETS
26 05 35 - 11
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Sleeve coordination and installation.
2.
Sleeves for raceways and cables.
3.
Watertight sleeve seals.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Coordination drawing depicting sleeve locations.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry
walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
B.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
C.
Cut and patch for sleeve installations. Coordinate with work of other trades.
D.
Coordinate sleeves with cable installer(s).
E.
Coordinate with cable installer to ensure cables are rigidly supported on both sides of the floor or wall
assembly.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
26 05 44 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A.
Steel Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B.
Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3 or 3.5mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
2.2
WATERTIGHT SLEEVE SEALS
A.
2.3
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and
raceway or cable.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
Metraflex Co.
d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
3.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type
and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
4.
Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
5.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
GROUT
A.
Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or
floors.
B.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement
grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
26 05 44 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install sleeves, conduits, and cables with required clearance spaces allowing proper installation of wall
and sealing materials. At no time exceed the outside diameter of the sleeve conduit or cables penetrating
barriers by more than 2 inch or less than 1/4 inch for all penetrations of barriers. If access openings are
required in raceway, install 24 inch minimum lengths of runs between access openings and point of entry
into barriers. Perform all patching of barriers as required. Patch with materials compatible with barrier
construction and fire resistant rating equal to, or greater than, the barrier rating.
B.
Coordinate firestopping at all raceways and cables passing through floor structures and interior walls
noted as fire resistant rated barriers, and interior walls noted as smoke barriers.
C.
Coordinate rating of smoke and fire barriers where electrical boxes, cabinet, or equipment is installed
within using firestopping pads or foam.
3.2
SLEEVES INSTALLATION FOR CABLE PENETRATIONS
A.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B.
Aggregate cross-sectional area of cable(s) shall be maximum 45 percent of the associated opening or
sleeve.
C.
Installed bushed metallic raceway or cable having metallic armor where passing through one hour fire
rated vertical barriers.
D.
Install bushed rigid steel raceway sleeve where cables are passing through two hour or more fire rated
vertical barriers.
E.
Install only bushed rigid steel raceway where passing through floors or horizontal fire barriers except
where cable is totally enclosed in a fire resistant rated shaft.
F.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install cast iron sleeves for penetrations unless core drilled holes or formed
openings are used in concrete slabs and walls. Install watertight sleeves during erection of slabs and
walls.
G.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
H.
Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1.
For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches
(400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2.
For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides
equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
I.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces 2 inches per side for bushings.
J.
Provide minimum clearance space of 2 inches from opening to all adjacent raceways, ducts, pipes,
sleeves, etc., when penetrating barriers.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
26 05 44 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling
K.
Provide after-set sleeves at all concrete floor penetrations to extend up above floor 2 inches when a
penetration is required of an existing slab condition. Core drill hole 1/2 inch diameter less than sleeve
size. Core drill larger hole partway thru floor slab to allow sleeve to sit in place. Provide tight pack dry
grout fill in core cut all round sleeve and provide gun applied sealant all around with sloped finish. Pack
fire safing insulation all around raceway and provide 3/4 inch deep gun applied sealant all around at top of
penetration.
L.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) annular clear space between cables and between sleeve
and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.
M.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint
compound for gypsum board assemblies.
N.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable,
using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
3.3
WATERTIGHT SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A.
Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material
and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in
annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4
CABLE TRAY CABLE PENETRATION COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate bag type firestopping installation per manufacturer’s recommendations and Division 07 to seal
interior of tray after installation of cables for covered solid bottom ladder type cable trays extending
through smoke and fire barriers. Coordinate other firestopping methods around exterior of tray.
B.
Coordinate Division 07 fire-rated cable assemblies for cable tray cabling systems to pass through smoke
and fire barriers. Cable tray systems shall not penetrate wall and will stop within one foot of wall.
C.
Coordinate sleeves for cable tray cabling systems to pass through smoke and fire barriers. Cable tray
systems will not penetrate wall and shall stop within one foot of wall.
3.5
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 26 05 44
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
26 05 44 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
Identification for raceway and cable.
Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Test/Inspection identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections, and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated including labeling machines if used.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
C.
1.4
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components
used in identification specific products.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and
graphic features of identification products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label
printers, shall comply with UL 969.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.5
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the
Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and
Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use
consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where
devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Brady USA, Inc. Industrial Products Division.
BW Industries, Inc.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
Rhino/DYMO, a Newell Rubbermaid Company.
Seton Name Plate Corporation.
FONT
A.
Arial uppercase.
B.
Text abbreviations other than equipment identifications permitted only as approved.
2.3
RACEWAY AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for
each raceway and cable size.
B.
Color for System Identification and Printed Text:
1.
2.
C.
Per system or NEC branch color coding specified.
Identification Label: Indicate system or service. Include branch and voltage text for NEC electrical
distribution.
Self Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemicalresistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
BOX WIRING IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Self Adhesive Write-On Tags: Vinyl type with black pre-printed "System/Panelboard:", "Circuit No:" and
"Load:" in three fill in lines on white field.
1.
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, blank ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
B.
Self-Adhesive Labels: Field machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process with
System/Panelboard, Circuit No. and Load text.
C.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, length as required for text by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 1.3 mm), with
stamped text, punched or drilled for screw mounting.
2.5
CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Color Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1
to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B.
Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification text machine
printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
C.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014 inch (0.35-mm- thick aluminum sheet, with
stamped, embossed, or scribed text, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently securing
around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
D.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped text, punched for
use with self locking nylon tie fastener.
E.
Tie On Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and
polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
F.
Self adhesive Write-On Tags: Vinyl type with black pre-printed "System/Panelboard:", "Circuit No.:", and
"Load:" in three fill in lines on white field.
1.
2.6
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A.
2.7
3 inch (75-mm) wide, 5 mil (0.12 -mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear
vinyl overlay.
UNDERGROUND RACEWAY MARKING TAPE
A.
Provide heavy gauge, not less than 5 mils thick, by 6” (150 mm) wide, polyethylene marking tape with
integral metallic detection foil applied therein:
1.
Color: APWA Yellow.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
B.
Wording: “CAUTION BURIED UTILITY LINE BELOW”
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.8
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
Seton.
Panduit Corp.
Emedco.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Self Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured
for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Baked Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors,
legend, and size required for application. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal
size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
D.
Metal Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate
butyrate signs with 0.0396 inch (1 mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size
required for application. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14
inches (250 by 360 mm).
2.9
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq.
in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Electrical Assembly Single-Line:
1.
2.
2.10
Engraved text with black letters on white face.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
Framed acrylic screw mounted full size record drawing.
Printed operating instructions may be included as an option to separate signage.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, color coded by system, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm).
B.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, color coded by system, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm). Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.
C.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, color coded by
system. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm).
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
D.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting, color coded by
system. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm).
E.
Stenciled Text: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25
mm).
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. Minimum letter
height shall be 1/4 inch 93.2 mm).
ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
Adhesive Dot Label: 1/2 inch (64 mm) vinyl dot color coded by system.
CABLE TIES
General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self
extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
A.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa).
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
Color: Black.
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.14
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa).
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
Color: White/Clear.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa).
UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C).
Color: Red.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws
with nuts and flat and lock washers.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL COLOR CODING OF SYSTEMS
A.
Provide NEC electrical distribution branch color coding as follows:
1. Normal:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Building Automation System:
a.
b.
c.
System ID or Nameplate:
Text:
Cable Jacket:
Orange
Yellow
Orange with Yellow Stripe
Provide Division 26 systems color coding as follows:
1.
Center Hung Cable Tray (tips):
a.
2.
3.
Per associated Section
System ID:
Per associated Section
Lighting Control Systems:
a.
b.
c.
4.
System ID:
Wiring Devices and Wall Plates:
a.
System ID or Nameplate:
Text:
Cable Jacket:
Gray
White
Gray with White Stripe
Miscellaneous Control:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Black
White
Per associated Section
Provide Division 23 systems color coding as follows:
1.
C.
System ID or Nameplate:
Text:
Conductors:
System ID or Nameplate:
Text:
Cable Jacket:
Gray
Yellow
Gray with Yellow Stripe
Provide Division 28 systems color coding as follows:
1.
Rescue Assistance:
a.
b.
c.
d.
System ID/Cable Jacket:
Nameplate:
Text:
Raceway:
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Orange
Red
Yellow
Orange
26 05 53 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
Fire Alarm:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
System ID/Cable Jacket:
Nameplate:
Text:
Raceway:
Red
Red
White
Red
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. Use Drawing nomenclature unless
otherwise directed.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E.
System Identification Color Banding for Raceway Systems and Cables: Each color band shall completely
encircle cable or raceway. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
F.
Box and Equipment Identification: Attach to box or enclosure cover in location with high visibility.
G.
Test and Inspection Identification: Attach to appropriate box, enclosure or device for most convenient
viewing to operation and maintenance personnel. Install inside device door in finished areas.
H.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed in Division
26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (100-600 Volts)" for ungrounded
service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
1.
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of
6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last
two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring
factory cable markings.
I.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a
location with high visibility and accessibility.
J.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1.
2.
K.
Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
Underground Raceway Marking Tape: Prior to backfilling of underground raceway, duct and ductbank
trenches, install continuous length of underground marking tape directly above buried raceways, ducts and
ductbanks, at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of
raceways and ducts installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm)
overall.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
L.
3.3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting Sections.
APPLICATION
A.
Raceway Systems and Cables Identification:
1.
2.
Accessible Raceways, AC and MC Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits
More Than 30 amperes: Identify with self adhesive vinyl label per NEC electrical distribution
branch color coding including identification label. Install at box and conduit fittings within 12
inches, each side of joints, and at bushed conduits.
Accessible Raceways and Cables of Division 23 through 28 Systems: Identify the systems with
preprinted identification label, self adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands per color coding. Install at
box and conduit fittings within 12 inches, each side of joints, and at bushed conduits.
a.
B.
Box Identification:
1.
2.
Color-coded, field painting: Initial color-coded field painting of inside of system boxes and
enclosures is allowable for Contractor identifications during wiring installation.
Wiring Identification: Identify Division 21-28 system or panelboard, circuit number, and load on
outside of box cover with self-adhesive write on tags.
a.
C.
For finished areas or exterior areas, locate identification inside box cover.
Conductor Identification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Feeder Conductor Identification: For primary conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull
and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use marker tape. Identify source and circuit number
of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.
Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch
circuits in same junction or pull box, use marker tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor
according to source and circuit number.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source and
circuit number.
Pull wires in Empty Raceways: Tag pull wires at each end and in each intermediate box, manhole,
or other enclosure identifying other end location using metal tags.
Division 23 through 28 Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,
signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.
a.
b.
c.
D.
Exception: No identification required for raceways and cable with readily identifiable
terminations within the same room.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals within boxes, enclosures and at junctions,
terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Device Wall Plate Identification:
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
Device Wall Plate Identification: Engrave plates below with 1/8 inch high black uppercase letters.
2.
Other than NEMA 5-15R and 5-20R receptacles shall be laser or mechanically engraved labeled
with self-adhesive typed label with the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
E.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
Voltage.
Number of phases.
Current rating.
Example: "208/3P/50A."
Single outlet type NEMA 5-20R bed receptacle, tied to bedside headwall bedstop relay, shall be
laser or mechanically engraved "BED."
Dialysis GFCI receptacle shall be laser or mechanically engraved "DIALYSIS ONLY."
Receptacles protected upstream on associated branch circuit by a ground fault circuit interrupter
device shall be laser or mechanically/ engraved "GFCI PROTECTED."
Fractional horsepower manual starter used as equipment or motor disconnect shall be laser or
mechanically engraved "Disconnect/ (Device Designation)" (i.e. "Disconnect/Ice Machine",
"Disconnect/D4-EF01", etc.).
Special systems/communication systems devices (i.e. firephone receptacles) shall be laser or
mechanically engraved designating device type per Owner representative requirements (i.e.
FIREPHONE, DATA, EKG, TEL, TV, etc.).
4-gang and larger multiple switch installations shall be laser or mechanically engraved with
designating lighting type and/or area (i.e. Night Light, North, etc.)
Wiring device circuit identification for NEMA 5-15R and NEMA 5-20R receptacles and all switches
other than emergency use [red] NEMA 5-15R and 5-20R receptacles: Use permanent marker to
identify circuit and panelboard number on back of wall plate.
Warning Tapes, Labels, and Signs:
1.
2.
3.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,
communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line warning tape for
both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts per the coordination study in Division 26 Section "Protective Device
Coordination." Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished
spaces.
Warning Labels for Identification for Branch Circuit Ungrounded Conductors: Install at all branch
circuit panelboards, cabinets, and enclosures per NFPA 70. Provide black text on an orange
background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access generally. For flush mounted
panelboards in finished spaces, install on inside of protective device door.
a.
For 208/120 volt systems, lines and text shall be:
1)
2)
3)
4)
4.
"208/120 VOLT SYSTEM"
"PHASE A – BLACK"
"PHASE B – RED"
"PHASE C – BLUE"
Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following texts:
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
a.
b.
c.
d.
F.
Low Voltage Room Door Sign: "DANGER-ELECTRICAL HAZARD – AUTHORIZED
PERSONNEL ONLY".
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system
voltage with black text on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other
access.
Fused and Non-Fused Motor Disconnect Switches: Install baked enamel warning sign with
white legend on red background with minimum 3/8 inch high lettering with the following
designation – "DANGER, DO NOT USE TO START OR STOP MOTOR. USE FOR
ISOLATION ONLY."
Arc Flash Hazard Warning: Per NFPA 70 requirements.
Instruction Signs:
1.
2.
3.
G.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of
electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend
where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background
with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for
power transfer.
Electrical Assembly Single-Line: Install at end of assembly having no future extension provisions
or as otherwise shown on Drawings within sight of assembly.
Equipment Identification Labels:
1.
Apply equipment identification labels of adhesive film label on each major unit of electrical
equipment in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes
communication/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory
identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text in field designating the
equipment served. Utilize NEC electrical distribution branch color coded field and lettering for
equipment connected. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents
and shop drawings. Electrical equipment nameplates shall also designate line side source (i.e.
FED FROM: "_______" ROOM # "____") in smaller 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) text. Smaller nameplate text
may be used where adequate nameplate mounting space is not available, but in no case shall the
text be smaller than 1/8-inch (3.2 mm). Apply labels mechanically with machine screws or pop
rivets for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment and those scheduled on
Drawings for electrical equipment and panelboard designations. Transfer switches shall include
similar emergency and normal fed from and load identification text.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Boxes (Pull, Junction, or Branch Circuit) when given specific designation on drawings.
Communication/special systems cabinets and backboards.
Control devices.
Disconnect switches.
Distribution panelboards protective devices.
Fire alarm system field processing units, terminal cabinets, peripheral monitor and control
addressable relay modules, fire phone cabinets and remote duct detector test stations.
Ground buses and terminal bars.
Low voltage relay panels.
i.
Motor controllers.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
2.
3.
H.
1)
Designate motor function (i.e. "CW Pump P-1"), not "P-1."
Panelboards.
Pushbuttons.
Security panels.
Separately mounted motor controllers.
Single-pole switches and fractional horsepower manual starters used for motor disconnect
switch.
Standard telecommunication system.
Refer to appropriate sections for other identification marking requirements and nomenclature.
Attach identification after finish painting.
Component Identification Labels:
1.
Apply component identification labels to distribution panelboard assemblies as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
I.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
Assembly Nameplate: Apply per equipment identification label requirements except 1-inch
(80 mm) identification text.
Cubicle Label: Apply 1/2-inch (40 mm) black text on white plate identifying left-to-right
number with 1/4-inch (20 mm) black text below identification section type(s):
1)
Main Circuit Breaker.
2)
Distribution #XX.
3)
Main Lugs.
4)
Transition.
5)
Panelboard.
6)
Circuit Breaker.
7)
Spare.
8)
Space.
Protective Device Load Label: Apply 1/4-inch (20 mm) text on plate per system color
coding identifying load served. For medium voltage feeders, also identify "FEEDER NO.
XX"
Miscellaneous Component Labels: Apply 1/4-inch (20 mm) black text on white plate
identifying components and instruments mounted on front or within the assembly such as
relays, fuses, switches, terminal blocks.
Above Ceiling Equipment Identification Labels:
1.
Apply adhesive dot labels to nearest exposed ceiling grid or associated access panel latch for the
following above ceiling equipment:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
System type occupancy sensor control and relay units.
Fire alarm addressable relay.
Remote lighting ballast.
Power supply.
Strategic termination box enclosure.
Data location:
1)
2)
3)
Wireless access point.
Camera (IP) location.
Projection unit.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 11
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
g.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
Card access controller.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 12
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 75 – Conduit Rough-In Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes Conduit Rough-In Systems and pathways for communication and signaling systems
cabling and boxes including all work incidental thereto as shown on Drawings and specified.
1.
Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for locations of the resistance rated barriers
and smoke barriers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
Comply with the following Standards and Codes:
1.
ANSI/EIA/TIA – 568B:
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
2.
ANSI/EIA/TIA – 569B:
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces
3.
ANSI/EIA/TIA – 606A:
Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
4.
ANSI-J-STD-607-A:
Commercial Building Grounding, Earthing and Bonding
5.
ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001: Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
6.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
7.
All addenda, technical service bulletins, etc., associated with the above reference standards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Pathway: Routing of cabling from work area outlet box to telecommunications room. Pathways may
consist of outlet boxes, cabinets, surface raceways, conduit, conduit stub, conduit sleeve(s), cable tray, JHooks, etc. where system cabling will be run.
B.
Rough-In: Preparation for system(s) cabling and equipment installations.
C.
System Cabling: Low voltage signal and control cabling. System cabling is designated by the
manufacturer for a particular system in each specification section.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate all requirements of the Owner’s and manufacturer’s representatives for all room preparation,
pathways and specific rough-in installation requirements, including associated sizing, location and
labeling, for the following systems:
1.
Division 02 - 25 Systems:
a.
Power and control for equipment furnished under these Divisions.
2.
Division 23 Systems:
a.
Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.
3.
Division 26 Systems:
a.
Automatic Line Voltage Lighting Control Equipment.
CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS
26 05 75 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
4.
5.
6.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 75 – Conduit Rough-In Systems
b.
Networked Lighting Control Equipment.
c.
Lighting Dimming.
Division 27 Systems:
a.
Structured Telecommunications Cabling.
b.
Door Entry Intercom.
c.
Intercom.
d.
Broadband Television Distribution.
e.
Public Address.
f.
Master Clock.
Division 28 Systems:
a.
Fire Alarm.
b.
Access Control / Intrusion Detection.
Owner Supplied Systems:
a.
Coordinate Owner supplied systems rough-in materials with the requirements defined in
Division 26 sections.
B.
Coordinate equipment backboard installations including:
1.
Meet Owner’s and manufacturer’s representative layout requirements.
2.
Ensurance that installer:
a.
Provides spacers between wall and backboard to support and locate intended equipment.
b.
Locates backboard 6 inches above finish floor level around room.
c.
Paints backboard white on all sides with appropriate print.
d.
Allows for flush rough-in of wiring devices.
e.
Allows for cable management and slots behind backboards.
f.
Allows for signal grounding installation per Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
C.
Coordinate sleeves for pathways and cable per Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Electrical Raceways and Cabling".
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections, and Division 26 Section “Basic Division 26 Requirements”.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Provide per "Basic Division 26 Requirements" Include:
1.
Details for all identified systems equipment rooms including, but not limited to those rooms
labeled:
a.
Cable Pull.
b.
Communications.
c.
Data.
d.
Network.
e.
MDF.
f.
Server.
g.
Tel/Data.
h.
Telecommunications.
CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS
26 05 75 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
3.
1.7
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 75 – Conduit Rough-In Systems
Floor plans for each system local equipment room service area depicting:
a.
Cabling pathways, color coding and field equipment, identification labels.
b.
Specific equipment, outlet and patching identification labels.
Sign-offs of Owner’s and manufacturer’s representatives for each document submitted.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Documents:
1.
Submit updated Coordination Drawings as Record Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Flush wall mounted 4-11/16 inches square, 3-5/8" deep pressed galvanized steel minimum.
1.
Utilize 4-11/16" square, 2-1/8" deep backbox with 4-11/16" square, 1-1/2" deep extension ring to
meet backbox depth requirement; if 3-1/2" deep box not available.
2.
Provide plastic bushings at grommet of outlet box where open cabling installation is allowed to
directly enter outlet box (in ceiling spaces).
B.
Mullion Mounted Devices:
1.
Flush backbox or open ring as recommended by device manufacturer for installation in metal door
frame/aluminum door frame as shown on Drawings.
2.
Coordinate installation and conduit access with door frame and door hardware manufacturer’s for
cabling routing and connectivity.
C.
Cable Bushings:
1.
Bush cable opening for device boxes without conduit stubs.
2.2
PLASTER COVER
A.
Single gang, galvanized steel, for single gang device.
B.
Two gang, galvanized steel, for two-gang device.
1.
Provide steel barrier for devices requiring power and low voltage device to be mounted in same
backbox.
2.3
COVER PLATES
A.
Same material, finish and color as for wiring devices. Refer to Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."
B.
Single gang for single device with appropriate opening, split plate, etc. for device to be installed.
C.
Two gang for combination NEMA 5 receptacle and communications/device with appropriate openings for
receptacle and opening, split plate, etc. for device to be installed.
CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS
26 05 75 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 75 – Conduit Rough-In Systems
D.
Two gang as required for system outlets.
E.
Device opening shall be bushed one-inch when used for wire pull.
F.
Blank as shown on Drawings or when single device type not used.
2.4
RACEWAYS
A.
2.5
Refer to Division 26 Section "Raceways" for requirements. Provide with insulated throats and bushings
on all conduit runs, stubs and sleeves.
SLEEVES
A.
2.6
Refer to Division 07 and Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling" for firestopping requirements.
CABLE J-HOOKS
A.
Metallic J-hook bracket (1-1/2" wide) with cable retainer or Velcro strap, ceiling or support rod mounted.
1.
Provide system manufacturer recommended fasteners.
B.
Category 6 compliant.
C.
Acceptable Manufacturers/Series:
1.
Caddy Cat. 32 Series.
2.
B-Line BCH32 Series.
3.
Or Approved Equivalent.
2.7
EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS
A.
2.8
Refer to Division 06 for plywood equipment backboard requirements.
Cable Distribution Spools for Backboards
A.
Fire-Retardant, high strength composite material.
B.
1-1/2" length.
C.
Promotes compliance with T568B bend radius (4 x cable diameter)
2.9
CABINETS AND COMMUNICATION RACKS
A.
Refer to Division 26 Section "Boxes and Cabinets" for cabinet requirements.
CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS
26 05 75 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
B.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 75 – Conduit Rough-In Systems
Refer to Division 27 Section "Communications Cabinets and Racks" for communications type rack
assemblies.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Conduit and Pathways Applications
A.
Conduit Raceways (completely enclosed wiring):
1.
Shall be used for separate and independent horizontal system cabling routing for each of the
following systems:
a.
Division 02 – 25 Systems:
1)
Power and control for equipment furnished under these Divisions.
b.
Division 26 Systems:
1)
Lighting Dimming.
c.
Division 27 Systems:
1)
2)
Door Entry Intercom.
d.
Division 28 Systems:
1)
Fire Alarm.
2)
Access Control / Intrusion Detection.
2.
Shall be used for:
a.
Systems backbone and trunk risers.
b.
Systems outlet boxes to accessible ceiling.
c.
Systems outlet boxes to accessible corridor ceiling.
d.
Systems outlet boxes to cable tray termination.
B.
J – Hooks:
1.
Shall be used for area horizontal ceiling space corridor cabling for the following systems:
a.
Division 23 Systems:
1)
Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.
b.
Division 26 Systems:
1)
Automatic Line Voltage Lighting Control Equipment.
2)
Networked Lighting Control Equipment.
c.
Division 27 Systems:
1)
Structured Telecommunications Cabling.
2)
Door Entry Intercom.
3)
Intercom.
4)
Broadband Television Distribution.
5)
Public Address.
2.
Shall be used for:
a.
Equipment room backboard cable management.
b.
Accessible ceiling cabling not installed in other pathways.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS
26 05 75 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 75 – Conduit Rough-In Systems
Install all pathways in accordance with EIA/TIA 569A Standards, associated addenda and
technical service bulletins and per manufacturer's requirements.
a.
Install all pathways in a safe, neat, professional, workmanlike manner.
b.
Coordinate size of pathways such that EIA/TIA maximum fill requirements are not
exceeded for that raceway size at 40% fill maximum.
Provide pathways to conceal all cabling in the facility except where specifically indicated
otherwise.
Coordinate pathway installation such that it is independently supported.
Install all pathways parallel and perpendicular to building lines and tight to structure. Install
pathways such that multiple cabling runs to the same geographic location will utilize similar
pathway routing to destination point.
Route cabling pathways to the system equipment room from indicated zone or as shown on
Drawings. In general, provide system outlet box pathways to the equipment room on the same
floor to a system cabinet or identified equipment.
Install pathways to avoid elevator shafts, elevator equipment rooms or any areas that contain or
store hazardous materials.
Install pathways to avoid sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) for all pathways.
a.
Maintain one foot minimum from fluorescent lighting (ballast).
b.
Maintain four foot minimum from all transformers.
c.
Maintain ten foot minimum from electrical power cabling or distribution panels exceeding
480 volts.
d.
Maintain one foot minimum from electrical power cabling.
e.
Maintain two inch minimum from electrical power cabling less than 220 volts.
f.
Shorten distances if sufficient EMI isolation is provided and given prior approval by
engineer.
Avoid routing pathways in areas subject to excessive environmental conditions. Acceptable
conditions are:
a.
Temperature range: 5˚C – 50˚C.
b.
Relative humidity range: 5% - 95%.
Install raceway and equipment identifications per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
Label all pathways and associated termination points.
a.
Provide system identifying nameplate centered on main trunk riser boxes, equipment
backboards, ground buses, and cabinets (i.e. DATACOM, CCTV, etc.).
b.
Identify fiber optic labeling risers installed in ENT or Innerduct every 10 feet on center
"Fiber Optic Cabling."
Outlet Boxes:
1.
General:
a.
Install systems outlets flush in new wall construction.
b.
Do not install backboxes back-to-back.
1)
Maintain a minimum of 12" separation.
2)
Maintain a minimum of 24" separation in fire-rated walls.
c.
Mount outlets alongside associated power receptacles where applicable.
d.
Mount all outlet boxes vertically, unless otherwise noted.
e.
Install raceway to avoid obstructions in the field such as molding, built-in cabinets, wiring
devices, etc.
f.
Install blank coverplates where device type is not installed. Coordinate such locations with
the appropriate systems representatives, and the Owner.
2.
Renovation:
CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS
26 05 75 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
26 05 75 – Conduit Rough-In Systems
a.
Utilize installation methods for datacom/systems outlets in the following order as available
in renovation areas.
1)
Install systems outlet boxes flush in existing wall. Fish wall as required. Cabling
may be run exposed in wall cavity.
2)
Install surface-mounted metal back-box fed with surface mounted metal raceway in
renovated areas that cannot be fished and do not require adjacent power
receptacles.
3)
Install systems outlets in multi-channel metal surface raceway only where
specifically shown on Drawings. Install associated power receptacle adjacent to
outlet where required. Provide all mounting bracket hardware and accessories.
a)
Locate vertical section of surface raceway discretely in corner of room for
data entrance.
b)
Locate surface raceway outlet rough-in with required spacing as shown on
architectural drawing elevations to accommodate knee space at
millwork/desks.
4)
Cut/trench wall and install conduit stub and backbox for system device cabling.
b.
Feed surface raceway in rooms, etc. from conduit extended into corridor space. Cabling
may be exposed above accessible corridor/room ceilings. Install conduit in corridors in
areas without accessible ceilings.
Rework existing surface raceway as required to accommodate new surface raceway and devices.
3.
C.
Raceways:
1.
Refer to Division 26 Section "Raceways" for basic routing and installation requirements.
a.
Refer to Division 26 Section “Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling” for sleeve requirements.
b.
Refer to Division 07 for firestopping.
2.
Furnish and install trunk riser raceways, junction boxes, outlet box raceways and outlet boxes as
specified and shown on Drawings.
3.
Stub trunk riser and extend system outlet box raceways into accessible ceiling space.
4.
Stub trunk riser and extend system outlet box raceways into accessible corridor ceiling space.
5.
Stub trunk riser and extend system outlet box raceways into accessible corridor ceiling and
terminate at cable tray system.
6.
Provide cap for all conduit stubs and cover for outlet boxes to eliminate debris from entering boxes
or conduits. Remove any debris found in conduits or outlet boxes upon cable installation.
7.
Provide a dedicated conduit for cable installation for each Division 27 structured
telecommunications cabling system outlet box. These outlet boxes shall not be connected
together with conduit between boxes.
8.
Provide minimum outlet box conduit size and conduit sleeve size at 1 inch.
a.
Use chart below for minimum conduit size requirements based on maximum 40% fill for
indicated quantity of cables.
Inside
Diameter
mm
Trade
Size
21
27
3/4
1
Cable Outside Diameter mm (in)
3.3 (0.13)
6
8
CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS
4.6
(0.18)
5
8
5.6
(0.22)
4
7
6.1
(0.24)
3
6
7.4
(0.29)
2
3
7.9
(0.31)
2
3
9.4
(0.37)
1
2
13.5
(0.53)
0
1
15.8
(0.62)
0
0
17.8
(0.70)
0
0
26 05 75 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
35
41
53
63
78
91
103
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 75 – Conduit Rough-In Systems
1-1/4
16
14
12
10
6
4
3
1
1
1
1-1/2
20
18
16
15
7
6
4
2
1
1
2
30
26
22
20
14
12
7
4
3
2
2-1/2
45
40
36
30
17
14
12
6
3
3
3
70
60
50
40
20
20
17
7
6
6
3-1/2
22
12
7
6
4
30
14
12
7
9.
Mark each conduit end for identification and destination of raceway.
10. Install all raceways such that the cabling manufacturer’s minimum bend radius is not exceeded.
11. Furnish and install 200 pound test, braided nylon pullcords in all conduits and as shown on
Drawings. Label all pullcords.
12. Provide complete conduit systems in areas with non-accessible ceilings for all cable systems.
13. Utilize surface raceway in finished areas where cabling cannot be concealed.
14. Feed multi-channel surface raceway, where shown on Drawings, with one conduit for special
outlets and one conduit for each power channel to feed multiple outlets. Refer to ANSI/EIA/TIA
569-A and NFPA 70 for conduit size requirements.
15. Special Optical Fiber and Communication Raceways:
a.
Install backbone fiber optic cabling in plenum rated Optical Fiber and Communication
(innerduct) raceway per Division 26 Section "Raceways." Install Optical Fiber and
Communication in cable tray if available, using proper connectors and fittings.
1)
Install pathway for centralized cabling exceeding 300 feet in length through the
Telecommunications Room serving the work area in that area prior to termination at
the work area outlet.
a)
Provide a wall mounted pull box sized to allow a 20 foot cable service loop to
provide future termination location if required. Coordinate location.
16. Provide conduit segment length at no more than 100 feet with a maximum of two 90 degree
bends. Additional junction/pull boxes shall be installed to allow more bends or length of conduit.
Refer to EIA/TIA 569A. Coordinate location to nearby cable spool or cable management device.
17. Install telecommunications raceways to within six inches of equipment backboards, data racks and
termination units.
a.
Coordinate location and termination to cable management device.
18. Provide a minimum of 10-inch inside curve radius of conduits for each 1-inch in diameter of
installed conduit.
D.
J-Hook Installation:
1.
Provide independent J-hook pathways per system where cable tray is not shown, (minimum of 4 Jhooks mounted horizontally) in accessible ceiling space mounted a maximum of 4 and 5 feet on
center. Mount pathway level, tight to structure and allow accessible installation of cabling.
2.
Furnish and install single mounted J-hooks from individual conduits serving outlet boxes, mounted
4 feet on center maximum.
3.
Ensure cabling is supported properly and cable does not sag or droop in excess of 8" from
between supports.
E.
Cable Distribution Spools:
1.
Install distribution cable spools (mushrooms) on equipment backboards to allow cable
support/routing. Mount spools along edge of boards, 6 inches from each corner and 1 foot on
center, minimum.
CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS
26 05 75 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 75 – Conduit Rough-In Systems
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Post copy of appropriate systems record drawings in local equipment room as required by Owner
representatives. Hang set on equipment backboard using proper anchoring techniques.
END OF SECTION 26 05 75
CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS
26 05 75 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Automatic lighting control equipment specified in this section include the following:
1.
2.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control equipment and components.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Sensor layout shown on Drawings is based on the coverage patterns and specifications of the
Basis for Design products. Submittals from any other listed manufacturer shall be accompanied by
scaled drawings, indicating modified sensor locations and quantities, and revised layouts providing
the manufacturer specific coverages and load requirements for approval by Engineer.
Wiring Diagrams: For electronic time switches and photocell control circuits SPECIFIC to project.
Suggested initial settings for Owner review of adjustable devices.
Letters from approved ballast manufacturers that their equipment is compatible with the submitted
system manufacturer.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field Quality Control Test Reports:
1.
1.5
Include Owner’s representative signoff of adjustable settings for timing sensitivity and ambient
lighting adjustments.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Occupancy Sensing Devices
Daylight Sensing Control Devices.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
A.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use.
B.
Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections and Testing" for field inspections and
testing requirements related to this Section, including:
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Electrical Acceptance Testing Responsibilities.
General Electrical Field Quality Control.
Testing Agency Qualifications.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the exact locations of devices with the work of other tradesmen and Division contractors, and
with the installation instructions and coverage limitations published by the device manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
Except as otherwise noted or specified, automatic lighting control device colors, and their associated
faceplate colors, shall match wiring device and faceplate colors specified in other sections. Refer to
Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."
WALL BOX STYLE - LINE VOLTAGE OCCUPANCY SENSING CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Passive Infrared (PIR) Type (Symbol P in Diamond):
1.
2.
3.
4.
Passive infrared sensing (heat and motion), with ambient daylight sensing/override feature, and
positive ON-OFF electromechanical switching.
Designed and fabricated to control line and low voltage incandescent, quartz and halogen light
sources, as well as linear and compact fluorescent (ballasted) lighting loads.
Shall be compatible with electronic fluorescent ballasts and shall not adversely affect lamp/ballast
mortality.
Shall be designed to operate and control lighting loads at both 120VAC and 277VAC. Minimum
switch control requirements shall be as follows:
a.
b.
5.
Zero to not less than 800VA (ballasted load).
Zero to not less than 1000VA (ballasted load).
Lighting load contacts shall close ("ON") automatically, upon sensing occupant presence, and shall
open ("OFF") after a user defined time interval, sensing no occupant presence.
a.
6.
At 120VAC:
At 277VAC:
User selectable time delay interval - ≤30 sec. - ≥30 min.
A separate air gap "OFF", or zero current "OFF" position/switch, shall be provided to allow for
manual override of the automatic "ON" sensing function. The "OFF" position shall provide a
positive "OFF," de-energizing the load, and providing zero leakage current to the load.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Room/Space Coverage: Not less than 180° field of view, at not less than 900 sq. ft.
Designed and fabricated for field installation within a standard, single gang device opening.
Shall be a 2-wire device (not requiring a neutral wire connection), for direct 1-for-1 retrofit of
standard toggle handle style lighting controls. A third "green" ground wire or terminal connection is
acceptable.
Device shall be UL listed suitable for its use, and shall be warranted against defects in materials
and/or workmanship for not less than five (5) years.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
Basis for Design: Watt Stopper, Inc. - WS-200 Series.
Acceptable Equivalents:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. – IWSZP3P Series.
Leviton - ODS10-ID Series.
Pass & Seymour - WSP200 Series.
Or equivalent, submitted for approval.
CEILING MOUNT – LOW VOLTAGE OCCUPANCY SENSING CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Dual Technology (Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic) Type - (Symbol P2 in Diamond):
1.
2.
Designed, built, and fabricated for wall or ceiling installation.
Sensors shall operate at 24 VDC, and shall provide the specified control function(s) through
separate, remote, power supply/control unit(s).
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Power supply/control unit(s) are purposely not shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall
provide the required quantity of devices, as required, based on the control intent indicated
on the Drawings.
Coverage: Not less than a 360° field of view, and not less than 1000 sq. ft. coverage area at 8 ft
AFF.
Shall be provided with integral 1PDT, isolated relay rated 1A @ 30VDC, for field connection to
device(s) other than remote lighting power supply/control unit.
Provided with a user adjustable (≤8 to ≥30 minute) "OFF" time delay device.
Shall "fail-safe" in the "ON" function, in the event of a device/electronics failure.
Device shall be UL listed suitable for its use, and shall be warranted against defects in materials
and workmanship for not less than five (5) years.
Sensor components shall be housed within a high-impact, injection molded, plastic housing,
provided complete with a surface ceiling mounting canopy. Color: white.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
Basis for Design:
1)
Sensor Switch – CM PDT 9 Series.
2)
b.
Acceptable Equivalents:
1)
Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. – OMNIDT 1000RP Series.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
Lutron - LOS-CDT Series.
Schneider Electric - SLSCDS2000.
Watt Stopper, Inc. – DT Series.
Or other equivalent, submitted for approval.
DAYLIGHT SENSING CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Ceiling Mount Low Voltage Type:
1.
2.
Shall be an electronic, low voltage, photoconductive device designed, built, and tested to operate
in conjunction with a remote, 24V DC power supply/control unit, to provide ON/OFF control, based
on daylight intensity.
Shall provide for field adjustable calibration to initiate a low daylight ON command, in the range of
1-850 footcandles.
a.
3.
Shall be provided with integral LED indicators, to allow user to observe device status.
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
A field adjustable "deadband" provision shall be provided, as part of the device internal
electronics, to delay the ON/OFF command initiation, and to prevent the sensor from cycling
ON/OFF due to changing daylight conditions.
Red LED "ON" to indicate ambient lighting level has fallen below the threshold setting, and
that the "ON" command is being initiated by the device.
Green LED "ON" to indicates ambient lighting level is above the threshold setting, and that
no signal is being initiated by the device.
Shall be housed in a shallow, low profile, white thermoplastic housing, designed for attachment to
ceiling surfaces, provided complete with all installation hardware.
Shall be a UL listed device, furnished with a five (5) year warranty against defects and
workmanship.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
Basis of Design:
1)
2)
2.5
Watt Stopper – LS-102-U.
Or other equivalent, submitted for approval.
POWER SUPPLY/CONTROL UNITS FOR LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Shall be self-contained transformer/rectifier/relay devices consisting of:
1.
2.
Transformer/rectifier to transform and rectify input primary voltage (120/277 VAC) to 24 VDC
secondary voltage for connection to low voltage sensors, and to relay holding circuit.
Single pole, nominal 20A, switching type relay with 24 VDC holding circuit and output contacts
rated as follows:
a.
b.
Fluorescent Ballasted Loads - 20A.
Incandescent Type Loads - 20A.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
c.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
Motor Loads – 1 HP @ 120V AC.
B.
Shall be designed and fabricated as a single unit, completely encapsulated in a UL listed and rated 94V O
ABS plastic enclosure.
C.
Shall be UL listed, suitable for its use, and shall be warranted against material and workmanship defects,
for not less than five (5) years.
D.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Basis for Design:
a.
2.
Acceptable Equivalents:
a.
2.6
Design Equipment: Watt Stopper BZ-150 Series.
By sensing equipment manufacturer.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Wiring to Line Voltage Side Power Sources and Devices: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B.
Class 2 and 3 Control Wiring: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than
AWG size recommended or directed by equipment manufacturer. Comply with requirements in Division
26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C.
Class 1 Control Wiring: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than AWG size
recommended or directed by equipment manufacturer. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide controls for all lighting.
B.
Wall Box Style Time Based Devices:
1.
2.
C.
Program devices for date, time, global location (by longitude and latitude), and Owner directed
ON/OFF schedules.
Provide initial programming for countdown and interval time based devices such that lighting OFF
time delay setting is per Owner’s direction. Do not leave devices at factory preset time delays,
unless otherwise directed by Owner, or Owner’s representative.
Ceiling and Wall Mount Occupancy Sensing Control Devices:
1.
Install sensors generally as shown on the Drawings.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
a.
2.
3.
4.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
Flush to ceiling surface, with/without outlet box, in accessible acoustical tile type ceilings, or
drywall/hard plaster ceilings.
On surface mounted outlet boxes in exposed construction.
Not less than 24" from incandescent luminaires, HVAC diffusers and registers, and extreme
temperature piping, devices, etc.
Not less than 12" from ballasted types of luminaires and HVAC ductwork.
Avoid installations near columns, and other physical obstructions that may obscure line-ofsight views.
Wiring between sensors and power supply/control units shall be plenum rated, Class II, low
voltage, stranded, Teflon jacketed, insulated cable.
a.
b.
7.
8.
Unless directed otherwise, by Owner, or Owner’s representative, program ON function to
"Manual ON".
Install ceiling mount devices as follows:
a.
6.
For devices provided by other than the Basis of Design manufacturer, install sensors per
the approved shop drawing layouts provided under submittal requirements in Article 1.3.
Arrange and conduct a pre-installation on-site meeting, attended by the installing contractor,
sensor manufacturers’ representative, and facility personnel, to verify and test sensor locations for
proper coverage, line-of-sight, sensitivity, and to train facility personnel on the proper use and care
of devices.
Include, under this contract, installation, removal, and re-installation of all sensors within 10 ft. of
the locations shown on the Drawings.
Install wall box type controls flush to wall surface, over concealed outlet boxes, roughed at AFF
dimension indicated.
a.
5.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
Conductor gauge and quantity as directed by the manufacturer.
Install concealed. Wiring need not be installed in raceway, if concealed. Wiring that cannot
be installed concealed, shall be installed in raceway.
Leave 10 ft. of slack cable at each sensor location, for potential sensor relocation.
Adjust all sensors for sensitivity, line-of-sight, time delay and coverage, to the Owner's satisfaction.
Power Supply/Control Units For Occupancy Sensing Control Devices:
1.
2.
Locations and quantities are purposely not shown on the Drawings. Provide the required quantities
to provide the control schemes indicated, based upon the designated switching shown and sensing
device current draw limitations.
Installation - Accessible Ceilings:
a.
Install concealed, within accessible ceiling space (where accessible ceiling space exists, or
is proposed), in a readily accessible and maintainable location.
1)
Line voltage wiring connections shall be made, and shall be contained within outlet
box. Low voltage wiring connections may be made outside of outlet box.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2)
3)
3.
b.
c.
d.
b.
E.
Wiring connections shall be made within the outlet box. Maintain separation between low
voltage and line voltage wiring.
Provide blank, utility style, outlet box cover, and provide adhesive backed, machine printed,
ID label on face of cover, reading "OCCUPANCY SENSOR CONTROL RELAY."
Connect wiring to lighting branch circuit, lighting load and sensor, per manufacturers wiring
schematic.
Coordination:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.2
Installed concealed, inside a barriered, multi-gang, electrical outlet box, roughed flush to
face of drywall/hard plaster, or other type of non-accessible ceiling.
Install concealed, within an immediately adjacent accessible ceiling space.
Wiring connections shall be made within the outlet box, for accessibility. Maintain
separation between low voltage and line voltage wiring.
Provide smooth, finish type, blank outlet box cover, over concealed outlet box, and provide
adhesive backed, machine printed, ID label on face of coverplate, reading "OCCUPANCY
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY/CONTROL UNIT."
Where no ceiling exists, or is proposed, install device inside a barriered, steel electrical outlet box,
exposed, within the occupancy sensor space, in a readily accessible and maintainable location.
a.
5.
Provide blank, utility style, outlet box cover, and provide adhesive backed, machine
printed, ID label on face of cover, reading "OCCUPANCY SENSOR POWER
SUPPLY/CONTROL UNIT."
Provide ceiling grid marker to identify location per Division 26 Section "Electrical
Identification."
Installation - Non-Accessible Ceilings:
a.
4.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
Coordinate voltage (and face color) of automatic lighting control devices.
Coordinate device and coverplate color per requirements of Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."
Coordinate occupancy sensor ranges, minimum/maximum wattages and field adjustments for the
exact application.
Coordinate power supply/control unit quantities for area/function shown on Drawings. Provide
additional devices as required (i.e., one sensor and multiple power supplies for normal and
generator power NEC branch separation).
Coordinate electronic timer minimum/maximum wattages for the exact application.
Coordinate all adjustable settings with the Owner's representative.
Coordinate electronic time switch and photocell contact ratings and control circuits.
INSTALLATION – WIRING
A.
Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
Minimum raceway size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited
conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
C.
Provide conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and
outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems", and as otherwise written herein.
1.
2.
B.
3.4
Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors, relay panels, etc.
Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.
Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspection and Tests:
1.
Perform inspections and test procedures as required by Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections
and Testing" and the following additional requirements:
a.
b.
Follow-up thermographic survey shall not be required.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1.
Occupancy Sensor Controls:
a.
Verify 100% of occupancy sensors cover the entire space at their intended location and
adjusted angle. In addition, confirm the following for each type of occupancy sensor.
1)
2)
Passive infra-red sensor.
Verify lens is adjusted for the space geometry and size of space.
a)
3)
Ultrasonic Sensor:
a)
b.
c.
Verify sensitivity is adjusted for coverage of entire space.
Verify sensitivity is adjusted for coverage of entire space.
Verify sensitivity adjustment for both types of sensors does not trigger nuisance trips from
air diffusers close to the sensor.
Verify sensitivity adjustment eliminates trips from movement in an adjacent space
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
d.
e.
f.
g.
After room lighting circuit is triggered on from an occupancy sensor, confirm programmed
delay off time is functional. Temporarily reprogram the delay off time to expedite testing,
fifteen (15) minutes for enclosed room with one sensor and thirty (30) minutes for multisensor larger rooms. If reprogrammed, verify final programmed delay off time matches
specifications.
Verify proper operation and sensitivity setting of ambient daylight override function.
Simulate a power failure of the lighting system to confirm power-up restart functions are
operating as specified.
Sampling strategy applied to all occupancy sensor issues unless noted otherwise.
1)
2.
3.5
Set ON/OFF Daylight levels.
Outside Lighting Timed Control Functions:
a.
b.
D.
Of the total controlled room lighting circuits, 10% should be tested to confirm
occupancy sensor controls. If 10% of the first group fails the test, select another
10% of the total room lighting circuits. If 10% of these rooms fail, test all remaining
rooms.
Daylight Controls:
a.
3.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
Time Switch.
Photocell
Lighting control devices shall be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning control equipment.
ADJUSTING
A.
Occupancy and Time Based Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors and time based control devices to suit actual
site specific and/or Owner directed conditions. Provide for not less than two visits to Project during otherthan-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time
delay to suit Owner's operations.
For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.
Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.
For time based control devices, reset OFF time delay settings to Owner directed interval.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Provide for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Provide for not less than 16 hours of
on-site training sessions, performed multiple times, at various times during the day, to multiple teams of
Owner’s personnel.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 23 – Automatic Lighting Control Equipment
END OF SECTION 26 09 23
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section provides requirements and specifications for automatic and manually operated, PC based,
controls with external signal source, relays and auxiliary control module(s).
DEFINITIONS
A.
BACnet: A networking communication protocol that complies with ASHRAE 135.
B.
BAS: Building automation system.
C.
LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable control
devices and networks.
D.
Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote
control, signaling and power limited circuits.
E.
Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data, metered
electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabulated reports, and
event logs.
F.
PC: Personal computer; sometimes plural as "PCs."
G.
Power Line Carrier: Use of radio frequency energy to transmit information over transmission lines whose
primary purpose is the transmission of power.
H.
RS 485: A serial network protocol, similar to RS 232, complying with TIA/EIA 485 A.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide for each device, component, product, etc., specified. Include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for all specified
items.
B.
Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and clearance and
access requirements.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices
furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and
identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used.
Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and
presentation with a block diagram.
Individual, interior panel layouts showing the physical locations of all components, relays, circuit
breakers, control devices, etc.
Individual connected load schedules, per cabinet, indicating the controlled load, branch circuit
assignment (by panelboard designation), its assigned control function (time ON/OFF, occupancy
sensor, photocell, daylight sensor, tec.) and its associated override device (manual override switch,
fire alarm system, etc.)
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data:
1.
2.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that controls are compatible with connected monitoring and
control devices and systems specified in other Sections.
1.
2.
C.
1.6
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
Supplier Qualification.
Show required interconnecting wiring and interfacing devices that provide compatibility of inputs
and outputs.
For networked controls, list network protocols and provide statements from manufacturers that
input and output devices meet interoperability requirements of the network protocol.
Field quality control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For controls to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals.
B.
Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.7
Software operating and upgrade manuals.
Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files.
Device address list.
Printout of software application and graphic screens.
Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operation and programming of digital
and analog devices.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain control and power distribution components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with 47 CFR, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections and Testing” for field inspections and
testing requirements related to this Section including:
1.
2.
3.
F.
1.8
Electrical Acceptance Testing Responsibilities
General Electrical Field Quality Control
Testing Agency Qualifications
Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems for field testing.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate control components to form an integrated interconnection of separate and remote compatible
components. Provide the required auxiliary hardware and software equipment for system component
integration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.9
Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of control functions.
Coordinate system occupancy sensors and ballasts with related Division 26 Sections" Automatic
Lighting Control Equipment", "Interior Lighting”, and “Exterior Lighting” Systems."
Provide, under this specification section, a graphical user interface (GUI) type of display and
control graphics software, for installation on the Division 23 BAS control system, for the creation of
custom designed, user programmable, PC based screen graphics and control functions, by the
Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment manufacturer/supplier.
Coordinate controls with that in Sections specifying distribution components that are monitored or
controlled by remote power monitoring and control equipment.
Coordinate short circuit rating of equipment with available short circuit currents.
Coordinate control components specified in this Section with components specified in Division 26 Section
"Panelboards."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Provide equipment and components in factory containers or wrappings, which properly protect equipment
from damage.
B.
Store equipment in original packaging and protect from weather and construction work and traffic. Store
indoors in controlled environment.
C.
Handle carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components. Do not install damaged
equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.10
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
WARRANTY
A.
In addition to the Contractor’s warranty, provided for in Division 01, the manufacturer of the equipment
specified herein, agrees to repair, or replace said equipment that fails in materials or workmanship, within
the specified warranty period.
B.
Special Warranty: Provide warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components
specified herein that fail in materials or workmanship, or from transient voltage surges, within specified
warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
1.11
A.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Above and beyond the quantity of materials, devices, components, etc., indicated, specified, and
otherwise required for the proper operation of the equipment specified herein, provide extra materials
described below that match products provided, with protective covering for storage, and identified with
labels describing contents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.12
Failure of software input/output to execute switching or dimming commands.
Failure of modular relays to operate under manual or software commands.
Damage of electronic components due to transient voltage surges.
Relays: Ten percent of quantity provided, but no fewer than twelve relays.
One (1) power supply module.
One (1) controller card.
One (1) input/output card.
One (1) network communications card.
SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A.
Technical Support: Beginning from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site software support for
not less than two years.
B.
Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software
upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading
software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or renewed licenses for use of the
software.
1.
Provide 30 day notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to
upgrade computer equipment, if necessary.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with these requirements and specifications, provide products by
one of the following:
1.
Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. – LX Series.
2.
Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. Synergy Series.
3.
Watt Stopper/Legrand – ACP Series.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Expandability: The equipment, components, devices, etc., as specified herein, shall inherently provide for
increasing the number of control devices, component, functions, etc., in the future by 25 percent of
installed capacity; to include equipment ratings, housing capacities, spare relays, terminals, number of
conductors in control cables, and control software.
B.
Performance Requirements: Manual switches, an internal timing and control unit, and external sensors or
other control signal sources; send a signal to a PC based programmable system control module, that
processes the signal according to its programming, and routes an open or close command to one or
morerelays in the power supply circuit(s), or routes variable commands to one or more dimmers, to
load(s).
2.3
CONTROL MODULE
A.
Control Module Description: Comply with UL 508 (CSA C22.2, No. 14); microprocessor based,
programmable, control unit; mounted in preassembled, modular relay panel. Low voltage controlled,
latching type, single pole lighting circuit relays shall be prime output circuit devices. Where indicated, a
limited number of digital or analog, low voltage control circuit outputs shall be supported by control unit
and circuit boards associated with relays. Control units shall receive inputs from sensors and other
sources. Line voltage components and wiring shall be separated from low voltage components and wiring
by barriers. Control module shall be locally programmable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Display: Single graphic display for programming.
Interoperability: Control module shall be configured to connect with other control systems using
RS 485 network to enable remote workstations to use control module functions.
Interoperability: Control module shall be configured to connect to LonWorks or BACnet compliant
network, resulting in extending control to any network compliant devices such as occupancy
sensors.
System Memory: Nonvolatile. System shall reboot program and reset time automatically without
errors after power outages up to 90 days' duration.
Software: Lighting control software shall provide for linking switch inputs to relay outputs, retrieving
links, viewing relay output status, controlling relay outputs, simulating switch inputs, setting device
addresses, and assigning switch input and relay output modes.
Automatic Time Adjustment: System shall automatically adjust for leap year and daylight saving
time and shall provide weekly routine and annual holiday scheduling.
Astronomic Control: Automatic adjustment of dawn and dusk switching.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
8.
9.
Demand Control: Demand shall be monitored through pulses from a remote meter and shall be
controlled by programmed switching of loads. System capability shall include sliding window
averaging and programming of load priorities and characteristics. Minimum of two different time of
day demand schedules shall execute load management control actions by switching output circuits
or by transmitting other types of load control signals.
Confirmation: Each relay or contactor device operated by system shall have auxiliary contacts that
provide a confirmation signal to the system of on or off status of device. On or off status
confirmation for each electrically operated circuit breaker shall be provided by an auxiliary contact
or by a sensing device at load terminal.
a.
b.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
2.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
Software shall interpret status signals, provide for their display, and initiate failure signals.
Lamp or LED at control module or display panel shall identify status of each controlled
circuit.
Remote Communication Capability: Allow programming, data gathering interrogation, status
display, and controlled command override from a PC at a remote location over telephone lines.
System shall include modem, communications, gateways, and control software, and remote
computer compatibility verification for this purpose.
Local Override Capability: Manual, low voltage control devices shall override programmed
shutdowns and shall override other programmed control for intervals that may be duration
programmed.
Automatic Control of Local Override: Automatic control shall switch lighting off if lighting has been
switched on by local override. Override shall automatically be timed off by control system at the
predetermined time period with one minute (lighting flash) warning signal before off mode occurs.
Automatic battery backup shall provide power to maintain program and system clock operation for
90 days' minimum duration when power is off.
Programmed time signals shall change preset scenes and dimmer settings.
Daylight Harvesting Dimming Control: Control module shall interpret variable analog signal from
photoelectric daylight sensor(s) and shall route dimming signals to dimming fluorescent ballast
control circuits. Signal shall control dimming of luminaires so illumination level remains constant as
daylight contribution varies.
Flick Warning: Programmable momentary turnoff of luminaires shall warn that programmed shutoff
will occur after a preset interval. Warning shall be repeated after a second preset interval before
end of programmed override period.
Diagnostics: When system operates improperly, software shall initiate factory programmed
diagnosis of failure and display messages identifying problem and possible causes.
POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS
A.
Relay Panel: Comply with UL 508 (CSA C22.2, No. 14) and UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205); factory
assembled with modular single pole relays, power supplies, and accessory components required for
specified performance.
1.
Enclosure: NEMA 1, steel surface mounting style, with hinged, locking door.
a.
b.
Barriers separating both low voltage and line voltage components and normal and
emergency branch circuit components.
Circuit/Relay Directory: Provided on back of door. Identifies each relay assignment and
each programmed pilot device if any.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
Power Supply:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
2.5
Shall be an electrical device designed, built and tested for the purpose of providing the
required operating control voltage for all integral control panel components.
Shall be a dual transformer device providing the required control system voltage from either
a 120 VAC or 277 VAC branch circuit input, at either 50 or 60 Hz.
Shall provide integral surge protection for all internal control panel devices and components,
via a metal oxide varistor type of surge protective device.
Shall be provided with internal over current protection.
Shall be designed for and factory installed within the control panel enclosure.
Single Pole Relays: Latching, mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split coil, momentary
pulsed type.
a.
4.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
Low Voltage Leads: Plug connector to the connector strip in cabinet and pilot light power
where indicated.
Rated Capacity (Mounted in Relay Panel): 20 A, 125 V ac for tungsten filaments; 30 A,
277-V ac for ballasts.
Ensure minimum short circuit rating complies with local available short circuit currents.
Provide in line current limiting fuses if necessary to meet engineer’s requirements.
Endurance: 50,000 cycles at rated capacity.
Mounting: Provision for easy removal and installation in relay cabinet.
Size: As required, to allow for the installation of not less than24 relays total, and the specified and
required system modules, devices, components, etc., specified.
Surge Protective Devices: Factory installed as an integral part of 120 and 277 V ac, solid state control
panels.
BAS NETWORK INTERFACE DEVICE
A.
Provide a solid state, micro-processor based, stand-alone device to integrate the required data
communications links between the specified control network and the BAS network.
B.
The device shall:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Provide a web browser based user interface to the control network.
Allow access and programming of control functions from a remote PC.
Provide the end user a means to create and edit text names for all system panels, relays, switches,
buttons, etc., as well as providing a means to override relays and channel assignments in real time.
Provide scheduling of system devices, including 365 day calendar by date events, dusk/’dawn
schedules and astronomic clock scheduling. Shall support not less than 8 schedules per panel, as
well as eight global schedules.
May be a stand-alone, or integrally installed device, located at, or within a control panel, and shall be
provided with 115 VAC input power supply and terminations for field connection to the facility data
network, and the control network.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
D.
Provide the following control points for operation of the specified lighting control system by the building’s
BAS system:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.6
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
Relay status
Relay on/off control
Relay pulse control
Zone status
Zone on/off control
Zone pulse control
Scene status
Scene on/off control
Momentary contact switch status
Momentary contact switch enable/ disable
Photocell level
DATA COMMUNICATIONS LINK
A.
Provide a data communications device, designed, built and tested to provide the required interface
between the Networked Low Voltage Control equipment and the facility’s data communications system.
B.
Shall enable data communication, monitoring and programming between the control software installed on
a remote facility server and the Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment. Shall also provide on-screen,
PC based notification of failed control network devices and relays, including failure of the network
communications loop.
C.
May be a stand-alone, or integrally installed device, located at, or within a control panel, and shall be
provided with 115 VAC input power supply and terminations for field connection to the facility data
network, and the control network.
2.7
CONTROL SOFTWARE
A.
Provide Windows® based operating software to provide a graphical user interface for system
programming, monitoring, and control functions, from a remote Owner provided PC based microcomputer.
B.
The software provided shall allow for not less than the following features and functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Program each relay installed for its designated on/off time, time delay override period, if any, blink
warning, manual override input device, and other control device inputs.
View the status of each device in the system.
Allow administrators the ability to create password protected security settings to operate the
software and its various generated screens, reports, etc.
Allow administrators the ability to create custom reports, or use pre-programmed report templates.
Provide relay schedules by relay or group - daily, weekly, or school calendar based.
Provide Windows® based point and click style interface for making programming changes, text
inputs, data input, etc.
Provide floor plan views of the building, showing individual rooms or groups of rooms, and their
assigned relays, schedules, and status.
Provide on-screen simulation of system operation.
Support BMP, WMF, JPEG, AVI, PCX, and DCX graphics file formats.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.8
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCHES (Symbol $ with a M)
A.
Multi-gang Momentary Contact Switches: shall be single pole double throw devices located within same
junction box. Provide multi-gang momentary contact switches in locations where there are 2 or more
switches located next to each other. Mount up to 8 switches in a 4-11/16” square box. Provide blank
switches in unused switch openings.
B.
Momentary contact switches shall be 3 position. Center, off, Pass & Seymour SPDT 1225; DPDT 1226.
C.
Gang all switches and dimmers at one location together in the same junction box under one coverplate.
D.
Buttons and coverplates shall be white, non-metallic.
E.
Legend: Engrave coverplates per Division 26 Section “Electrical Identification”.
2.9
OUTDOOR DAYLIGHT SENSING DEVICE
A.
Shall be a low voltage, ambient daylight sensing device, designed, fabricated and tested to provide a
controlled input to the Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment, based on daylight intensity level.
B.
Shall be a single electronic device, housed in an outdoor, weatherproof, metal or non-metallic enclosure,
designed for field installation onto cast, weatherproof, outlet box.
C.
Shall be provided with adjustable, sliding, sensor window to allow for field adjustment of “ON” setpoint.
D.
Shall provide not less than one (1) normally open, relay contact, rate 1 amp @ 30VAC/DC.
2.10
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, complying with
Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B.
Classes 2 and 3 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18
AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C.
Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG,
complying with Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
D.
Digital and Multiplexed Signal Cables: Unshielded, twisted pair cable with copper conductors, complying
with TIA/EIA 568 B.2, Category 6 for horizontal copper cable and with Division 27 Section
"Communications Horizontal Cabling."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
B.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except where installed in accessible ceilings. Comply with
Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall
be 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate power limited
and non power limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Provide surge protective device on the line side of each relay cabinet power supply.
E.
Size conductors according to control device manufacturer’s written instructions, unless otherwise
indicated.
F.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in terminal
cabinets, equipment enclosures, and in junction, pull, and outlet boxes.
G.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Electrical
Identification."
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect, test, and
adjust field assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and assist in field
testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Inspection and Tests
1.
Perform inspections and test procedures as required by Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections
and Testing”, ANSI/NETA ATS “System Functional Tests”, and “Thermographic Survey”
requirements and the following additional requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
C.
Provide:
1.
2.
3.3
Follow-up thermographic survey shall not be required.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
Test for circuit continuity.
Verify that the control module features are operational.
Check operation of local override controls.
Test system diagnostics by simulating improper operation of several components selected
by Architect.
Initial time management and override settings per Owner requirements.
Initial exterior photocell and sensor settings per Owner requirements.
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
A.
Install and program software with initial settings of adjustable values. Make backup copies of software
and user supplied values. Provide current licenses for software.
B.
Install or supervise the installation of system software on designated PC.
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
C.
3.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 09 43 - Networked Low Voltage Control Equipment
The equipment manufacturer’s field service representative shall:
1.
Install or supervise the installation of the specified system software onto the facility’s remote BAS
server.
2.
Produce the required customized graphic screen displays, to allow the end user to control the
system, and operate the system as described in Part 2.
3.
Program the software with the Owner’s initial settings and variables.
4.
Produce backup copies of the installed and programmed software, and turn copies over to Owner.
5.
Provide current software licenses to the Owner.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on
site assistance in adjusting sensors and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes to suit
actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours
for this purpose.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain lighting controls and software training for PC based control systems. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 26 09 43
NETWORKED LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 43 - 11
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 24 16 – Panelboards
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 volt or
less.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Lighting and Appliance Panelboard: A panelboard with thermal magnetic circuit breaker branches, bolt-in
type only, designed for heavy commercial use, operating at 600 V and below, 3-phase versions, equipped
as either surface or flush mounting. Panelboard shall have more than 10% of its overcurrent devices rated
30 amperes or less for which neutral connections are provided.
B.
Distribution Power Panelboard: A panelboard with thermal magnetic circuit breakers or fusible switches,
bolt-in type, designed for heavy commercial use, operating at 600 V and below, 3-phase version, equipped
as surface mounting with cabled connections between sections. Panelboard shall have less than 10% of
its concurrent devices rated 30 amperes or less for which neutral connections are provided.
C.
Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): A device operative on excessive current that causes and
maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.
D.
Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI): A device intended to provide protection against the effects of arcing
faults, as defined in the NEC.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections and Section "Basic 26 Division Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression
device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
PANELBOARDS
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. Series rated
protective devices are not acceptable.
26 24 16 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
d.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 24 16 – Panelboards
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective
devices and auxiliary components.
2.
Wiring diagrams detailing control wiring and differentiating between manufacturer- installed and
field-installed wiring.
3.
Factory Quality Control Test Reports:
a.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that panelboards,
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems"
Include the following:
1)
Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.
a)
b)
2)
3)
1.5
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified
and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Field quality control test reports including the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
Include copy of typed directions depicting branch circuit loads.
Record Documents:
1.
PANELBOARDS
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
26 24 16 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.7
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 24 16 – Panelboards
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.8
Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two
spares for each panelboard.
Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories
through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panelboards and are
based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
F.
Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections and Testing" for field inspections and
testing requirements related to this Section including:
1.
2.
3.
G.
1.9
Electrical Acceptance Testing Responsibilities.
General Electrical Field Quality Control.
Testing Agency Qualifications.
Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems for field testing.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
B.
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
electric service according to requirements indicated:
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
2.
1.10
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 24 16 – Panelboards
Notify Construction Manager Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption
of electrical service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's Owner's
written permission.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates
walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and
encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
Concrete,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
General Panelboards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D.
PANELBOARDS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as shown on Drawings.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Protective Devices," with OCPDs adapted to panelboard installation.
Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multipole breakers shall have common trip.
B.
Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength of all panelboard components, including OCPD's, for
short circuit current ratings as shown on Drawings. The minimum ratings shall be 10,000 AIC for 120/208
volt equipment and 14,000 AIC for 277/480 volt equipment. Series ratings of protective devices shall not
be acceptable.
C.
Enclosures: Cabinets, flush or surface mounted as shown on Drawings. NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except
where the following enclosure requirements are shown on Drawings. Backboxes shall be made from
galvanized steel. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to
supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space.
Provide at least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts.
1.
D.
NEMA 3R: Raintight.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within hinged trim cover.
(Exception: Elevator Room fused switch panelboards).
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 24 16 – Panelboards
E.
Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panelboard door.
F.
Typed directory card completely filled out including "SPARE" and "SPACE" loads.
G.
Bus: Hard drawn, tin-plated copper of 98 percent conductivity.
H.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
I.
Main Circuit Breaker (when scheduled): Mounted physically separate from branch breaker lineups (not in
same row) to allow for full branch circuit pole quantity.
J.
Branch Circuit Devices: Arranged for double row construction.
K.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment ground conductors. Bond to
box with bolted or welded connection.
L.
Gutter: Generally, conform to UL 61.
M.
Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections and extensions, and
necessary appurtenances, for the OCPD ampere ratings shown on Drawing schedules for future
installation of devices.
N.
Special Features: Provide the following features for panelboards as scheduled and or shown on Drawings
or as required to meet NEC:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.3
Skirt For Surface-Mounted Panels: Same gauge and finish as panelboard front with flanges for
attachment to panel, wall, and floor.
Contactors in Mains: Mechanically held, with current rating, poles, and connections as shown on
Drawings. Conform to Division 26 Section "Motor Controllers."
Shunt Trip Control Power Source: Shunt trips where shown on Drawings shall be 120 volt AC.
Provide a 120 volt power supply from the main bus with a primary fuse protected, control power
transformer, with terminals and wiring for the shunt trip connection to remote pushbutton station(s).
Where specified for "emergency" shut-down, install pushbutton on the panel trim. Access to
interior shall be without disturbing pushbutton and shall allow for wiring disconnection from
pushbutton.
Gutter Barrier: Arranged to isolate section of gutter as shown on Drawings.
Column-Type Panelboard Configuration: Narrow cabinet extended as wireway to overhead
junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
Subfeed (Double Lugs): OCPD or lug provisions sized to accommodate feeders shown on
Drawings. Provide subfeed lugs for all multi section panelboards. Field install all required cross
connection cables.
Feed-Through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders shown on Drawings.
Metering: Manufacturers standard devices as shown on Drawings (compatible with metering
equipment per Division 26 Section "Electric Power Management Systems.")
Molded Case Switch: Sized to accommodate feeder lugs shown on Drawings.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items as required for overcurrent protective device test,
inspection, maintenance, and operation.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 24 16 – Panelboards
B.
Portable Test Set: Arranged to permit testing of functions of solid-state trip devices without removal from
panelboard.
C.
Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for panelboards interior including OCPDs and other
components.
2.4
IDENTIFICATION
A.
General: Refer to Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification," for labeling materials and methods.
B.
Manufacturer's Nameplate Information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Voltage.
Phase.
Ampacity.
Manufacturer.
A.I.C. Symmetrical.
UL Listing.
Service Entrance Label (as applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush
with wall finish.
E.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.
1.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F.
Install filler plates in unused spaces and plug any unused, open cabinet knockouts.
G.
Install breaker handle clips in on position at breakers servicing fire alarm equipment.
H.
Install handle ties on multi-wire branch circuit sharing a common neutral.
I.
Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be
ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on
grade.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
J.
3.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 24 16 – Panelboards
When a home run to an existing panelboard is shown, compatible circuit protectives of the indicated
ratings shall be provided when they are not in the existing panel. Whenever circuits are removed from
existing panels, the associated conduit and wire shall be removed in its entirety except leave horizontal
studs at ceiling cavities and the protective device identified as a space. Adjust directories accordingly.
Replace directory if over six (6) circuit changes.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as
specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
1.
B.
3.3
Provide "Fire Alarm System" component identification label at breakers servicing fire alarm
equipment.
Create a typed directory to indicate installed circuit loads[ after balancing panelboard loads]. Label circuit
locations (not occupancy) and spares. Obtain typed approval before installing. Use a computer or
typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and
control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Inspection and Tests:
1.
Perform inspections and test procedures as required by Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections
and Testing", ANSI/NETA ATS Sections for associated panelboard components, "System
Functional Tests", and "Thermographic Survey" requirements and the following additional
requirements.
a.
b.
3.5
Follow-up thermographic survey shall not be required.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
CLEANING
A.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and
other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed
surfaces to match original finish.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 24 16 – Panelboards
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following wiring devices, wiring device accessories, and wiring device
assemblies:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
AC Lighting Switches.
Receptacles.
Wall Box Dimmers.
Coverplates.
Poke-Through Assemblies.
Special Purpose Devices.
REFERENCES
A.
Abbreviations and Definitions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
EMI: Electromagnetic Interference.
GFCI: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter.
Pigtail: Short lengths of conductors factory pre-wired to a modular, plug-in style connecting device,
used for connecting plug-in style wiring devices to field supplied branch circuit conductors.
RFI: Radio Frequency Interference.
Coverplate: Metallic or non-metallic plates providing a finished closure between wall, floor or
ceiling construction, electrical outlet box provisions, and wiring devices.
Wall Plates: Coverplate.
Reference Standards:
1.
2.
Conform to execute, inspect and test, in accordance with code(s), standards, and governing rules
and regulations of Federal, State and Local governmental agencies having jurisdiction at the
project locale.
Other reference which apply to this section include the enforced editions of:
a.
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1)
2)
3)
b.
UL Underwriters Laboratories:
1)
WIRING DEVICES
FB 11-83 (Reapproved 1989) Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors of the Pin and
Sleeve Type for Hazardous Locations.
WD 1-83 (Reapproved 1989) General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
WD 6-88 Wiring Device – Dimensional Requirements.
486-91 (Rev. 95) Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors.
26 27 26 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Provide each type of wiring device and associated coverplates from a single
manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, provide all wiring devices and associated coverplates from a
single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1.
2.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as
defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (U.L.):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
U.L. 20
General-Use Snap Switches
U.L. 498
Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
U.L. 894
Switches for Use in Hazardous (classified) Locations
U.L. 943
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters
U.L. 1010 Receptacle-Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (classified
Locations.
D.
Comply with NEMA WD 1.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment:
configurations.
1.
1.5
Verify and match Owner furnished equipment plug
Cord and Plug Sets: Verify and match Owner furnished equipment requirements.
SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
A.
Protect wiring devices if installed prior to painting.
B.
Schedule installation of finish plates after the surface upon which they are installed has received final
finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Source Limitations: Except as otherwise noted, specified, or required, provide each type of wiring device
and associated accessories, coverplates, etc., from a single manufacturer.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
Bryant Wiring Device Division – Hubbell Incorporated (Bryant)
Cooper Wiring Devices Division – Cooper Industries (Cooper)
Hubbell Wiring Devices/Kellems Division – Hubbell Incorporated (Hubbell)
Leviton Manufacturing Co. Inc. (Leviton)
Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, finishes, colors, electrical ratings listed and
labeled, etc., for applications indicated and in compliance with UL and other applicable ANSI and NEMA
standards.
B.
Wiring Device Face Colors:
1.
General – Except as otherwise noted, provide white color devices – with matching color
coverplates. Verify color selections with Architect.
C.
AC Lighting Switches: Quiet type. Comply with UL 20 and NEMA WD1.
D.
Wall Box Dimmers: Solid state conforming to NEMA WD 1.
E.
Receptacles: Comply with UL 498 and NEMA WD 1.
F.
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: Provide "feed-thru" type ground-fault circuit
interrupter, with integral heavy-duty duplex receptacles arranged to protect downstream receptacles
connected to same circuit. Provide unit designed for installation in a 2-3/4 inch deep outlet box without
adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group 1, per UL Standard 943.
G.
Plug Connectors: 20 amperes, 125-volts, nylon body connectors, 3-wire, grounding, parallel blades,
double wipe contact, with cord clamp, and 0.4 inch cord hole, match NEMA configuration to mating plug's.
Arrange as shown on Drawings.
2.3
WIRING DEVICE PIGTAIL CONNECTOR OPTION
A.
At contractors option, but subject to other requirements of this Section, UL 2459 listed pigtail style modular
connectors designed, fabricated and tested for use with stranded branch circuit conductors may be
provided to allow:
1.
2.
3.
Rough-in of pre-stripped six inch leads to a connector.
Modular plug-in to the wiring device.
Basis of design:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
WIRING DEVICES
Bryant - Quick-Tech™.
Cooper - ArrowLink™.
Leviton - LEV-LOK™.
Hubbell - Snap Connect™.
Pass & Seymour – Plug Tail™.
26 27 26 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
AC LIGHTING SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B.
Standard toggle handle specification grade back and side wired: (* Indicates 1 pole, double pole, 3-way or
4-way, as required.)
1.
20 amp 120-277 volt:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
20 amp 120-277 volt, momentary contact, center off, SPDT:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Bryant - 4921 series.
Cooper – 1995 series.
Hubbell – HBL 1557 series.
Leviton - 1257 series.
Pass and Seymour - 1251 series.
Key operated, 20 amp, 120-277 volt, specification grade, back and side wired. (* Indicates 1 pole, double
pole, 3-way or 4-way, as required.)
1.
Slotted face, with removable fork style key.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
Bryant – 490* series.
Cooper – AH122* series.
Hubbell – HBL122* series.
Leviton – 122*-2 series.
Pass and Seymour - PS20 AC* series.
Bryant – 490* LI series.
Cooper – AH122* L series.
Hubbell – HBL122* L series.
Leviton – 122* L series.
Pass and Seymour – PS20AC* L series.
Linear, Slide Actuation Switches:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Shall be rated 20A @ 120VAC and 277 VAC, provided as single pole, 3-way, or 4-way operating
devices, as indicated.
Shall be provided with linear, slide operating actuators to match slide operating dimming style
control devices.
Coverplate shall attach to device with no exposed fasteners.
Shall be designed, fabricated and tested for installation within a single, gang electrical outlet box
opening and shall be specifically designed for multi-gang installations, matching the look,
appearance and operating motion of adjacently installed dimming style control devices.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
WIRING DEVICES
Lutron Electronics, Inc. – Nova T Star – NT-*PS series (*indicates single pole, 3-way or 4way operation, as indicated.)
Or equivalent.
26 27 26 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.5
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
WALL BOX DIMMERS
A.
Fluorescent:
1.
Linear Slide Type:
a.
Shall be solid state electronic, electro-mechanical devices with linear slide type actuators,
suitable for use and compatible with the 3-wire line voltage fluorescent dimming ballasts
specified.
1)
2)
b.
Shall be rated to control not less than the following fluorescent load:
1)
c.
d.
f.
g.
Faceplate shall attach to device with no exposed fasteners.
Linear slide actuating device shall provide a positive mechanical air gap type branch circuit
disconnecting means at the OFF position.
Faceplate and slide actuator finish/color: Nylon White/Nylon White.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
2)
2.6
16A @ 120VAC.
Provide single pole and/or electronic, multi-location control devices as indicated.
Shall be thin profile design with no exposed heat sink fins, designed fabricated and tested
for installation within a single gang electric box opening.
1)
e.
UP/DN linear action raise/lower lighting intensity control.
Up – "ON", Dn – "OFF".
Lutron Electronics, Inc. – Nova T Star – NTF-10 series.
Or equivalent.
GENERAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLES
A.
Standard face, 20 amp, 125 volt, straight blade, NEMA 5-20R, duplex grounding type:
1.
General Purpose – Commercial specification grade, with steel strap:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Bryant – BRY5362 series.
Cooper – 5362 series.
Hubbell – 5362 series.
Leviton – 5362-S series.
Pass and Seymour – 5362 series.
Tamper Resistant – Commercial specification grade:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
WIRING DEVICES
Bryant – CRS20 TR series.
Cooper – TR5362 series.
Hubbell – BR20 – TR series.
Leviton – TBR20 series.
Pass and Seymour – TR63 series.
26 27 26 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting Feed-Thru Type - Heavy duty premium specification grade, with
LED "Protection assurance" indicator on face:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Bryant – GF20LA series.
Cooper – VGF20 series.
Hubbell – GF20 LA series.
Leviton – 7899-HG series.
Pass and Seymour – 2095 series.
Tamper and Water Resistant, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting Feed-Thru Type - Heavy duty,
premium specification grade with LED "protection assurance" indicator on face.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.7
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
Bryant – GFTR 20 series.
Cooper – TRVGF20 series.
Hubbell – GFR5362TR series.
Leviton – T7899-HG series.
Pass and Seymour – 2095TRS series.
SPECIAL PURPOSE WIRING DEVICES
A.
Emergency Power Off (EPO) Station:
1.
2.
2.8
Heavy duty momentary contact red pushbutton with guard, flush stainless steel plate. Provide four
(4) sets of contacts (minimum) allowing four (4) independent shunt trip panelboards per lab, and
special backbox (as required). Nameplate per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification"
requirements.
Allen Bradley, General Electric, Cutler Hammer - Westinghouse, Square D, or Siemens Allis.
WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES
A.
Indoor Coverplates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
General – Except as otherwise noted or indicated, provide to match the associated wiring device(s)
configuration, style, color, etc. Provide single, multi-gang, and combination plates as required,
specified, or indicated, to match installed wiring device(s) configuration, gang installation, etc.
Provide metal screws for securing plates to device(s), with screw heads finished to match
coverplates.
Provide coverplates with engraved identification conforming to the requirements of Division 26
Section "Electrical Identification."
Material and Finish:
a.
b.
5.
Premium grade, high abuse, smooth face, nylon with captively held screws.
0.04 inch thick steel, with suitable for field finished painting.
Colors: Expect as otherwise noted, indicated, specified, or required:
a.
WIRING DEVICES
Coverplate color shall match wiring device color.
26 27 26 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
b.
6.
7.
Coverplates over multi-ganged, multi-electrical distribution system branch devices, with
multi-colored device faces, shall be provided in a color to match the electrical distribution
systems' "normal" branch wiring device color.
For wiring devices installed in utilitarian spaces over surface mounted outlet boxes, provide steel,
wraparound, utility type coverplates.
Acceptable Manufacturers"
a.
b.
B.
By wiring device manufacturer.
Mulberry Metal Products.
Outdoor/Wet Location Coverplates:
1.
For receptacles installed outdoors, and receptacles installed in indoor, wet locations, and/or
receptacles noted with suffix "WP"; provide non-metallic, weathertight surface coverplates.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
UL listed "Suitable for Wet Locations While In Use".
Rated NEMA 3R while in use.
Provided complete with gasketing and stainless steel screws.
Provide size and configuration for intended use of receptacle.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
2)
C.
Design Equipment: TayMac Corp.
Equivalent: Mulberry Metal Products – 30900 Series, Thomas & Betts – "Steel
City": Series, Raco/Bell - Rayntite II Series, or equivalent.
Wire Guards (Use designated by subscript "WG" as shown on Drawings):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Requirement: Consistent application on project for physical protection of devices by heavy duty
steel cage design. Cage shall not impede proper device operation and shall be screw mounted
with appropriate hardware over device.
Finish: White polyester coating.
Special Finish For Equipment Rooms Or Exterior: Corrosion resistant, white polyester coating.
Submittals shall include product information (and samples) for each device application.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.9
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
Safety Technology International, Inc. (STI)
S.E.C, Inc.
Space Age Electronics, Inc. (SAE)
Device manufacturers’ standard wire guard product if compatible with other project wire
guards.
CORD AND PLUG SETS
A.
Description:
1.
Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being
connected.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
3.
2.10
A.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with greeninsulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.
Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
TESTER
Provide two receptacle circuit testers and two ground fault interrupter testers. Turn over to Owner upon
completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Coordination and Scheduling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices
to fulfill project requirements.
Receptacles shown outdoors, in indoor wet locations or otherwise indicated with suffix WP, shall be
GFCI, weather resistant type, provided with outdoor weatherproof covers and shall be installed per
outdoor, wet location weatherproof construction methods.
Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as
necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work.
Install wiring devices In electrical boxes that are clean; free from building materials, dirt, and debris.
Install wiring devices after roughing wiring work is completed.
Install coverplates after painting work is completed. Provide blank coverplates at unused and/or
barriered box locations unless otherwise directed by Owner.
Coordinate receptacles, shown within six feet of a sink or shown as exterior mounted, which shall
be ground fault protected whether or not shown on Drawings.
Device Orientation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In each instance where two or more devices are generally located in the same vicinity and at the
same installation height, install these devices in multigang, barriered boxes under a single common
coverplate.
Combination devices (i.e. switch and receptacle) shall be installed in not less than a 2 gang box
with barriers between gangs, under one common coverplate.
Coordinate wiring device locations and heights with architectural elevations.
Unless otherwise noted, all wiring devices shall be installed in a vertical orientation.
Lighting switches shall be installed such that the toggle handle "up" position turns the controlled
lighting "ON".
Receptacles at cabinets shall be installed 2 inches clear above counter backsplash or as otherwise
shown on Drawings. Receptacles at water coolers shall be located behind the cooler as
recommended by manufacturer of the cooler.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
2.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening
torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.
Remote, maintained contact, emergency stop and test pushbutton devices shall be connected
ahead of all other motor control devices and shall interrupt the motor control circuit in both the
"Hand," and "Automatic" positions.
Coverplates:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Unless otherwise noted, duplex receptacles shall be installed in a vertical orientation with
grounding pole up. Duplex receptacles installed 3'-6" A.F.F. and above may be installed with
grounding pole down.
Receptacles indicated or otherwise required to be installed horizontally, shall be installed in their
respective outlet boxes with the neutral pole (grounded conductor) at the top uppermost position.
Receptacles in parking garages shall be installed a minimum of 24 inches A.F.F.
Receptacles for surface mounted x-ray film illuminators shall be installed flush to wall surface,
below right hand corner of illuminator, at 48 inches, or 18 inches above floor, to suit field
conditions.
Device Conductor Terminations:
1.
E.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
Do not provide oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and re-install outlet boxes if
standard device coverplates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
Devices designated by suffix WP shall be installed with outdoor, wet location coverplates and
associated outdoor, wet location installation methods.
Provide spannerhead style tamperproof screws and associated screwdrivers for all psychiatric
department device coverplates.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
PROTECTION
A.
3.4
Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
B.
In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or
illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems.
Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as
specified above.
Test straight blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force
shall be not less than 4 oz. (115 g).
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes circuit breakers, fusible disconnect devices and fuses rated 600 volts and less.
Application, installation, and other related requirements for overcurrent protective device installations in
other distribution equipment is specified in other Division 26 sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): A device operative on excessive current that causes and
maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.
B.
Ampere-Squared-Seconds: An expression of available thermal energy resulting from current flow. With
regard to current-limiting fuses and circuit breakers, the ampere-squared-seconds during fault current
interruption represents the energy allowed to flow before the fuse or breaker interrupts the fault current
within its current limiting range.
1.3
LEGEND
A.
AFCI = Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter.
B.
AIC = Amperes interrupting capacity (K = 1000).
C.
BIL = Basic impulse level (K = 1000).
D.
Chg = Interchangeable.
E.
GFI = Ground fault interrupting.
F.
HID = Switching duty rated for HID or fluorescent fixtures.
G.
Non = Non-interchangeable.
H.
SWD = Switching duty rated at 20 ampere rating for fluorescent fixtures.
I.
ZSI = Zone Selective Interlocking.
1.4
COMPATIBILITY
A.
All protective devices in new assemblies shall be of the same manufacture except for special applications
of proprietary types to maximize single-source responsibility.
B.
Protective devices added to existing assemblies shall have compatible interrupting ratings to the
assembly and shall be of the original manufacture. If not available, modify or extend the assembly to
accept compatible protective devices of same manufacturer as supplied in new assemblies.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
C.
1.5
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
Series ratings of OCPDs are not acceptable.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For fuses, fusible switches, circuit breakers, and OCPD accessories specified in this
Section, including descriptive data and time-current curves for all protective devices and let-through
current curves for those with current limiting characteristics. Include coordination charts and tables and
related data.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Factory Quality Control Test Reports:
a.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems"
Include the following:
1)
Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a)
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b)
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified
and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2)
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3)
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
1.7
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data:
1.
Testing Agent Qualifications.
B.
Field Quality Control Test Reports:
1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that comply with requirements.
3.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
4.
Manufacturer's field service report.
1.8
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.9
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
Include final fuse type and ratings as well as served equipment list for all installations.
Include "as-designed" and "as-left" OCPD adjustable settings list for all installations.
Include key interlock sequence of operation per assembly.
Record Documents.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.10
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of
each size and type.
2.
Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed protective
devices, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Series rating of OCPD’s is not acceptable.
E.
Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections and Testing” for field inspections and
testing requirements related to this Section including:
1.
Electrical Acceptance Testing Responsibilities
2.
General Electrical Field Quality Control
3.
Testing Agency Qualifications
F.
Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems for field testing.
1.11
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environment Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg. F (minus 30 deg. C) and not exceeding 104
deg. F (40 deg. C).
2.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.12
A.
1.13
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of protective devices and their associated enclosures and components
with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A.
Enclosures:
1.
NEMA 250-85 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts, maximum).
B.
Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers:
1.
UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
2.
NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
C.
Disconnect Switches:
1.
UL 98-87 - Enclosed and Dead Front Switches.
2.
NEMA K-85 - Enclosed Switches.
3.
UL 977-84 - Fused Power Circuit Devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
THERMAL-MAGNETIC MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2.
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D/Group Schneider.
B.
Construction:
1.
Tripping Mechanisms - Inverse time delay thermal element for long-time overload tripping and an
instantaneous magnetic trip element set to operate at 7 to 10 times the long-time trip setting for
high fault current tripping in each phase. Common trip for multiple breakers without the use of
handle ties. Trip-free over center quick-make, quick-break switching mechanism shall provide
distinctive handle positions to self-indicate automatic tripping.
2.
Enclosure - Bakelite, epoxy, glass-fibered reinforced polyester or similar material required to
obtain interrupting rating.
3.
Mounting - Plug-in for assembly rated 14,000 amperes interrupting capacity or below; bolt-in
otherwise. Rating labels shall be visible when breaker is installed.
4.
Terminal Lugs - Suitable for quantity of wire or bus to be attached; mechanical type for copper
wire, compression type for aluminum wire, and bolted for bus connections.
C.
Ratings:
1.
Trip – As scheduled.
2.
Frame – Provide as scheduled as minimum requirement.
3.
AIC – Provide as scheduled as minimum requirement.
D.
Special Features - Interchangeable trip settings, shunt trip, undervoltage trip, bell alarm, auxiliary switch,
motor operator, etc., as shown on Drawings.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
2.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
Molded case switch shall have manual only tripping mechanism.
SOLID-STATE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2.
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D/Group Schneider.
B.
Construction:
1.
Standard Tripping Mechanism - Solid-state tripping elements with associated current monitors and
flux transfer shunt trip in two or three pole applications. Sensors shall be provided for each pole.
Long-time trip settings shall be adjustable using rating plugs or dials covering a minimum range of
70-100 percent of the specified rating. The magnetic trip unit shall have adjustable short-time trip
characteristics with instantaneous override. The short time adjustment may be a function of the
instantaneous trip setting. Trip unit shall be common for all poles, trip-free, over center quickmake, quick-break switching, and consist of a manual trip button and trip indicators. The trip
device shall be insensitive to temperature changes between minus 20 degrees C and plus 55
degrees C.
2.
Ground Fault Protection Tripping - Shall utilize the flux transfer shunt trip. Utilize an internal
sensor for breakers equal or under the 400 amp frame rating. Above 400 amps, the ground fault
trip shall be a self-contained external relay and shunt trip, except for neutral sensor, and feature an
adjustable pick-up and time delay range from 0 to 18 cycles. Sensing shall be by the residual
current method. Provide trip indicator and test panel.
3.
Enclosure - Bakelite, epoxy, glass-fibered reinforced polyester or similar material required to
obtain interrupting rating. Provide sealable tamperproof cover over adjustment controls.
4.
Mounting - Bolt-in or drawout as indicated.
5.
Terminal Lugs - Suitable for quantity of wire or bus to be attached; mechanical type for copper
wire, compression type for aluminum wire, and bolted for bus connection.
C.
Ratings:
1.
Trip – As scheduled.
2.
Frame – Provide as scheduled as minimum requirement.
3.
AIC – Provide as scheduled as minimum requirement.
D.
Special Features - Interchangeable trip settings, shunt trip, undervoltage trip, bell alarm, auxiliary switch,
motor operator, etc., as shown on Drawings.
1.
Molded case switch shall have manual only tripping mechanism.
2.3
SEPARATELY ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Enclosure:
1.
Flush or surface as shown on Drawings.
2.
Type shall suit area per NEMA requirements.
3.
Ground wire lug of suitable size shall be brazed to the enclosure. Neutral bar on four wire systems
shall be ungrounded.
4.
Nameplate centered on front shall identify load served.
B.
Breaker characteristics shall be as previously specified.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
CARTRIDGE TYPE FUSES
A.
Make – Copper Industries, Inc. - Bussmann, Chase-Shawnut, Economy, Littlefuse.
B.
Fuses, General:
1.
General: Provide fuses of types, classes, and current ratings as indicated. Voltage ratings shall
be consistent with the circuits on which used.
2.
Fuses for Direct Current Circuits: Marked for such use by the manufacturer on the fuse label.
C.
Application of Fuses:
1.
General: Apply fuses as indicated and as follows:
2.
New General Purpose Fusible Switches: Apply the following class types:
a.
0 - 600 Amperes: Class RK1, dual element time delay; LPN-RK, LPS-RK.
b.
601 - 1,200 Amperes, Motor or Transformer Circuit: Class L, time delay; Lo-Peak KRPC.
c.
601 - 1,200 Amperes, Noninductive Circuit: Class L, fast acting.
3.
Bolted Pressure Switches: Class L, time delay.
4.
Service Protectors: Class L, time delay.
5.
Fusible Switch Panelboards: Class RK1, time delay.
6.
Motor Fused Disconnect Switches and Combination Controllers: Class RK1, dual element time
delay; LPN-RK, LPS-RK.
7.
Switches in Switchboards: Apply the following classes and types:
a.
60 - 600 Amperes: Class RK1, dual element time delay; LPN-RK, LPS-RK.
b.
601 Amperes and Above: Class L, time delay; Lo-Peak KRPC.
8.
Existing General-Purpose Switches: Apply the following classes and types:
a.
30 - 600 Amperes: Class RK1, dual element time delay; LPN-RK, LPS-RK.
b.
601 - 1,200 Amperes: Class L, time delay; Lo-Peak KRPC.
2.5
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
General:
1.
Disconnect switches for 120VAC equipment shall be manual fractional horsepower motor
controllers, as specified in Section "Motor Controllers," with engraved coverplate identifying load
served.
2.
Other disconnect switching shall be as specified below.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2.
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D/Group Schneider.
C.
Construction:
1.
Heavy duty type, fused and/or non-fusible as shown on Drawings.
2.
Interior construction - Switch blades fully visible in the off position when the enclosure door is
open. Fuseholders for specified fuse, rejection type.
3.
Switch mechanism - Quick make, quick break with positive interlock to prevent opening of
enclosure door when operating handle is in the on position and to prevent closing of the switch
mechanism with the door open. Operating handle shall be an integral part of enclosure base,
have provisions for three padlocks in the off position, and the means to indicate whether the switch
is on or off by its position. Vertical operating handles shall be up in the on position.
4.
Terminal Lugs - Suitable for quantity of wire to be attached, front removable with terminal shields;
mechanical type for copper wire, compression type for aluminum wire.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
D.
Ratings:
1.
Amperes - 30-1200.
2.
Voltage - 240 or 600.
3.
Poles - 2, 3 or 6.
4.
AIC - Match fuse or upstream protective device.
5.
Horsepower rated - 30 - 600 amps.
E.
Enclosure:
1.
Surface mounted type.
2.
Type shall suit area per NEMA requirements.
3.
Ground wire lug of suitable size shall be brazed to the enclosure. Neutral bar on four wire systems
shall be ungrounded.
4.
Nameplates on front shall identify load service as well as proper fuse application warning.
F.
Special Features - Service entrance rated, control circuit interlock, etc., as shown on Drawings.
1.
Label each safety switch per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification," with the following
legend in capital lettering at least 3/8 inch high: "DANGER, DO NOT START OR STOP MOTOR
WITH THIS SWITCH. USE FOR ISOLATION ONLY."
2.
Where indicated (by subscript “AUX”) provide not less than one set of Form C (1 N.O & 1 N.C)
auxiliary contacts, mechanically interlocked to the switch operating handle, such that the N.C.
contact opens prior to the switch blades closing, of the N.O. contact closes prior to the switch
blades opening.
a.
Contacts shall be rated not less than 15A continuous, @ 240V AC.
2.6
FUSEHOLDERS
A.
2.7
Provide fuseholders to accommodate the fuses specified. Coordinate installation with assembly
manufacturers as applicable.
1.
Terminal Lugs - Suitable for quantity of wire or bus to be attached; mechanical type for copper
wire, compression type for aluminum wire, and bolted for bus connection.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide breaker accessories for general operation and maintenance of specified breakers. Include items
listed below and items recommended by manufacturer:
1.
Test kit for each type of drawout, solid state, and power air breaker.
2.
Handle extensions for low voltage devices 1200 amperes and larger.
3.
Drawout sticks.
4.
Three (3) spare adjustable trip plugs for each rating specified.
5.
Special adjustment tools.
B.
Provide fuse accessories for general operation and maintenance of specified fuses. Include items listed
below and items recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Fuse pullers.
2.
Fuse pull rings.
3.
Handling poles with extensions.
4.
Pole grapplers, prongs, clamps, etc.
C.
Provide, in a surface wall mounted cabinet, per Division 26 Section "Boxes and Cabinets", three (3) spare
fuses of each size and type utilized on the project neatly arranged in clips or holders. Provide SPARE
FUSES cabinet nameplate centered on front.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
D.
Provide quantities of circuit protective accessories in locations necessary for effective general operation.
E.
Provide breaker handle clips in on position at all breakers serving fire alarm equipment. Include
equipment identification label "Fire alarm System" at breaker per Division 26 Section "Electrical
Identification."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install circuit protective devices in assemblies at or above the minimum interrupting rating and frame size
shown on Drawings. Circuit breaker frame size shall be the largest ampere rating if not specified in the
rating schedules.
B.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Add new circuit protectives to existing assemblies when shown on Drawings. Rearrange existing circuit
protective and provide bus extensions, hardware, enclosure modifications, etc., to accomplish the
installations. Modify assemblies directories or add nameplates to match existing.
D.
Install separately enclosed circuit breakers and disconnect switches at five feet above floor unless
otherwise noted. Support independent of stud partitions.
E.
Install fused disconnect switches as shown on Drawings and Schedules, complete with fuses
recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment served. Ensure proper AIC ratings for protection of
the switch and equipment. Submit final fuse ratings as part of O&M Manual submission. Series ratings of
OCPD are not acceptable.
F.
Install distribution equipment circuit protective devices at factory.
G.
Leave all spare devices in the off position.
H.
Coordinate factory or field installation of key interlocks and associated sequence of operation nameplate
per assembly per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
I.
Install spare fuse cabinet at location shown on Drawings.
J.
Install key interlock spares cabinet at Owner designated location.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Identify components in accordance with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between OCPDs and control/indication devices as specified in Division 26 Section "Low
Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for hard wired connections.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.5
Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. Tighten field-connected connectors
and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and
terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
GROUNDING
A.
3.6
Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as indicated, as required
by NEC, and per Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." Tighten
connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and
effective grounding.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested components
indicating test results, date, and responsible organization and person.
B.
Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week's advance
notification.
C.
Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following preparations for independent
tests:
1.
Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and
control circuits.
2.
Make continuity tests of circuits.
3.
Provide set of Contract Documents to test personnel. Include full updating on final system
configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original
Contract Documents.
4.
Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPDs to test personnel.
D.
Test and Inspections:
1.
Perform inspections and test procedures as required by Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections
and Testing”, ANSI/NETA ATS “Switches, Air, Low Voltage”, Circuit Breakers, Air Insulated
Case/Molded Case”, “Circuit Breakers Air, Low Voltage Power”, “Ground-Fault Protection System”,
“System Functional Tests” and Thermographic Survey” requirements including optional
requirements and the following additional requirements:
a.
Follow-up 12 month thermographic survey shall not be required.
b.
Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and sequence. Make
closing attempts on locked-open and opening attempts on locked-closed devices including
moveable barriers and shutters.
c.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service representatives to demonstrate
OCPDs and train Owner's maintenance personnel.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 28 00 – Protective Devices
B.
Conduct a minimum of one half day of training in operation and maintenance as specified under
"Instructions to Owner Employees" in the "Project Closeout" Section of these specifications. Include both
classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and maintenance procedures.
C.
Schedule training with at least seven days' advance notification.
END OF SECTION 26 28 00
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 28 00 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 29 13 – Motor Controllers
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes motor controllers rated 600 V and less that are not supplied with equipment
furnished by other Divisions.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections and Division 26 "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Layout Drawings: Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Each installed unit's type and details.
Nameplate legends.
Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective
devices in combination controllers.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Factory Quality Control Test Reports:
a.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed
controllers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the
following:
1)
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a)
2)
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
26 29 13 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3)
1.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 29 13 – Motor Controllers
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data," include the following:
1.
2.
B.
Record Documents:
1.
1.5
Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed components.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and
arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.
MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer
than two of each size and type.
Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed.
Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections and Testing” for field inspections and
testing requirements related to this Section including:
1.
2.
3.
Electrical Acceptance Testing Responsibilities
General Electrical Field Quality Control
Testing Agency Qualifications
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
E.
1.7
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 29 13 – Motor Controllers
Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems for field testing.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner
or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
1.9
Notify Construction Manager/Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of
electrical service.
Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's/Owner's
written permission.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping,
equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for
equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
C.
Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to
which they connect.
D.
Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings and
characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
General Electrical Company; GE Industrial Systems.
Rockwell Automation; Allen-Bradley Co.; Industrial Control Group.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
5.
6.
2.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 29 13 – Motor Controllers
Siemens/Furnas Controls.
Square D.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS, GENERAL
A.
Controller shall be manual type for motors 1/3 HP and smaller and magnetic type for motors 1/2 HP and
larger.
B.
Coordinate the features of each motor controller with the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit,
the motor, the required control sequence, the duty cycle of the motor, drive, and load, and the pilot device,
and control circuit affecting controller functions. Provide controllers that are horsepower rated to suit the
motor controlled.
C.
Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to the motor.
D.
Controller contacts shall be twin-break, silver-to-silver, renewable contacts with one set of contacts for
each phase.
E.
Overload Relays: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic. Provide with
heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of the specific motor to which
connected with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
F.
Enclosures: For individually mounted motor controllers and control devices, comply with NEMA Standard
250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)." Provide enclosures suitable for the
environmental conditions at the controller location. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures except as otherwise
indicated.
G.
The coverplate shall have a lock-off tab for a padlock.
2.3
MANUAL FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A.
Description: Quick-make, quick-break toggle action.
B.
Single-phase motor control switches (thermal switches) for fractional horsepower motors. Single pole for
120 volt, two pole for 208 volt operation. Mount flush in finished areas and surface otherwise.
C.
Trip-free, toggle operated with on-off-reset position clearly indicated with neon pilot light for run indication.
D.
Thermal overload shall be ambient compensated, plug-in type element with heater rating clearly indicated.
Provide one overload for single pole switch and two overloads for two pole switch.
E.
Where the motor is interlocked and controlled by another device, the motor controller shall be marked
"Hand-Off-Auto."
2.4
COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A.
Description: Provide full-voltage, nonreversing, across-the-line, magnetic controller, except where another
type is indicated.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 29 13 – Motor Controllers
B.
Control Circuit: 120 V. Provide control power transformer integral with controller where no other supply of
120 V control power to controller is indicated. Provide control power transformer with adequate capacity
to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity
C.
Enclosure door shall be interlocked with the operating handle to prevent opening of doors with handle in
the on position.
D.
Shall be provided with the following pilot lights:
1.
2.
2.5
Green light to indicate motor running.
Red light to indicate motor off.
AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES
A.
General: Factory installed in controller enclosure except as otherwise indicated. Where separately
mounted, provide NEMA 1 enclosure except as otherwise indicated.
1.
Control circuit shall be a maximum of 120 volts with individual control power transformer having
Class CC dual primary and single secondary fused protection. Provide terminal lugs for connection
to wiring from external remote located controls. Where indicating lights, solenoid valves and
additional control components are energized from the control transformer, the control power
transformer will be increased in size to handle its normal load plus the other indicated loads.
B.
Control devices such as pushbuttons and selector switches shall be heavy-duty, oil-tight, and be key
operated or lockable where shown on Drawings.
C.
Control selector switches shall be as shown on Drawings and shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Start-Stop.
Off-Auto (O-A).
Hand-Off-Auto (H-O-A).
D.
Provide each H-O-A switch with momentary stop and start push buttons located in the "H" leg to prevent
accidental starting when the switch is turned to the "H" position.
E.
Control devices shall be mounted in starter cover and be labeled with the motor or assembly which they
service.
F.
Control functions shall assure proper fire alarm system overrides. If such overrides are through Division
23 or 25 hardware/software, coordinate per Division 28 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" requirements.
G.
Pilot lights shall be transformer type, heavy-duty, oil tight.
H.
Provide 1 "NO" and 1 "NC" isolated auxiliary contacts in addition to the normal hold-in contact and
auxiliary contacts required for interlocks and pilot lights.
I.
Provide Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts
for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
J.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 29 13 – Motor Controllers
Provide Ground Fault Relays: With sensing circuit and adjustable trip settings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with requirements, installation
tolerances, Insert Project-specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
APPLICATIONS
A.
Coordinate motor control equipment with the motor being supplied. Refer to motor controller schedules on
Drawings. Note that scheduled motor circuit protectors are based on continuous duty ratings.
B.
Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit
and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, controller, and load; and configuration of pilot
device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
C.
Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Location: Locate controllers as indicated and within sight of motors controlled approximately where shown
on Drawings.
B.
For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to
wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers
and Supports for Electrical Systems."
1.
Individually mounted magnetic and manual controllers mounted in finished areas shall be flush.
Flush coverplates shall be stain finish, stainless steel for manual starters or painted finish for
magnetic controllers. Manufacturer’s nameplates or holes resulting there from will not be
permitted.
C.
Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases.
D.
Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in Division 26
Section "Protective Devices."
E.
For magnetic controller/controllers, combination fused or motor circuit protector type shall be used. If
fuses are indicated, the motor circuit protector shall be equipped with current limiters.
F.
Where interlocking or sequence starting of motors is shown on Drawings, it shall be done such that when
the circuit feeding a starter is open, no part of the controller/controllers shall be energized. Furnish any
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 29 13 – Motor Controllers
relates, auxiliary contacts or disconnect switches necessary to implement the indicated sequences and
interlocks.
G.
Provide permanent wiring diagrams as approved by the Engineer showing all internal starter controller
within each motor controller/controllers compartment. Glued-on blueline prints are not acceptable. Also
provide interlock wiring diagrams between controller/controllers
H.
Minimum controller/controllers size shall be NEMA 1.
I.
Provide wiring from the controller to the motor. For 2-speed, 3-phase controller/controllers, provide three
or six wires as required by the controller/controllers type.
3.4
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with structural engineer.
B.
Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems," and
concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.6
Identify enclosed controller, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Electrical
Identification."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform inspections and test procedures as required by Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections
and Testing”, ANSI/NETA ATS “Motor Control, Motor Starters, Low-Voltage”, “System Functional
Tests”, and “Thermographic Survey” requirements and the following additional requirements.
a.
Follow-up 12 month thermographic survey shall not be required.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
b.
c.
3.8
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 29 13 – Motor Controllers
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
END OF SECTION 26 29 13
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes fire alarm systems.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door closers and holders with associated smoke
detectors, electric door locks, and release devices that interface with the fire alarm system.
Division 21 Section "Fire Protection" for waterflow and tamper switches, alarm check valves, and
fire pump devices that interface with the fire alarm system.
Division 26 Sections for components and methods of the fire alarm system installation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ADS: Acoustically Distinguishable Spaces – a notification appliance(s) zone distinguishable from other
spaces because of different acoustical, environmental, or use characteristics.
B.
BAS: Building Automation System.
C.
BASP: Building Automation System Interface Panel.
D.
FACU: Fire Alarm Control Unit.
E.
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.
F.
LED: Light-Emitting Diode.
G.
NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit.
H.
NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
I.
UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply.
J.
Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Noncoded, analog-addressable system; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and
multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
1.
FIRE ALARM
Interface with existing fire alarm system.
26 31 00 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NFPA 72 and local requirements.
B.
All fire alarm supervisory, and trouble system signals shall initiate the following actions:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Identify signal condition type at the FACU, FPU’s <and remote annunciator>. Menuing shall allow
further signal information such as location, type of device and device address.
Record events in the system memory.
Cause the device in alarm LED indicator to flash.
Manual stations.
Heat detectors.
Smoke detectors.
Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following additional actions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously in synchronization.
Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
5.
6.
Stop all supply and return fans.
Signal the Division 23 base building BAS System of a system alarm such that the BAS intelligence
can provide proper smoke and damper control. All associated signals and monitor point contacts
shall be wired to the BASP where the BAS subcontractor will provide BAS terminations. This
Division 28 function is as follows:
a.
b.
Signal the Division 23 base building BAS System of an alarm in the building.
Shut down fans with controller fire alarm control modules (symbol FR) as shown on
Drawings.
7.
Activation of local detectors associated with the following devices shall cause these devices to
operate.
a.
Electro-magnetic door holders.
8.
Record events in the system memory.
E.
Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1.
Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper switch.
F.
System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1.
3.
Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notificationappliance circuits.
Opening, tampering, or removal of central control equipment, alarm initiating, and supervisory
signal initiating devices.
Loss of primary power at the FACU.
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 2
2.
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Ground or a single break in FACU internal circuits.
Abnormal ac voltage at the FACU.
A break in standby battery circuitry.
Failure of battery charging.
Abnormal position of any switch at the FACU or annunciator.
Loss of connection to remote alarm receiving station.
G.
System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble sounder and annunciate at the FACU,
FPU’s and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.
H.
Bypass Control "Drill" Switches:
1.
Activation of SEPARATE auxiliary bypass control switches shall override the automatic functions
selectively within the system for:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
1.5
Transmission of fire alarm condition signal to the remote alarm receiving station municipal
fire department.
Operation of audible alarms (but not affecting indicating alarms).
Operation of fire alarm visual alarms.
Operation of door release devices.
Automatic shutdown of HVAC equipment.
Automatic control of smoke dampers.
Bypass control shall be overridden upon the activation of a subsequent alarm from another
alarmed zone.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 28 Section "Basic Division 28 Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals
specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction.
To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component
locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of
comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.
B.
Equipment Shop Drawing Submittal:
1.
2.
3.
FIRE ALARM
Supplier qualifications.
Provide complete catalog cuts and specification sheets, ITEMIZED BY CONTRACT DRAWING
SYMBOL, for all components to be installed as well as a general system operation description and
control-by-event schedule. The submittal shall clearly depict UL listing and FM approval of system
and components. The system operation description shall include the method of operation and
supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for all manually and automatically
initiated system inputs. Description shall be applicable to this project. Manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
Provide spare parts listing.
26 31 00 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Provide individual amplifier power supply, and FPU point size calculations indicating spare
capacity.
Provide calculations for battery capacity for both alarm and supervisory modes.
Provide voltage drop calculations for typical Class A (and Class B) circuits and wire sizes
identifying maximum length to limit voltage drop to 10 percent maximum.
Equipment quantities (for record only).
Original equipment manufacturer warranty statement.
Pre-Installation Shop Drawing Submittal:
1.
2.
3.
Submit two full sets of shop drawings drawn specifically for the project, one set of associated
reproducible shop drawings, five full sets of data sheets, and installation manuals instructions
detailing the manufacturer's recommendations for all equipment installations.
A drawing symbol legend sheet (to match Contract Document legend wherever possible).
Floor plan drawings showing:
a.
Locations of all fire detection, alarm, and notification system devices, equipment, risers and
electrical power connections including unique addressing of each addressable device and
circuit.
1)
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
Detailed point to point wiring diagrams specific to the project for all alarm control panels, control
panel modules, power supplies, electrical power connections, auxiliary function relays and remote
annunciation equipment. Detail wiring diagrams shall show and identify all terminations, including
terminal identifications, size and type of conductors.
a.
b.
5.
These diagrams shall depict and identify all circuit boards, modules, power supplies, dip
switches, jumpers, leds, indicators, adjustable controls or components, ribbon connectors,
wiring harnesses, terminal strips and connections thereto, including spare zones or circuits.
Diagrams required by this section shall depict the required information as to relative scale,
actual size, or larger, showing proper spacial relationships between components.
A system riser diagram or diagrams showing:
a.
b.
c.
FIRE ALARM
Provide indicated and additional device location(s) based upon manufacturers
recommendations if coverage or sensitively is less than code required expectations
based on Contract Drawings. Be responsible to verify with local authorities as
appropriate. Supply such additional devices at no cost to Owner.
Routing, number, size and type of conductors; expected voltage drop, and conduit size and
fill percentage.
Terminal-to-terminal wiring connections showing all individual circuits and circuit/conduit
routing.
Conduit fill calculations indicating the cross section area percent fill for each type of
wire/cable in each size of conduit used in the system.
Conduit routing and proposed height and method of coring.
System zoning including color coded floor plans showing both system input and output
zones.
Number and size of riser conduits.
Number, size, type and function of conductors in each riser.
The number of each type of device on each floor and zone.
26 31 00 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
6.
Each floor plan drawing, typical wiring diagram, detailed wiring diagram and system riser diagram
shall be cross-referenced to all related drawings. It is intended that the complete submittal shall
include all information necessary for system installation.
a.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Appropriate framed glass zoning diagram to be mounted adjacent to each FACU, FPU.
Device address list.
Each drawing will show the revision number and date in the title block.
Installer certifications and licensing.
Factory training information.
Software Shop Drawing Submittal:
1.
2.
Provide evidence of software requirements specified herein and previously outlined within
Equipment Shop Drawing Submittal including listing of all subroutines and files. Include complete
software documentation and programming instructions.
Submit two full sets of Blueline Shop Drawings, drawn specifically for the project and one set of
associated reproducible (sepia) shop drawings detailing all modes and menuing for the project.
a.
b.
1.7
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Be responsible to program and install initial customizing software as required by Owner.
Include five (5) 4 hour meetings with Owner for setting requirements.
Be responsible for initial maintenance software files listing for speaker tap settings, on-hand
spare parts, and power sources for fire alarm equipment.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.
1.8
Field and quality control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittal:
1.
2.
Provide operation and maintenance data for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual
specified in Division 01 and in Section "Basic Division 28 Requirements." Operation and
maintenance data shall cover each type of product, including all features and operating sequences,
both automatic and manual. Provide the name, addresses, and telephone numbers of service
organizations that carry stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished.
Upon completion of the project, submit three copies of operation and maintenance manual, bound
in a three-ring binder, containing:
a.
b.
c.
FIRE ALARM
A detailed narrative description of the system architecture, inputs, evacuation signaling,
auxiliary functions, annunciation, intended sequence of operation, expansion capability,
application considerations and limitations.
A detailed description of routine maintenance required or recommended, or as would be
provided under a maintenance contract, including a maintenance schedule and detailed
maintenance instructions for each type of device installed.
An equipment list/schedule detailing all equipment and quantities installed. The
manufacturer's product model/identification number shall be shown next to each piece of
equipment on the list.
26 31 00 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Manufacturer's data sheets and installation manuals/instructions for all equipment installed.
A list of provided and recommended spare parts and accessories which the manufacturer
recommends be stocked for maintenance of the system.
A detailed description of the operation of the systems, including operator responses.
Copies of the approved sequence of operation shall be placed in, or adjacent to, the FACU
and maintenance office as directed by Owner.
Power supply and standby battery load calculations for each power supply in the system.
Included with these calculations, a list shall be provided detailing the type, quantity and
normal and alarm current for each type of device installed in the system.
Audio and visual load calculations for each notification application circuit, power supply and
amplifier indicating spare capacity allowances in the system.
A complete riser diagram and 8-1/2 x 11-inch plasticized copies of all detailed wiring
diagrams and control panel wiring diagrams, as approved for the contractor's record
drawing submittal.
Complete software documentation and programming instructions.
Submit 6 extra sets of software user manuals.
Compact disk(s) of final approved shop drawings and operation and maintenance
submittals.
Other requirements, defined by NFPA 72, Appendix A.
B.
Complete Buildings As-Builts: Coordinate through the Construction Manager a complete set of as-built
drawings for filing at the FACU for firefighter's use.
C.
Miscellaneous Submittals: Submittals for system certification, testing, and record drawings shall be per
Division 01 and associated Part 3 article of Division 28 Section "Fire Alarm Systems."
D.
Documentation:
1.
2.
1.9
Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to NFPA 72 to
Owner, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction.
Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to NFPA 72 to
Owner, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction. Format of the written sequence of operation
shall be the optional input/output matrix.
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
A.
Maintenance Service Contract: Provide free maintenance of fire alarm systems and equipment for the
duration of the original equipment manufacturers warranty period (minimum one year) commencing with
Substantial Completion, using factory-authorized service representatives.
B.
Basic services: Systematic, routine maintenance visits on a monthly basis at times coordinated with the
facility. In addition, respond to service calls within 24 hours of notification of system trouble. Adjust and
replace defective parts and components with original manufacturer's replacement parts, components, and
supplies. Include option of automatic yearly or individual software enhancement prices.
C.
Additional Services: Perform services within the above warranty period not classified as routine
maintenance or as warranty work as described in Division 01 Section "Warranties" when authorized in
writing. Compensation for additional services must be agreed upon in writing prior to performing services.
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
D.
1.10
A.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Renewal of Maintenance Service Contract: No later than 60 days prior to the expiration of the
maintenance services contract, deliver to Owner a proposal to provide contract maintenance and repair
services for an additional one-year term. Owner will be under no obligation to accept maintenance service
contract renewal proposal.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is a factory-authorized service
representative and licensed to perform the Work of this Section.
1.
2.
3.
The equipment manufacturer shall have a local branch office with engineering and service
departments staffed with trained, full time employees capable of testing, inspection, repair and
maintenance services for the life of the fire alarm system.
The equipment supplier shall make available to the Owner, the services of an authorized
representative of the manufacturer to train facility maintenance personnel in the operation,
programming and routine maintenance of the system.
The equipment supplier shall represent a major fire alarm equipment manufacturer and shall
conform to and provide proof of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Has represented the equipment manufacturer for a minimum of three years in the project
area.
Has a local shop with all testing equipment and a complete local stock of replacement parts
and materials for servicing the equipment supplied.
Has 24-hour emergency service for servicing equipment after normal working hours.
Has suitable finances to provide the work indicated, the guarantee required, and to provide
future service on the equipment under contract or on-call basis.
Has trained, full time employees to provide necessary testing, inspection, repair and
maintenance of the system. The service technicians must be certified by the project State’s
Department of Labor as Fire Alarm Journeymen Mechanics. National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) level III certification shall be considered
equal. A copy of NICET level III certification or state certification shall be submitted to the
engineer with pre-installation shop drawing submittal.
Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with the applicable building code, local ordinances,
and regulations and the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
ANSI Compliance: Provide a fire alarm and detection system conforming to ASME A17.1.
NFPA Compliance: Provide a fire alarm and detection system conforming to the requirements of
the following publications:
a.
NFPA 70 - "National Electrical Code."
1)
2)
b.
c.
d.
FIRE ALARM
NEC Article 725 - Class 1, 2 and 3 Signaling Circuits.
NEC Article 760 - Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
NFPA 90A - Air Conditioning Systems.
NFPA 92A - Smoke Control Systems.
26 31 00 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
8.
9.
The fire system installation company shall be licensed by the Project State to install fire alarm
systems. A copy of the State fire alarm install license shall be submitted to the engineer with shop
drawing submittal.
UL Listing and Labeling: Provide system and components specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled by UL and specific references as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
10.
11.
12.
1.11
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
UL 38 - Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes.
UL 217 - Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station.
UL 228 - Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 268A - Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.
UL 346 - Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 464 - Audible Signaling Appliances.
UL 521 - Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 1638 - Visual Signaling Appliances.
The fire system shall comply with local building codes, and meet all requirements of the
local authorities having jurisdiction. The complete fire alarm system installation shall be
listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) standard UUJS. All components of the fire
system shall be U.L. listed.
Factory Mutual (FM) Compliance: Provide fire alarm systems and components that are FM
approved proprietary signaling systems.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire alarm components from a single source who assumes
responsibility for compatibility for system components furnished.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) - Latest Edition: Comply with all related fire alarm installation
and operating requirements in the Federal ADA law and local accessibility codes.
COMPATIBILITY
A.
All new fire alarm systems and their associated components shall be of the same manufacturer's product
line except for special sub-systems or non-system detectors monitored by the main system.
B.
All key switches and lockable devices shall be keyed alike whenever possible.
1.12
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Existing Fire Alarm Equipment: Maintain fully operational until new equipment has been tested and
accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels
from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE"
until removed from the building.
B.
Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new fire alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire
alarm equipment.
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.13
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
COORDINATION
A.
Recommend to owner and request approval of nameplate inscriptions, zone designations, and system
designations on system annunciators and central control equipment prior to shop drawing submittals.
B.
Coordinate together with equipment suppliers and other Divisions, their equipment operational voltages
and controls for proper system operation and interface requirements. Provide any necessary auxiliary
equipment and software for system interfaces. The auxiliary equipment shall provide for, but not be
limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Division 23 smoke control and fan shutdown interfaces.
Electro-magnetic door holder release interfaces.
Security system door release interfaces.
City strobe alarm control and power.
120 volt power connections.
Exact duct detector locations and quantities at air handling equipment and in HVAC ductwork.
Exact waterflow and tamper switch locations and quantities in fire protection system.
Wire guards per Section Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."
Breaker handle clips and signage at panelboards servicing fire alarm devices.
C.
Nameplates shall be per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
D.
All information for the system wiring shall be supplied by the manufacturer. The sizes of the different wires
shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Building wire shall be in accordance with Division 26
Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and NEC articles 760, 775, and 800.
E.
Coordinate exact duct detector locations at air handling units and in return and exhaust HVAC ductwork.
1.14
A.
SPARE PARTS
General: Furnish spare part of matching products installed, as described below, and as recommended by
the manufacturer, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly
describing contents.
1.
2.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Two compact disk and hardcopy sets of all system software and graphics.
Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Furnish quantity equal to 5 percent of the number of
units installed, but not less than six.
Lamps for Strobe Units: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed.
Manual Pull Stations, Control Modules, Monitor Modules, Isolator Modules, Smoke Detectors, Heat
Detectors, Non-System Detectors: Furnish quantity equal to 5 percent of the number of units of
each type installed.
Detector Bases: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type installed.
Notification Appliances: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of number of units of each type
installed.
Two boxes of paper for each printer containing a minimum of 2800 sheets each.
Six spare black and white printer cartridges.
Six spare fuses for each fused circuit in the system.
Six sets of any special tools required.
Twelve spare screws of each type installed.
Six screwdrivers of each type needed for system repairs/maintenance.
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 9
3.
4.
5.
6.
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
13.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Keys and locks for all equipment shall be identified and identical where possible. Not less than 12
keys for each type required shall be provided. Key numbering chart shall be provided in each
instruction manual furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
FACU and Equipment:
a.
b.
2.
Wire and Cable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Edwards Systems Technology Inc., Division of United Technologies Corp. (UTC) - EST 2
Series.
NOTIFIER; a Honeywell Company –NFS 640 Series.
Comtran Corporation.
Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.
Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company.
West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
Pyrotenax CIC: 2-hour rated cable.
FACU
A.
General Description:
1.
2.
Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
a.
b.
3.
B.
Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACU
and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory,
and component status messages and the programming and control menu.
1.
2.
C.
Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment
of sensitivity at the FACU.
Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the
device.
Annunciator and Display: Liquid crystal (LCD) type, three line(s) of 40 characters, minimum.
Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands; and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke
detector sensitivity and other parameters.
Circuits:
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Initiating Device Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
Notification Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.
Actuation of alarm notification appliances and fire safety functions, annunciation, and actuation of
suppression systems shall occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.
Network Communications: NFPA Class A.
Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACU for mechanical equipment
shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not required, provided a break in the circuit will
cause doors to close and mechanical equipment to shut down.
Smoke Alarm Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACU.
Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACU and the detector.
Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
Cancel FACU indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
E.
Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal code 3 pattern, complying with
ANSI S3.41.
F.
Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for supervision of the
ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc component shall be from the ac
supply.
G.
Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACU and remote
annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal.
1.
2.
3.
Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm
silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.
Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until
silencing switch is operated again.
When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification
appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
H.
Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating devices.
Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACU and annunciators shall display a
test indication while the test is underway. If testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay,
the system shall automatically return to normal.
I.
Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble, and supervisory
signals to a remote alarm station through a radio alarm transmitter.
J.
Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power supply module. Initiating devices,
notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal digital alarm radio transmitter
shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.
1.
2.
FIRE ALARM
The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power
supply module rating.
Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the service entrance
equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM POWER."
26 31 00 - 11
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.
System Power Supplies: Integral system power supplies shall provide 24VDC operating and
emergency power to each FACU and FPU (18 amps minimum to each panel). It is the design
intent that all system power supplies to derived from network panels, and each power supply
module shall have dedicated outputs and a charging circuit that will support up to 110AH batteries.
Field located addressable notification appliance circuit modules or remote auxiliary power supplies
will not be allowed, except where specifically shown on Drawings. The following system power
supply analog values shall be available for viewing through the primary operator interface display:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
K.
2.
2.3
Auxiliary Power Supplies: Provide distributed network power supplies where shown. Power
supplies shall communicate directly to the main Fire Alarm System via multiplexed communications
to support network based synchronization, and supervision of each panel for ground fault, loss of
AC power and Battery Fail. Each notification circuit served shall be individually supervised via on
board circuitry.
Batteries: Vented, wet-cell pocket, plate nickel cadmium.
Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
Capacity: Per NFPA 72 and local codes.
Surge Protection:
1.
M.
Battery voltage.
Battery charger voltage and current drawing.
Main output voltage (system 24 V) and current drawing.
Individual NAC current draw.
Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an automatic
transfer switch.
1.
2.
3.
L.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACU and its accessories. Comply with
Division 26 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for auxiliary panel suppressors.
Install surge protectors recommended by FACU manufacturer. Install on all system wiring external
to the building housing the FACU.
Operating Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or
glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal,
alarm, and trouble conditions.
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A.
Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACU for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications.
Also duplicate manual switching and menuing functions of the FACU, including acknowledging, silencing,
resetting, and testing.
1.
2.
B.
Mounting: Flush or surface mounted cabinet, as shown on Drawings.
NEMA 250, Class 1.
Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric LCD display same as the FACU. Controls with
associated LEDs permit acknowledging, menuing silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm,
supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACU. Size for 25 percent future expansion.
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 12
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A.
Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting
color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mount on recessed outlet box; if shown on
Drawings as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type. With integral
addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to
the FACU.
Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
Indoor Protective Shield: When shown on Drawings, provide factory-fabricated clear plastic
enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover
actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.
SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
General Description:
1.
2.
3.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble)
to the FACU.
Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them
to normal operation.
Remote Control: Detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACU
for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the
FACU.
a.
B.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
Back-up Sensor: Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall
be settable at the FACU to operate at 135 or 155 deg F (68 deg C) deg F (57 deg C).
Detector Photoelectric Sensitivity: Between 0.2 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011
percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plugin module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection of
building wiring.
Integral Visual-Indicating Light: Alarm/power LED type.
Duct Smoke Detector:
1.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
a.
b.
c.
FIRE ALARM
Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.2 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm)
smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
26 31 00 - 13
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to the FACU.
Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in
a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for
mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to
building wiring.
Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on
status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test station as shown on Drawings.
Remote Control: Detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the
FACU for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for
sensitivity from the FACU.
Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the specific
duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
Remote Duct Smoke Detector Test Station:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Alarm/power LED on faceplate.
Flush wall mounted in finished areas and surface wall mounted or group wall mounted in
equipment rooms.
White lettering on red nameplate identifying associated detector(s).
HEAT DETECTORS
A.
General: UL 521 listed selectable as fixed temperature or combination fixed/rate-of-rise operation as
described herein. Heat detectors shall also be programmed as a low temperature utility sensor when
ambient temperature drops below 40 degrees F. Heat detectors shall be of the bi-metal restorable type.
B.
Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature and/or rate-of-rise of
temperature that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) or 20 degree F (11 degree C) selectable at the FACU per
minute as shown on Drawings.
1.
2.
C.
2.7
Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble)
to the FACU.
Where ambient conditions preclude the use of addressable devices, equivalent conventional devices,
rated for the environment shall be used. Each device shall be monitored by a dedicated addressable
module located in a conditioned space.
FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A.
Description: Equipped for mounting generally as shown on Drawings and with screw terminals for system
connections.
1.
FIRE ALARM
Combination Devices:
assembly.
Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting
26 31 00 - 14
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
B.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Audibility Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Suitable per NFPA 72 and local requirements.
Be responsible to meet requirements using manufacturer specific notification appliances whose tap
settings are generally set at the lower (1/2 watt) of their associated range and main power supplies
and amplifiers with 25 percent minimum spare capacity above sum of all devices at maximum tap
settings. Contract Drawing layouts depict generic industry solution approaches. Add notification
appliances at no cost to Owner to meet these requirements. Submit design compliance per PreInstallation Shop Drawing Submittal requirements.
Design compliance to acknowledge the following minimum acoustical layout criteria:
a.
b.
Published anticipated average ambient room sound levels.
Loss of dBA for barriers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
d.
e.
f.
Stud/Drywall Walls:
35-50
Doors:
15-20
Drywall:
15-20
Wall Coverings:
3-5
Space acoustical characteristics.
Speakers set at lower tap settings generally provide better intelligibility and more uniform
sound levels.
Speakers in equipment rooms shall be set at minimum 2 watt tap setting.
Maximum occupant distance from a speaker is 50 feet.
C.
Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism
behind a surface mounted grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet
(3 m) from the horn.
D.
Visible Alarm Devices: System synchronized xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear
polycarbonate lens mounted on faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-)
high letters on the lens.
1.
2.
3.
Rated Light Output: As shown on Drawings.
Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
Synchronization of strobes shall be accomplished via software programming systems that required
field modules and synchronization circuits will be not considered acceptable.
E.
City Visual Flashing Alarm Signals: Supply exterior visual (strobe) alarm signal device at grade level at
east side of building per municipality requirements. Initiation shall be identical to interior strobe
operations.
F.
Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Extender Panel: The NAC extender panel shall function as a wiring
termination and data collection point on each floor.
1.
2.
FIRE ALARM
Provide additional notification appliance circuit capacity and synchronization for new and existing
visible alarm devices. Size panel as required.
The NAC extender panel may be mounted close to the host FACU or (FPU) or can be remotely
located and shall connect to the host panel via a communications channel. Each output NAC can
be individually controlled for general alarm or selective area notification as required by the area
and function.
26 31 00 - 15
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.
2.8
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Alarms from the host fire panel shall signal the NAC power extender panel to activate. The panel
shall monitor itself and each of its NACs for trouble conditions and shall report trouble conditions to
the host panel.
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A.
Supplied by Division 08, wired by Division 28.
B.
Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching
door plate.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.9
Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf (111-N) holding force.
Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated.
Rating: 24-V AC or DC.
Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
WATERFLOW ALARM, WATERFLOW SUPERVISORY TAMPER, AND DRY PIPE PRESSURE
SWITCHES
A.
2.10
A.
Supplied by Division 21, wired by Division 28.
ADDRESSABLE RELAY
Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address for listed alarminitiating devices for hard-wired applications with auxiliary contacts such as non-system detectors,
waterflow switches, tamper switches.
1.
Integral Relay: Provides a direct control signal for hard-wired applications with input contacts such
as elevator recall, shunt trip, door release, smoke hatch release, fan shutdown, etc.
a.
2.11
A.
Minimum relay quantities for door releases shall be by floor (per FPU) to control all door
releases in the area.
WIRELESS RADIO ALARM TRANSMITTER
Description: Manufacturer's standard commercial product; factory assembled, wired, and tested; and
ready for installation and operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FIRE ALARM
Packaging: A single, modular, NEMA 250, Type 1 metal enclosure with a tamper-resistant flush
tumbler lock.
Signal Transmission Mode and Frequency: Coordinated with operating characteristics of the
established remote alarm receiving station designated by Owner.
Normal Power Input: 120-V ac.
Secondary Power: Integral-sealed, rechargeable, 12-V battery and charger. Comply with
NFPA 72 requirements for battery capacity; submit calculations.
Antenna: Omnidirectional, coaxial half-wave, dipole type with driving point impedance matched to
transmitter and antenna cable output impedance. Wind-load strength of antenna and mounting
hardware and supports shall withstand 100 mph (160 km/h) with a gust factor of 1.3 without failure.
26 31 00 - 16
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
6.
7.
8.
B.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
A.
Transmitter Low-Battery Condition: Sent when battery voltage is below 85 percent of rated value.
System Test Message: Initiated manually by a test switch within the transmitter cabinet, or
automatically at an optionally preselected time, once every 24 hours, with transmission time
controlled by a programmed timing device integral to transmitter controls.
Transmitter Trouble Message: Actuated by failure, in excess of one-minute duration, of the
transmitter normal power source, derangement of the wiring of the transmitter, or any alarm input
interface circuit or device connected to it.
Local Fire Alarm System Trouble Message: Initiated by events or conditions that cause a trouble
signal to be indicated on the building system.
Local Fire Alarm System Alarm Message: Actuated when the building system goes into an alarm
state. Identifies device that initiated the alarm.
Local Alarm System Supervisory Alarm Message: Actuated when the building alarm system
indicates a supervisory alarm.
WIRE GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION
Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the smoke detector, audible device, visual devices,
or other device requiring protection as shown on Drawings.
1.
2.13
Antenna Cable: Coaxial cable with impedance matched to the transmitter output impedance.
Antenna-Cable Connectors: Weatherproof.
Alarm Interface Devices: Circuit boards, modules, and other auxiliary devices, integral to the
transmitter, matching fire alarm and other system outputs to message-generating inputs of the
transmitter that produce required message transmissions.
Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACU or from its
own internal sensors or controls, and automatically transmits signal along with a unique code that
identifies the transmitting station to the remote alarm receiving station. Transmitted messages correspond
to standard designations for the fire-reporting system to which the signal is being transmitted and include
separately designated messages in response to the following events or conditions:
1.
2.
2.12
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Construction and Finish: Per Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."
WIRE AND CABLE
Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article
760.
1.
Limit circuit voltage drop to 10 percent maximum.
B.
Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG size as recommended by
system manufacturer.
C.
Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.
1.
2.
FIRE ALARM
Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 18 AWG, minimum.
Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
26 31 00 - 17
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment mounting heights in accordance with State, Local Fire Alarm Codes, and Handicapped
Codes.
B.
Install devices being conscious of exact placements per NFPA 72. The Drawings are diagrammatic.
C.
Install device boxes of size and type recommended by manufacturer’s representative to suit device and
location shown on Drawings. Paint boxes per Division 26 Section "Boxes and Cabinets". Install FACU,
FPU, NAC extender panel, FATC cabinets at five feet above floor to center, unless otherwise noted,
supported independently from stud partitions.
D.
Install minimum quantity of FPU’s and FATC’s; as shown on Drawings to meet survivability and wiring
homerun design intent.
E.
Provide a dedicated fused disconnect switch on power line to FACU, NAC extender panel, and FPU’s
complete with nameplate "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM". Disconnect location shall be identified with
appropriate nameplate at the FACU’s. Assure breaker handle clips in on position and "Fire Alarm System"
nameplate at all panelboard breakers serving the fire alarm equipment.
F.
Place batteries in the FACU or similar type enclosure located next to the control unit. Batteries which vent
explosive hydrogen gas (gelled-electrolyte, lead-calcium, lead-antimony, and nickled-cadmium) shall not
be placed in the same enclosure as the fire alarm control panel. Such batteries shall be placed in an area
with suitable ventilation. It shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm supplier to advise the engineer and
contractor at bid time of any special ventilation requirements not provided as part of the fire alarm contract.
1.
G.
Provide framed glass print of appropriate zoning diagram adjacent to each FACU.
System Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m).
Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling
areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.
Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and recommendations in
NFPA 72.
HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.
Mount detector bases on ceiling boxes such that the indicator lamps are visible from the floor
below (lined up in corridor applications) or from the nearest equipment aisle or from the doorway
entering the room.
H.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the
full width of the duct and are mounted near the top third on the side of a duct. Provide remote duct smoke
detector test station for each duct smoke detector.
I.
Locate fan shutdown control modules within three (3) foot of associated fan controller, unless hardwired to
local FPU. In either case, an individual addressable alarm point is required.
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 18
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring according to the following:
1.
2.
B.
Raceways: Install all wiring in metallic raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceways."
1.
2.
3.
C.
NECA 1.
TIA/EIA 568-A.
Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be
installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.
Size raceways and associated boxes as required by the National Electrical Code limiting fill to 30
percent unless otherwise indicated or further reduced by manufacturer’s representative’s
recommendations. Terminate all conduits with plastic bushings.
Connect all devices mounted on suspended ceilings to securely mounted junction boxes with
flexible metallic conduit which shall be long enough to move the device five (5) feet in any direction.
Wiring Method:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide interconnecting wire and cable between the various system devices for proper system
operation as recommended by the manufacturer’s representative.
Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the
fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.
Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or
raceway as signaling line circuits.
T-tapping is not acceptable.
D.
Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by
manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure.
Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are
terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal
blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with
approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
E.
Cable Terminations: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
F.
Color Coding: Color code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use
one color code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits. Color code
audible alarm indicating circuits differently from alarm initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible
alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system raceway couplings, junction boxes and covers red.
G.
Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch (25-mm) conduit between the FACU and the
transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit
monitoring function.
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 19
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section "Electrical
Identification."
B.
Install framed operating instructions in a location visible from the FACU.
C.
Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
D.
Mark each addressable device with system device address per Owner requirements.
3.4
GROUNDING
A.
Ground the FACU and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main
service ground to the FACU.
B.
Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize to the greatest extent
possible group loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise fieldassembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.
Report results in writing.
B.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
3.6
SYSTEM CERTIFICATION AND TESTING DOCUMENTATION
A.
Submit written certification documenting successful completion of all system required testing. This
certification and documentation shall include certification that the system:
1.
Has been visually inspected and functionally tested by a manufacturer's certified representative.
Documentation shall include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
The date and time of each test.
A reference set of record drawings, numerically identifying the individual components and
circuits tested.
A description of each test/verification performed.
A checklist of each device and circuit test, indicating the results of each test. Include
speaker tap setting list and initiating device time/sensitivity setting list.
A narrative sequence of operations for all associated evacuation signaling and auxiliary
functions, including a verification checklist documenting correct operation.
The names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.
A checklist of test results for signaling between related systems including:
1)
FIRE ALARM
Division 23 BAS for fan shutdown, damper, and smoke control.
26 31 00 - 20
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.7
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Municipal Dialer
Division 21 fire suppression signaling.
Division 21 fire protection signaling.
Kitchen fire suppression system(s).
Division 08 for hardware interface such as door and smoke hatch releases.
Security system signaling for door release(s).
Is installed entirely in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and within the
limitations of the required listings and approvals.
Is in proper working order and in full compliance with Contract Documents.
Has latest version of manufacturer's software and graphics. Include appropriate listing.
Note: Multiple tests may be required depending upon approval of suggested Division 28 phasing.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
3.8
Upon completion of the installation, record drawings shall be submitted on each system before final
acceptance of the work. Furnish to the Engineer a set of record drawings including system diagrams for
each system. The record drawing masters shall be on reproducible Mylar film. Uniformly sizes as
required for legibility and reproduction and on high density floppy disks in latest Autocad Version format.
(Note that contract document drawings are available from the Architect on floppy disk for a negotiated
fee.) Record drawings shall illustrate all peripheral device locations including final address, major
equipment locations, zoning, conduit routing, single line riser diagram depicting wiring characteristics and
termination designations for all devices. Also included shall be documentation of spare raceways, new
and existing, either unused or vacated by removal of existing systems.
TRAINING
A.
Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate and train the facilities
maintenance personnel as specified below.
B.
Train facilities maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance of the system. Training shall also include
complete user software/graphics changeability by Staff Personnel. Future voice message changes shall
be implemented through local supplier to ensure integrity/reliability of audible alarm functions. Provide a
minimum of four (4) 4-hour training sessions for ten (10) facility staff total.
C.
Each session shall be video taped with 2 VHS or DVD copies turned over to the Owner upon completion.
Include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Permanent training manuals as well as ten (10) individual training manuals broken apart by training
session.
All costs associated with training at the facility in a classroom environment.
An hourly rate for training beyond the specified sessions shall be presented to the Owner.
All standard manufacturer training video tapes and manuals as part of permanent training manuals.
Factory Training: Provide a quote per person for facilities personnel to undergo, at the Owner's option,
standard factory one (1) week training and certification identical to manufacturer's representative field
training. Include training synopsis and personal accommodation information.
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 21
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
E.
3.9
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 31 11 – Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Coordinate and schedule training with the facility at least one month in advance.
ADJUSTING
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide
on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to
Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
B.
Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system
complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections
listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.
END OF SECTION 26 31 00
FIRE ALARM
26 31 00 - 22
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes specifications for the provision and installation of the following:
1.
Interior luminaires, ballasts, lamps and related accessories.
2.
Emergency lighting products.
3.
Illuminated "EXIT" signs.
4.
Luminaire supports.
5.
Lighting retrofit equipment.
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A.
BF: Ballast Factor.
B.
CCT: Correlated Color Temperature.
C.
CRI: Color Rendering Index.
D.
CU: Coefficient of Utilization.
E.
DT: Dual Tube for Compact Fluorescent Lamp Specification. Also known as "quad tube".
F.
HID: High Intensity Discharge.
G.
LED: Light Emitting Diode.
H.
LER: Luminaire Efficacy Rating.
I.
Luminaire: A complete lighting assembly or product consisting of; not less than a light source(s) and
related device(s) to position the light source(s), housing or enclosure, light source control, optics and
shielding, and light source power supply/control device(s).
J.
NRTL: Nationally recognized testing laboratory.
K.
RCR: Room Cavity Ratio.
L.
Solid State Lighting/Luminaires: Light sources and their associated luminaires that produce light (radiant
energy) without the use of electrical filaments, excited gas or plasma, such as LED, OLED, or PLED.
M.
TCLP: Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure.
N.
TT: Triple Tube for compact fluorescent lamp specification.
O.
UV: Ultra Violet.
P.
VCP: Visual Comfort Probability.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
1.3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submitted as a complete package, in loose-leaf 3 ring binders, notebooks, or folders, in
quantities specified in Division 01, for the products specified herein, and in the Luminaire Schedule. Not
less than the following product data shall be submitted:
1.
A product data sheet, literature, drawing, etc., for each luminaire specified.
a.
The product data sheets shall be specific to the particular luminaire, lamp, ballast, and
accessories specified.
b.
The luminaires standard features and conformance with the specified options, features,
performance criteria, etc.
c.
The manufacturer's standard luminaire description, drawing, photo and fabrication
specifications indicating conformance with the Luminaire Schedule and this specification
section.
d.
Luminaire dimensional data.
e.
Photometric performance data, based on laboratory testing, specific to the particular lamp,
ballasts, and accessories specified for this project.
f.
Efficiency Data: Provide both lumen performance efficiency, and luminaire efficiency rating
(LER).
1)
Where specifically stated, photometric performance data shall be certified by an
independent testing service regularly engaged in the testing and certification of
luminaire photometric performance.
2)
Where not specifically stated, the photometric performance data provided by the
manufacturer will be acceptable.
g.
Where applicable, provide manufacturer’s recommended maximum remote distance length
and wire size.
h.
Compliance with State Code.
2.
A separate ballast, power supply, or driver manufacturer product data sheet, or manufacturer’s
specific literature, for each luminaire requiring same.
a.
Each product data sheet shall provide not less than the following information:
1)
Lamp compatibility and number of lamps controlled.
2)
Input voltage.
3)
Lamp starting method.
4)
Total input power consumption, in watts, including lamp wattage and ballast losses.
5)
Line current data.
6)
Ballast factor.
7)
Total harmonic distortion data.
8)
Minimum lamp starting temperature.
9)
Physical dimension data.
10) Sound rating.
b.
Exceptions: The following types of ballasts do not require separate product data sheet
submittals:
1)
Magnetic core and coil type HID lamp ballasts.
3.
In addition to, or as part of, the product data sheet submittal, provide a statement, certifying that
the ballasts, power supplies, and drivers, along with the automatic lighting control devices
(occupancy sensors, daylight harvesting controls, etc.) being supplied are compatible equipment,
and do not compromise the proper operation of, and/or the design criterion of, the supplied
ballasts, power supplies, drivers, or automatic control devices.
4.
A separate lamp product data sheet or literature for each luminaire type.
a.
Copies of lamp manufacturers standard catalog pages, with the specific lamp, and
specification criteria highlighted, may be submitted for this purpose.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
b.
5.
Submitted data shall demonstrate conformance with the lamp criteria specified herein, and
in the Luminaire Schedule.
A separate emergency lighting accessory product data sheet, for luminaires specified with same.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Layout Drawings: For custom, non-standard, and continuous row/length luminaires, submit
fabrication type shop drawings, in addition to the standard manufactures data sheet(s). Indicate
plan, elevation, and section views, along with dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly,
components, features, and accessories.
a.
For continuous row and continuous length (including wall-to-wall) luminaires, provide scaled
drawings indicating luminaire lengths and lamping requirements for each separate,
individual length and row. Indicate layouts and quantities of individual luminaire housings,
corners, transition components, spacers, etc.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Provide ballast quantities and wiring to provide conformance with switching, life
safety, and other control requirements.
3.
LEED Credit Applicability: Provide compliance data.
4.
Lighting products that are slight variations of standard products, and/or continuous row/length
versions of standard products, shall bear labeling from a NRTL.
5.
Custom fabricated lighting products shall be tested in accordance with the appropriate standard(s),
and shall bear labeling from a NRTL.
C.
Samples for Verification: Submit samples of designated interior luminaires noted in Luminaire Schedule.
Each furnished sample shall include the following:
1.
Lamps: As specified – Installed in sample luminaire.
2.
Cord and plug: Wired to luminaire junction box or ballast.
3.
120V ballast (for ballasted luminaires).
4.
Delivered with the specified finish/color applied, or provided with a finish/color sample for
evaluation.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for luminaires.
1.
Lighting Photometric Performance Calculations:
a.
Provide software generated scalable lighting photometry plots indicating numerical
illuminance values in point-by-point form, where and as directed.
b.
Input data, for the purposes of generating the photometry plots shall indicate the design
heights of luminaires, design reflectances for the various wall, ceiling and floor surfaces,
initial lumen rating of lamps used, and design light loss factors including ballast factor, lamp
lumen depreciation factor, dirt depreciation factor, and any other light loss factors.
c.
Provide summary illuminance data including maximum, minimum, average, and maximum
to minimum uniformity ratio across the entire confines of the particular room area, or space.
d.
Identify the lighting calculation software used to produce the photometry plot, date of plot,
input data specified above, company name and individual responsible for producing the
calculation.
B.
Field Quality Control Test Reports:
1.
Indicate and interpret test reports for compliance with performance requirements.
C.
Warranties: Provide special warranties as specified in this Section, otherwise refer to Division 01.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
1.5
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide not less than three (3) quantity sets of submittals of the
following items, to the Owner, in loose leaf 3-ring binders.
1.
Three (3) Copies of each approved action and informational submittal processed as part of the
Work.
2.
Copies of product warranty statements.
3.
Copies of product installation and maintenance materials furnished with the equipment.
4.
Provide complete sets (quantity as defined in Division 01) of approved product data sheets, along
with comments, remarks or corrections noted during the review process, reflected ceiling plans,
wiring diagrams for project specific applications of each luminaire type for each application
throughout the project.
5.
Include date of installation, date of initial lamping and replacement parts order information. Include
lamp and ballast re-ordering information, and re-lamping schedule for luminaires appropriate for
group re-lamping (linear fluorescent, HID). Include basic maintenance requirements, including
luminaire and component cleaning.
6.
Provide copies of spare lamp, luminaire and ballast, and other accessories delivery receipts.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide luminaires factory designed, built and tested per the following standards:
1.
Incandescent Luminaires – UL 1598. Where a specific LER value is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
2.
Fluorescent Luminaires – UL 1598. Where a specific LER value is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and LE 5A, as applicable.
3.
HID Luminaires – UL 1598. Where a specific LER value is specified, test according to NEMA LE
5B.
4.
Recessed Luminaires – In compliance with NEMA LE 4, for ceiling system material, type, and
design compatibility.
5.
Solid State Lighting/Luminaires – UL 8750, 1598, 1574 and 2108.
B.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories
that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient
Lighting Products.
C.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with
the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculations Guides.
D.
Solid State Lighting/Luminaires:
1.
Luminous flux, luminaire efficiency and chromaticity shall be tested, measured and reported in
accordance with the most current versions of IES documents LM-79 and LM-80.
2.
Chromaticity ranges for "white light" products, with various correlated color temperatures, shall be
provided in accordance with ANSI/NEMA-C78.377.
3.
Drivers and power supplies shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/NEMAC82.SSL1 and their maximum allowable harmonic emission limits shall be in accordance with
ANSI/NEMA-C82.77.
4.
Shall be provided with a U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) "Lighting Facts "label indicating their
specific performance characteristics, tested and reported in accordance with the requirements of
the most current version of IES LM-79.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
F.
Except as otherwise specified herein, provide installation in accordance with the requirements of
NECA/IESNA 500 – Standard for Installing Indoor Lighting Systems (ANSI).
G.
Provide in compliance with NFPA 70.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires and suspension system with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and
partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate installation of luminaires to prevent the possibility of damage.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Provide for the coordination of luminaire procurement, delivery, expediting, ceiling material/luminaire
compatibility, etc.
B.
Deliver luminaires in factory fabricated containers or wrappings which properly protect luminaires from
damage. When possible, arrange for manufacturer to take back packaging materials to be recycled or
reused.
C.
Store luminaires and accessories in a secure, dry, heated location, protected from construction dust, dirt
and debris, in their factory shipped cartons, pallets, packaging, etc., until ready for installation.
D.
Handle luminaires carefully to prevent damage, breakage or scoring of finishes.
1.9
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate with other work including ceiling type, wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways,
to properly interface installation of interior luminaires with other work.
B.
Sequence luminaire installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during
remainder of construction.
C.
Schedule the installation of luminaires and lamps, to allow for the specified lamp "burn-in" period.
1.10
A.
CONTROLS PROGRAMMING, SETUP AND COMMISSIONING
Provide on-site construction personnel for the purpose of aiding outside vendors, factory technicians and
other duly authorized representatives of lighting equipment manufacturers, during their required controls
programming, setup and commissioning of systems and equipment.
1.
Provide not less than 8 on-site hours for this activity.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
B.
1.11
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Provide for the services of a duly authorized, factory representative of the Lighting Controls System
Manufacturer for not less than 16 on-site hours, to perform the tasks described in Part 3.
WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in this Article shall be provided and shall run concurrent with other warranties
required of the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. Warranty requirements
being at time of Substantial Completion of project.
B.
Warranties for Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to
replace fluorescent ballasts, including labor, that fail in materials or workmanship within five years.
C.
Warranties for luminaire finishes: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace
luminaires, including labor, exhibiting a failure of finish as specified below within five (5) years.
1.
Protection from Corrosion: Warranty against perforation or erosion of finish.
2.
Color Retention: Warranty against fading, staining, and chalking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
3.2
Luminaire Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of this section and the design criteria specified in the Luminaire Schedule, provide products by the manufacturers listed in the Luminaire
Schedule.
3.3
Reference to specific luminaire manufacturers and their respective model or series numbers, are included
in the Luminaire Schedule to provide a guide as to the level of quality, performance, and overall physical
appearance of the specified product, which shall be met, in accordance with the Luminaire Schedule’s design criteria, and as written herein.
3.4
Listed luminaire manufacturers and their series or model numbers shall not imply unconditional specification approval. The listed manufacturers and their respective products have been included as acceptable
manufacturers of products which shall comply with the Luminaire Schedule design criteria, luminaire descriptions, and these specifications. Modification to a given manufacturer’s standard product may be required to make the model or series numbers listed comply with the Luminaire Schedule design criteria,
and these specifications.
3.5
The preceding paragraph shall in no way suggest or indicate that a manufacturer’s UL listing be voided or
otherwise compromised, in order to comply with the specified luminaire design criteria, descriptions or
these specifications.
A.
Luminaire Products and Accessory Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of this
section, provide products from the manufacturers included herein.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
B.
2.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Manufacturers of products not specifically listed in the Luminaire Schedule, or submitting on the basis of
"or equivalent", or "as approved", shall provide the following for review prior to, or along with product
submission.
1.
Documentation showing a minimum of three years experience in the business of the design and
manufacture of lighting equipment similar to the type and quality of products specified.
2.
Product data and photometry demonstrating conformance with these specifications and the specific
data included in the Luminaire Schedule.
3.
Prototype and/or operating sample of the product for evaluation by the Architect/Engineer.
Prototype and/or sample shall be sufficiently detailed and operational to allow for fair evaluation
and to demonstrate compliance with the salient features specified. Product data and shop
fabrication drawings are not acceptable means of providing prototype/sample requirement.
4.
Architect/Engineer shall be the sole judge of compliance and reserves the right to disapprove
manufacturer’s products other than what has been previously specified.
LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General Requirements:
1.
Provide luminaires complete with the required and specified features, options, accessories, etc.
Luminaires shall be provided as complete assemblies, ready for installation, including lamps,
ballasts, transformers, reflectors, shielding media, wiring and all other components required for a
complete installation.
2.
Luminaires provided shall be constructed, wired, and installed in compliance with appropriate
NRTL standards and applicable codes.
a.
Provide luminaires that are listed or approved for use in their application and location.
b.
All products provided shall be listed, labeled, or otherwise approved by a NRTL, and shall
be provided with the appropriate listing ID label(s) permanently affixed to the luminaire,
concealed from normal view.
3.
Except as otherwise noted, luminaires and their related accessories, lamps, ballasts, etc., shall be
new, unused, factory tested, and ready for field installation.
4.
Refer to Luminaire Schedule for additional luminaire specifications, descriptions, features and
functions, color and finish selections, etc.
5.
Recessed luminaires provided for installation in ceiling spaces known, or presumed, to be installed
in direct contact with combustible materials within the ceiling cavity, shall be IR tested, rated, and
so labeled.
6.
Recessed luminaires provided for installation in known, or presumed air tight ceiling spaces, shall
be designed to restrict airflow to under two cubic feet per minute, from the controlled environmental
space to the ceiling space (or plenum), and shall be listed and labeled "Air-Tight."
7.
Recessed luminaires provided for installation in known, or presumed fire rated ceiling assemblies,
shall be UL classified, listed, and so labeled for use in fire rated ceiling assemblies.
8.
Recessed incandescent luminaires shall be factory furnished with integral thermal protection
devices, designed to automatically interrupt AC power applied to the luminaire lampholder(s).
9.
Luminaires provided for recessed installation in false ceiling materials shall be designed and built
for full access to concealed electrical components from below the finished ceiling material.
Luminaire designs that require destruction, or removal of installed ceiling system components to
allow access to concealed electrical components, do not meet this specification.
10. In general, luminaires shall be fabricated from sheet metal, or extruded metal parts. Except as
otherwise specifically specified, noted, or indicated, non-metallic parts shall not be used in
luminaire construction.
11. Lampholders shall be factory supplied, by the respective luminaire manufacturers, and shall be
provided according to the luminaires designated lamping requirements.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
a.
b.
c.
12.
13.
14.
Lampholders supplied for incandescent and HID luminaires, shall be porcelain.
Lampholders supplied for HID luminaires shall be pulse rated to their lamping requirements.
Lampholders supplied for fluorescent luminaires shall be compatible with and match their
associated lamp requirements.
Luminaires shall be constructed for safe installation. Luminaires shall be provided free from burrs,
sharp edges and corners, and fabrication/tooling marks.
Provide luminaires complete with ceiling trims and similar materials to coordinate with ceiling
construction materials.
Provide luminaires complete with their full complement of required installation hardware, T-bar
hangers, wood joist hangers, "C" channel bar hangers, outlet box canopies, pendent suspension
kits, etc. The contractor shall bear the responsibility for ceiling/luminaire installation coordination
and procurement.
B.
Recessed Luminaires: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
C.
Incandescent Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.
D.
Fluorescent Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5
and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
E.
HID Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
F.
Solid State Lighting Luminaires: Comply with UL 8750 and previously stated standards.
G.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
H.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and
sagging.
I.
Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall
be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles
when lamps are in place.
1.
Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a.
"USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b.
Lamp diameter code (T4, T5, T8, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base
type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.
c.
Lamp type, wattage, bulb shape (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID
luminaires.
d.
Ballast starting type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, programmed start, etc.) for
fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.
e.
ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
f.
CCT and CRI for all lamps.
2.
Provide DOE "Lighting Facts" label on all solid state lighting products.
J.
Fluorescent Luminaires:
1.
Shall be provided with factory installed disconnecting means, in compliance with Article 410.130(G)
of NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2.
Except as otherwise indicated, luminaires shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge, pretreated and pre-finished cold rolled steel (CRS), die-cut, formed, welded and tabbed to form a rigid
housing. Housings and exposed surfaces shall be painted after fabrication in the specified finish
coating(s).
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
3.
4.
5.
6.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Provide multiple ballast/lamp wiring to facilitate the switching arrangements indicated on the
drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, 3 and 4 lamp fluorescent luminaires shall be factory wired to
multiple ballasts, to allow inboard/outboard switching of the respective lamps.
Lampholders supplied shall be compatible with, and shall match the configuration of the associated
luminaire lamping requirements.
a.
Lampholders supplied for linear, bi-pin fluorescent lamps, required to be dimmed, shall be
rapid start type, with knife edge style contact points, and shall be factory wired in parallel,
not series, not shunted and not jumpered.
Luminaire wiring compartments shall be listed and labeled for feed-thru wiring.
Continuous Row, Long Linear Length Luminaires:
a.
Luminaires provided for continuous row, and long linear length installation, shall be factory
designed, fabricated, and provided utilizing the longest single length luminaire housing,
lens, and lamp configurations available. Except as otherwise noted or indicated, luminaire
manufacturers shall not indiscriminately butt short housing/lens/lamp lengths together, to
form long continuous luminaire lengths.
b.
Except as otherwise indicated, continuous row and long length luminaires shall be limited to
3 and 4 foot long lamp lengths.
1)
Luminaires/lamp lengths fabricated to provide the emergency lighting requirement
indicated, shall be limited to 4 ft. lamp lengths. 2 ft. and 3 ft. long luminaires and
lamp lengths shall not be utilized to provide the indicated emergency lighting.
c.
Where staggered lamping is specified, luminaire manufacturer and contractor shall
coordinate the nominal luminaire lengths indicated, with the manufactured housing
components, to provide a uniform, unbroken, lighting appearance along the entire length of
continuous row indicated.
1)
Manufacturer shall provide luminaire and lamp lengths (limited to 3 and 4 ft. long
lamps only) as required, to provide the end-to-end lengths indicated. A single 2 ft.
long lamp may be utilized, with approval from the architect, if required, to provide the
continuous lighted length required.
2)
Where luminaire continuous lengths are shown indicated, or otherwise specified as
extending wall-to-wall, the luminaire housings and lenses shall extend wall-to-wall, to
match the architectural wall/ceiling construction.
3)
The overall staggered lamp length may fall within 6" max. of the housing/lens length,
and shall be equally and symmetrically spaced at both ends.
4)
Lenses, louvers, and other shielding media, where specified, shall be provided in the
longest lengths available, to limit the number of joints and seams.
d.
Luminaires shall be factory supplied with spine type splicing, alignment, and installation
components, to allow luminaires to be field installed in long, linear, continuous rows, with no
discernable deflection along the entire row length.
K.
Doors, Frames, and Other Access Components:
1.
Doors, lens frames, access compartments, latches, etc., shall be smooth operating; designed and
fabricated to trap produced light within the luminaire housing proper. No visible light leaks.
2.
Luminaires shall be designed, built, and tested to allow for lamp replacement without having to
remove or disassemble luminaire components.
3.
Lenses, louvers, diffusers, door frames, access covers, etc., shall be held captive, and shall be
designed to limit the potential for accidental droppage during lamp replacement, luminaire cleaning,
maintenance, etc.
L.
Luminaire Coatings and Finishes:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
M.
2.3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Luminaire surfaces, components, trims, housings, etc., shall be factory pre-treated, rust proofed,
primed, and otherwise prepared, to inhibit rust and corrosion. Exposed luminaire surfaces shall be
factory pre-treated, primed, and finish coated with a suitable rust and corrosion inhibiting product.
Luminaire reflective surface coatings shall provide not less than the following minimum reflectance
values:
a.
White Paint
85%
b.
Specular Surfaces
83%
c.
Semi-Specular Surfaces
75%
d.
Laminated Silver Metalized Film
90%
Except as otherwise indicated, the luminaire manufacturer’s standard factory finishes shall be
acceptable. The finish color shall be as specified, or otherwise indicated.
Where specifically specified, or otherwise indicated, custom finishes or color selections shall
require written approval from the Architect prior to application. A sample of the custom finish or
color shall be submitted, to the Architect, for approval.
Where a specific finish, or color, is specified, or otherwise indicated, the luminaire manufacturer
shall factory apply the stated finish or color product to all visible luminaire surfaces, except those
surfaces affecting luminaire performance. Except as otherwise indicated, luminaire finishes shall
not be field applied.
Cast and extruded luminaire components and housings, specified with a natural or clear finish shall
be factory coated with a baked-on, clear, methacrylate lacquer, transparent epoxy, or other suitable
clear protective coating.
Reflectors, Cones, and Baffles:
1.
Shall be fabricated free from spinning lines, ripples, and other surface imperfections.
2.
Shall be designed for invisible and secure attachment and installation to luminaire housing. Shall
be free from visible or exposed hardware.
3.
Shall be provided in the finish, color, material, and optical design properties specified in the
Luminaire Schedule.
Lenses, Diffusers, Louvers, and Lamp Shielding Media:
A.
General - Acrylic Lenses and Diffusers:
1.
Lenses shall be specifically designed, fabricated, and tested for the purpose of providing optically
correct, measurable, and predictable light distribution results. Lenses shall facilitate light refraction,
distribution, lamp shielding and glare control for artificial light source luminaires.
2.
Shall be fabricated from 100 percent clear, UV stabilized, virgin acrylic, material, specifically
designed and tested for use with artificial illuminating light sources, and shall be non-yellowing as a
result of aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
3.
Lens Thickness: Except as otherwise indicated, shall be fabricated and factory tooled to not less
than 0.125 inch overall thickness.
4.
Shall be designed, fabricated, and tested to maintain a maximum smoke development rating of 450
as required by ASTM-E84, and a maximum burning rate of 2-1/2 in. per minute as required by
ASTM D635.
5.
Deflection, measured at the center of a 24" X 48" lens or diffuser, from its edge, shall be not
greater than 3/32" (0.094)" below luminaire door/trim assembly. Negative cambers, molded into
the lens or diffuser material, designed to arch the material upward, shall be acceptable.
B.
Pattern 12 Lens – Shall be:
1.
Not less than .125 in. overall panel thickness.
2.
Not greater than .080 in. prism penetration depth.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
3.
4.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Female (inverted) conical prisms, 3/16 in. square at penetration depth, straight flat-sided prism
shape (concave sided, radiused prisms do not meet this specification), configured on a 45° axis
layout, across the entire panel.
Acceptable Manufacturers: By luminaire manufacturer.
C.
Pattern 19 Lens – Shall be:
1.
Not less than .156 in. overall panel thickness.
2.
Not greater than .080 in. prism penetration depth.
3.
Bold male (inverted) conical prisms, 3/16 in. square at penetration depth, straight flat-sided prism
shape (concave sided, radiused prisms do not meet this specification), configured on a
parallel/perpendicular 90° axis layout, across the entire panel.
4.
Acceptable Manufacturers: By luminaire manufacturer.
D.
ASYM Lens – Shall be:
1.
Clear, virgin acrylic material, not less than .156" thickness, with both asymmetric and symmetric
"V" shaped linear prisms formed into the panel.
2.
Where so specified, shall provide an additional Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI) suppressing
grid, consisting of an electrically conductive metallic grid, applied to the lamp side of the lens
material.
3.
Provided with a bonding conductor to bond the metallic EMI suppressing grid to the luminaire
housing.
4.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
By luminaire manufacturer.
E.
Overlay Panel – Shall be:
1.
Milk white, translucent acrylic material, nom. 0.040" thick, with a matte finish on the surface away
from the lamp(s).
2.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
By luminaire manufacturer.
F.
Glass Lenses and Diffusers: Annealed crystal glass unless noted otherwise.
G.
Louvers and Baffles:
1.
Cross Baffles:
a.
General – Except as otherwise indicated, cross baffles shall be fabricated from lighting
industry, sheet aluminum alloy material, formed into rectilinear cells, as specified, designed,
fabricated and tested for the purpose of providing optically correct, measurable, and
predictable light distribution results for artificial light source luminaires.
1)
Except as otherwise indicated, rectilinear cell arrangement shall be perpendicular to
the luminaire opening long dimension.
2)
Except as otherwise indicated, cross baffles shall be factory provided with a matte
white acrylic overlay panel, permanently applied to the top (lamp) side of the cross
baffle. Overlay panels that are not permanently secured to the baffle assembly shall
not meet this specification.
3)
Cross baffles shall be specifically designed for field installation into luminaires and
ceiling openings, and shall be designed for end-to-end, continuous length
application, providing an overlap or other suitable means of installation without gaps.
4)
Where luminaire/ceiling grid configurations require cross baffle extension across
inside and outside corner openings, the cross baffle design shall be mitered to follow
the contour of the opening.
5)
Except as otherwise indicated, cross baffle components shall be factory finished in
white powder paint.
6)
Refer to drawings for lengths and configurations required.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 11
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
7)
2.
2.4
Refer to Luminaire Schedule for cross baffle width, height, and on center
dimensions.
b.
Single Blade Cross Baffle – Shall be single thickness, sheet aluminum blades, factory
installed perpendicularly tabbed into slotted aluminum frames.
1)
Slotted perimeter frames (2 per cross baffle assembly) shall be folded sheet
aluminum construction, squared "U" shape, nom. 3/16" return, closed bottom open
top, designed and constructed for field installation along the long dimension of
luminaire or ceiling grid opening.
c.
Bold Cross Baffle – Shall be folded sheet aluminum, squared "U" shape construction, baffle
cells, factory installed, perpendicularly tabbed into a similarly constructed slotted aluminum
frame.
1)
Baffle cell assemblies shall each be folded sheet aluminum construction, squared
"U" shape, nom. 3/16" wide, closed bottom open top, nom. 3/16" thick, of height and
width, and on center dimension as specified in the Luminaire Schedule.
2)
Slotted perimeter frames (2 per cross baffle assembly) shall be designed and
constructed for field installation along the long dimension of luminaire or ceiling grid
opening.
d.
Parabolic Cross Baffle – Shall be fabricated from high grade, lighting industry, sheet
aluminum alloy material, formed into parabolically shaped contoured cells, perpendicularly
factory installed (tabbed) into a slotted frame of similar construction.
1)
If not otherwise indicated, cross baffles shall be provided in a natural aluminum,
semi-specular, clear anodized finish, with a low-iridescent coating factory applied.
2)
Except as otherwise indicated, parabolic type cross baffles shall not be factory or
field equipped with matte white overlay panels.
e.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
By luminaire manufacturer.
2)
A.L.P. Lighting Components, Inc.
3)
American Louver Company.
4)
Louvers International.
5)
Norton Industries, Inc.
6)
SLP Lighting.
Globes and Guards – Shall be provided for protection of luminaires and their interior components.
a.
Globes shall be fabricated of shatterproof, heat and impact resistant materials, formed to
luminaire contours, for integral and secure installation.
b.
Glass globes, diffusers and lenses shall be fabricated from annealed crystal glass, or
tempered glass, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Cast guards shall be of copper free die-cast aluminum construction, formed to luminaire
contours, for integral and secure installation.
d.
Wire guards shall be formed wire, min. 16 AWG, spot welded at crossing intersections, and
factory painted to match luminaire color, or non-painted stainless steel, where so specified.
e.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
By luminaire manufacturer.
Illuminated "EXIT" Luminaires
A.
Shall be factory designed, built, and tested in accordance with UL 924, and with ordinances and codes
applicable in the project locale.
B.
Provide a minimum of two lamps, or light sources (LED), per sign, for illumination. Minimum rated life of
light sources shall be:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 12
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
1.
2.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
LED: 70,000 hours.
C.
Except as otherwise indicated, shall be of the self-contained, AC/DC, integral battery standby operating
type, with LED lamps used for internal illumination in both modes of operation.
1.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance free, nickel-cadmium type.
2.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant current type, with integral, sealed transfer relay.
3.
Low Battery Disconnect: Provide a device and/or related circuitry that shall automatically
disconnect the battery and protect it from deep/over discharge.
4.
Operation: Under "normal" conditions the luminaire is illuminated via its integral lamps, supplied
from the AC voltage source, and the standby battery is in the float charge mode. Upon loss of AC
voltage, or AC voltage falls below 80% of nominal system voltage, the integral transfer relay shall
sense to the abnormal condition and automatically disconnect the luminaire lamps from the
"normal" AC voltage source and transfer their operation to the standby battery voltage DC voltage
source. Upon return of the "normal" AC voltage source, the integral transfer relay shall sense the
return of "normal" AC voltage, and retransfer operation of the lamps back to the "normal" AC
voltage source. The integral battery shall be returned to the charge mode.
5.
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, integral to unit housing. Simulates loss of "normal" AC
voltage, and initiates DC battery standby operation.
6.
AC Pilot Light: LED lamp "ON" indicates normal AC power is connected. Normal pilot lamp
intensity indicates unit is operating in the float charge mode. Bright pilot lamp intensity indicates
unit is operating in the full charge mode.
D.
Except as otherwise indicated, shall be edge-glow red letters on white background.
E.
Integral Self-Diagnostics: Except as otherwise noted, illuminated "EXIT" sign luminaires shall be provided
with integral self-test feature and diagnostics.
1.
Provide integral solid-state electronic circuitry and related components that shall:
a.
Automatically initiate a one minute lamp burn, battery discharge, and internal diagnostic test
at least once every 30 days.
b.
Automatically initiate a 30 minute lamp burn, battery discharge, and internal diagnostic test
once every 6 months.
c.
Comply with the periodic testing requirement of the NEC Article 700, NFPA 110, and the
local authority having jurisdiction.
d.
Provide positive, visual indications of unit malfunctions, during the self-testing routines, and
during "normal" operating conditions.
e.
Constantly monitor the proper operation of the luminaire charger and lamp operation.
2.
In addition to the pre-programmed, self-testing, diagnostic routines, luminaires provided shall
provide for manual testing, providing user controls to initiate luminaire testing.
3.
Equipment malfunctions diagnosed, shall be retained in permanent memory within the solid-state
electronics, until corrected and reset.
F.
Standard Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer of battery powered illuminated "EXIT" signage agrees to repair or replace components of
rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
G.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Refer to Luminaire Schedule.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 13
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
2.5
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
LIGHT SOURCES
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Basis of Design – Products manufactured by the Philips Lighting Company, hereinafter referred to
as Philips, have been specified as the Basis of Design. Products from the following listed
manufacturers may be considered equivalent, providing their product specifications meet or exceed
the Basis of Design specification.
2.
Incandescent Lamps:
a.
GE Lighting.
b.
Osram/Sylvania.
c.
Ushio America, Inc.
3.
Fluorescent Lamps:
a.
GE Lighting.
b.
Osram/Sylvania.
B.
Incandescent Lamps:
1.
General:
a.
Wattage, base, shape, and lamp designations shall be as specified in the Luminaire
Schedule.
b.
Provide lamps suitable, and as required for the particular luminaire.
c.
Except as otherwise indicated, shall be rated 130VAC.
d.
"A Lamp" designations shall be inside frosted.
e.
Reflector "R" lamps shall be energy saving (BR/ER) type, and shall be halogen gas filled
type, for wattages specified. Standard R lamps shall not be provided.
f.
PAR lamps shall be halogen gas PAR (HPAR) type for wattages specified. Standard PAR
lamps shall not be provided.
g.
Multi-faceted, glass front, reflector lamps designated as MRG, shall be enclosed face type,
with a permanently bonded glass lens applied to the face, dichroic coated reflector type,
provided in the distribution pattern as scheduled, and shall be rated for not less than 18,000
hours average life.
C.
Fluorescent Lamps:
1.
General – Except as otherwise noted, requirements apply to the specified linear and compact
fluorescent lamp products.
a.
Shall be designed, fabricated, and tested to comply with the requirements of the Federal
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) criteria, for classification as a nonhazardous waste material.
b.
Shall be fabricated with reduced or low mercury content, and shall yield less than 0.2 mg of
mercury per liter, when tested in accordance with NEMA LL 1.
c.
Phosphor: Except as otherwise noted – RE 8.
d.
Specified lamp life is based on 3 hours ON/OFF time interval.
e.
Unless otherwise specified, lamp correlated color temperature (CCT) shall be 3500K.
2.
Linear Fluorescent Lamps:
a.
F17T8 – 17W, T8, nom. 24" (610mm) long, medium bi-pin base, min. 1350/1280
initial/mean lumens, min. 85 CRI, rated not less than 24,000 hrs. avg. life.
b.
F25T8 – 25W, T8, nom. 36" (915mm) long, medium bi-pin base, min. 2150/2040
initial/mean lumens, min. 85 CRI, rated not less than 24,000 hrs. avg. life.
c.
F32T8 – 32W, T8, nom. 48" (1220mm) long, medium bi-pin base, min. 2950/2800
initial/mean lumens, min. 85 CRI, rated not less than 30,000 hrs. avg. life.
d.
F31T8/1-5/8 – 31W, T8, 1-5/8 in. radius "U" shaped, nom. 22.5" (574mm) long, medium bipin base, min. 2775/2636 initial/mean lumens, min. 85 CRI, rated 24,000 hrs. avg. life.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 14
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
e.
3.
2.6
Referenced Products:
1)
T8 Linear Lamps
Philips 800 Series.
2)
T8 "U" Lamps
Philips 800/Plus Long Life Series.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps:
a.
b.
F26TT: 26 watt, T4, triple tube, 4 pin, GX24Q-3 base, Amalgam type, with integral end of
lamp life protection, rated not less than 1800 initial lumens, minimum 82 CRI, and average
rated life of not less than 16,000.
c.
F32TT: 32 watt, T4, triple tube, 4 pin, GX24Q-3 base, Amalgam type, with integral end of
lamp life protection, rated not less than 2400 initial lumens, minimum 82 CRI, and average
rated life of not less than 16,000.
d.
F42TT: 42 watt, T4, triple tube, 4 pin, GX24Q-4 base, Amalgam type, with integral end of
lamp life protection, rated not less than 3200 initial lumens, minimum 82 CRI, and average
rated life of not less than 16,000.
e.
F57TT: 57 watt, T4, triple tube, 4 pin, GX24Q-5 base, Amalgam type with integral end of
lamp life protection, rated not less than 4300 initial lumens, minimum 82 CRI, and average
rated life of not less than 16,000.
f.
Referenced Products:
1)
2)
F**TT Lamps
Philips PL-T Series.
FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Reference herein, to specific ballast manufacturers and their respective product model or series,
have been included to provide the listed luminaire and ballast manufacturers a guide as to the level
of quality and ballast/lamp performance that shall be met by the supplied ballast products.
a.
Basis of Design Product: The design, performance, and specification criteria for any given
ballast designation is based on those products listed herein as the Referenced Product.
b.
Acceptable Equivalent Manufacturers:
1)
Advance Transformer.
2)
GE Lighting.
3)
Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
4)
Osram/Sylvania.
5)
Universal Lighting Technologies.
B.
General – Ballasts shall:
1.
Be factory provided by the respective luminaire manufacturers, and shall be suitable for their
intended use, to operate the designated lamps listed in the Luminaire Schedule, and as specified
herein, to their full light output unless another ballast factor, dimming style, or bi-level ballast is
indicated.
2.
Separate ballast submittal required as part of the product data submittal package. Refer to Part 1
for submittal requirements.
3.
Be supplied and factory installed, by the respective luminaire manufacturer, suitable for the
luminaire’s respective lamp requirement, physical space restraints, operating environment, etc.
The luminaire manufacturer shall be responsible for supplying the appropriate ballast given the
criteria listed in the Luminaire Schedule, and as specified herein.
4.
Identical luminaires shall be factory supplied with identical ballasts.
5.
Where indicated, provide individual fusing of all 120V ballasts to protect each luminaire from
current overloads and short circuits.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 15
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Be lamp quantity specific. Luminaire manufacturer shall not indiscriminately provide multi-lamp
ballasts to operate single lamp luminaires, or provide 3 or 4 lamp ballasts to operate 2 lamp
luminaires.
a.
Except as otherwise indicated:
1)
Single lamp luminaires shall be factory provided with a single lamp ballast.
2)
Two lamp luminaires shall be factory provided with a single, two lamp ballast.
3)
Three lamp luminaires shall be factory provided with (1) one lamp and (1) two lamp
ballast, factory wired to provide inboard/outboard lamp operation.
4)
Four lamp luminaires shall be factory provided with (2) two lamp ballasts, factory
wired to provide inboard/outboard lamp operation.
5)
Six lamp luminaires shall be factory provided with (3) two lamp ballasts, factory
wired to provide inboard-to-outboard lamp operation.
Where specified, or otherwise indicated may be multi-lamp, tandem wired type, to provide
master/slave style wiring/lamp operation arrangement, to comply with governing energy codes,
legislation and regulation.
a.
Luminaire/ballast manufacturer shall provide, as part of the shop drawing submittal
documentation that the use of singular multi-lamp ballasts in this arrangement utilizes equal,
or less, energy consumption than the use of multiple one or two lamp ballasts.
Be listed and labeled per UL - 935 (2005) - Fluorescent Ballasts, and shall be Class P, Type 1
Outdoor; and Canadian Standards Association (CSA) certified where applicable.
Comply with ANSI C62.41 – Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits, Category A for transient protection.
Comply with ANSI C82.11 where applicable.
Comply with the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and
regulations, Title 47 CFR part 18, Non-Consumer (Class A) for EMI/RFI (conducted and radiated).
Be physically interchangeable with standard electromagnetic and standard electronic ballasts,
where applicable.
Be totally enclosed within a metallic enclosure, and shall be provided with integral leads color
coded per ANSI C82.11, or with poke-in style wire retaining connectors.
C.
Warranty:
1.
Except as otherwise noted, ballast products procured, shall be provided with a five year,
manufactures standard, full replacement, limited warranty against defects in materials or
workmanship, beginning at date of product manufacture.
D.
Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps:
1.
ELEC/T8 – Shall be electronic, solid-state, with the following performance specifications, features,
and requirements:
a.
Shall be a "NEMA Premium" ballasts designed, fabricated and tested to NEMA Standard
Publication BL2-2009 and ANSI C82.2.
b.
Shall be programmed start type, designed, built, and tested for operating linear T8
fluorescent lamps of the various wattages specified.
c.
Shall be parallel connected to lampholders, to provide independent lamp operation,
maintaining full light output to lamps that have not failed.
d.
Shall be provided with auto restart circuitry to allow lamps to restart without interrupting or
resetting power to the ballast.
e.
Ballasts provided shall be multi-voltage (120 thru 277V AC) type, for operation on 60 Hz AC
voltage circuits, and shall allow for sustained variations of +/- 10% nominal system voltage
and frequency, with no damage to the ballast.
f.
Shall be designed to operate various wattage linear fluorescent lamps, within the
manufacturer’s published range.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 16
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
g.
2.
E.
Shall be high frequency electronic type and shall operate their respective lamps at a
frequency above 42 kHz.
h.
Operating Power Factor – Not less than 0.98.
i.
Ballast Factor – Not less than 0.88 (for a 2 lamp, F32T8 lamp/ballast).
j.
Lamp Current Crest Factor – Less than 1.7.
k.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) – 10% or less.
l.
Sound Rating - Class A.
m.
Min. Starting Temperature - 0°F (-18° C) for standard T8 lamps.
1)
Where specified, provide cold temperature ballasts with a minimum starting
temperature of -20° F (-29° C).
n.
Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without
damage.
o.
Referenced Product:
1)
Advance – Optanium Series.
2)
Cold Temperature: Advance – Optanium Instant Start Series.
DIM/T8/0-10V - Shall be electronic, solid-state, 0-10VDC, 4-wire, line & low-voltage, dimming type
ballast, provided with the following performance specifications, features, and requirements:
a.
Shall provide for a continuous dimming range from 100% full light output, to 3% light output
for T8 lamps, and 1% light output for T5 lamps.
b.
Shall be programmed rapid start type, designed, built, and tested for operating linear T8
fluorescent lamps of the various wattages specified.
c.
Shall be factory wired, in parallel, to rapid start style lampholders, with 2 separate wires per
lampholder.
d.
Shall be provided with auto restart circuitry to allow lamps to restart without interrupting or
resetting power to the ballast.
e.
Ballasts provided shall be universal voltage (120/277/VAC), for operation on 60 Hz AC
systems, with an allowable line voltage variation of +/- 10%.
f.
Shall be high frequency electronic type. Designed, built, and tested in conformance with
ANSI C82.11 High Frequency Ballast Standard. Shall operate at a frequency range greater
than 42kHz.
g.
Operating Power Factor – Not less than 0.98, at full light output, and not less than 0.90
throughout the dimming range.
h.
Ballast Factor – Not less than 1.0.
i.
Lamp Current Crest Factor – Less than 1.7 throughout the dimming range.
j.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) – Less than 10%
k.
Sound Rating - Class A
l.
Min. Starting Temperature - 50°F (10° C.).
m.
Shall be designed, built, and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 V,
without impairment, per IEC 801-2, and shall be provided with integral fault protection to
prevent ballast failure due to faulty wiring.
n.
Warranty – 5 year, full replacement, limited warranty. Provide field service commissioning.
o.
Referenced Product
1)
Advance – Mark 7 series.
Electronic Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps:
1.
ELEC/CFL – Shall be electronic, solid-state, with the following performance specifications,
features, and requirements:
a.
Shall be programmed start type, designed, built, and tested for operating the various DT
and TT compact fluorescent lamps specified.
b.
Shall be series or series parallel connected to lampholders, to provide independent lamp
operation, maintaining full light output to lamps that have not failed.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 17
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
c.
2.
2.7
Shall be provided with auto restart circuitry to allow lamps to restart without interrupting or
resetting power to the ballast.
d.
Ballasts provided shall be multi-voltage, (120 thru 277VAC), for operation on 50/60 Hz AC
systems, and shall allow for sustained variations of +/- 10% nominal system voltage and
frequency, with no damage to the ballast.
e.
Shall be high frequency electronic type and shall operate their respective lamps at a
frequency above 42 kHz.
f.
Operating Power Factor – Not less than 0.98.
g.
Ballast Factor – Not less than 0.95 for any 2 lamp CFL lamp/ballast combinations.
h.
Lamp Current Crest Factor – Less than 1.7.
i.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) – 10% or less.
j.
Sound Rating - Class A.
k.
Min. Starting Temperature - 0°F (-18C°).
l.
Shall be provided with integral End-Of-Life circuitry to automatically disconnect lamp from
ballast, at lamp end of life.
m.
Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without
damage.
n.
Referenced Product:
1)
Advance – SmartMate Series.
DIM/CFL/0-10V - Shall be electronic, solid-state, 0-10VDC, 4-wire, line & low-voltage, dimming
type ballast, provided with the following performance specifications, features, and requirements:
a.
Shall provide for a continuous dimming range from 100% full light output, to 3% light output
for CFL/HL lamps.
b.
Shall be programmed rapid start type, designed, built, and tested for operating CFL/HL
fluorescent lamps of the various wattages specified.
c.
Shall be factory wired, in parallel, to rapid start style lampholders.
d.
Shall be provided with auto restart circuitry to allow lamps to restart without interrupting or
resetting power to the ballast.
e.
Ballasts provided shall be universal voltage (120-277 VAC), for operation on 60 Hz AC
systems, with an allowable line voltage variation of +/- 10%.
f.
Shall be high frequency electronic type. Designed, built, and tested in conformance with
ANSI C82.11 High Frequency Ballast Standard. Shall operate at a frequency range greater
than 42kHz.
g.
Operating Power Factor – Not less than 0.98, at full light output, and not less than 0.90
throughout the dimming range.
h.
Ballast Factor – Not less than 0.90.
i.
Lamp Current Crest Factor – Less than 1.7 throughout the dimming range.
j.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) – Less than 10%
k.
Sound Rating - Class A
l.
Min. Starting Temperature - 50°F (10°C).
m.
Shall be designed, built, and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 V,
without impairment, per IEC 801-2, and shall be provided with integral fault protection to
prevent ballast failure due to faulty wiring.
n.
Warranty – 5 year, full replacement, limited warranty. Provide field service commissioning.
o.
Referenced Product:
1)
Advance – Mark 7 Series.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING PRODUCTS
A.
Self-Contained, Standby/Emergency Lighting Luminaires:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 18
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
1.
2.
3.
B.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Description: Shall be self-contained, standby/emergency lighting luminaires complying with UL
924, and provided with the following features and functions:
a.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance free, nickel-cadmium type, factory installed integral to the
luminaire housing.
b.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type, with sealed transfer relay.
c.
Operation: Under "normal" operating conditions, the luminaires lamps are not illuminated,
and the integral battery is in the charge mode. Upon loss of AC voltage, or AC voltage falls
below 80% of nominal system voltage, the integral transfer relay shall sense the abnormal
condition, and automatically apply integral battery standby/emergency power to illuminate
the luminaires lamps. Upon return of "normal" AC power, the integral transfer relay shall
sense the return of "normal" AC voltage, and shall automatically disconnect battery power
from the luminaires lamps, and the battery shall be returned to the charge mode.
d.
Test Push Button: Shall be push-to-test, integral to the luminaire housing. Shall simulate
loss of "normal" AC power, and initiates DC battery standby operation.
e.
Integral Self-Test: Except as noted, provide with integral self-test feature and diagnostics.
Provide the following:
1)
Luminaires shall be provided with integral solid-state electronic circuitry and related
components that shall:
a)
Automatically initiate a one minute lamp burn, battery discharge, and internal
diagnostic test once every 30 days.
b)
Automatically initiate a 30 minute lamp burn, battery discharge, and internal
diagnostic test once every 6 months.
c)
Comply with the periodic testing requirement of the NEC Article 700, NFPA
110, and the local authority having jurisdiction.
d)
Provide positive, visual indications of unit malfunctions, during the self-testing
routines, and during "normal" operating conditions.
e)
Constantly monitor the proper operation of the luminaire charger and lamp
operation.
2)
In addition to the pre-programmed, self-testing, diagnostic routines, luminaires
provided shall provide for manual testing, providing user controls to initiate luminaire
testing.
3)
Equipment malfunctions diagnosed, shall be retained in permanent memory within
the solid-state electronics, until corrected and reset.
f.
Provide a retransfer to "normal" time delay feature that shall continue to operate the
luminaire lamps for not less than 15 minutes, after "normal" power has returned.
g.
Protection: Heavy gauge, chrome-plated or painted steel wrap around cage to protect
entire unit.
Warranty: Contractor shall provide a full, no cost, replacement warranty during their contracted
guarantee period. After the contractors guarantee period, the equipment manufacturer shall
provide a pro-rated reduced cost warranty for not less than 4 years.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
Refer to Luminaire Schedule.
EMERG/FL Standby/Emergency Lighting Devices for Fluorescent Luminaires:
1.
Where indicated, provide single, self-contained emergency lighting devices designed for installation
within, or remote from, a given luminaire.
2.
Shall be provided with the following performance specifications, features, and requirements:
a.
Integral Battery - Field replaceable, maintenance free, nickel cadmium type.
b.
Charger – Integral to housing, solid-state type, designed, built, and tested to recharge a fully
discharged battery in not more than 24 hours.
c.
AC voltage sensing circuitry and transfer relay.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 19
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
d.
Test switch and pilot light.
Shall be UL listed for factory or field retrofit, in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard
924 – Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.
Shall be designed, built, and tested for dual input voltage compatibility – 120/277VAC, 60 Hz.
Devices, intended (by design), designated, or otherwise indicated to be installed remote from
luminaire housings, shall be factory supplied by the respective luminaire manufacturer, with listed
and approved enclosures, and shall be provided with instructions for field installation, by the
Contractor.
Operation: Those luminaires specified, and provided with additional standby/emergency lighting
devices shall:
a.
Under "normal" operating conditions, allow the lamps in a given luminaire to be operated
and controlled via the luminaires normal ballast(s), and the standby/emergency device
battery shall be float charged.
b.
Under a "power fail" mode – The integral voltage sensing circuit shall sense the loss of
"normal" AC voltage, and automatically transfer operation of one fluorescent lamp to the
standby/emergency lighting device, and illuminate the lamp(s) to the specified lumen output,
for not less than 90 min.
c.
Upon resumption of "normal" AC voltage, the integral voltage sensing circuit shall sense the
return of "normal" AC voltage, and the transfer relay shall automatically re-transfer
operation and control of the designated lamp(s) back to the luminaire’s normal ballast. The
standby/emergency lighting device shall automatically revert back to the battery charge
mode.
Lumen output in the standby/emergency lighting mode of operation, for the following linear, and
compact fluorescent (CFL) lamps, shall be not less than:
9.
11.
13.
15.
17.
19.
21.
22.
Lamp
Designation
F32/T8
F32/TT CLF
F42/TT CFL
10.
12.
Total Lumens
14.
16.
18.
20.
1350
700
1000
a.
Device components, except the test switch (when specified to be remote mounted), shall be selfcontained within a metal, "F" can shaped enclosure, designed for installation within a fluorescent
luminaire ballast compartment.
a.
Where indicated, shown, or otherwise required, provide low profile enclosures and unit
components, for installation into extremely shallow luminaires.
b.
Devices that are indicated to be installed remote from the luminaire, may require an
additional enclosure that shall be contractor or device manufacturer supplied.
"Push-To-Test" switch and AC Pilot/Charging indicating pilot light shall be provided.
a.
For luminaires scheduled, specified, or otherwise indicated with remote test stations, the
test switch and pilot light shall be factory assembled on a standard, single gang, white
coverplate, designed for installation over a single gang electric box opening.
b.
Where remote test switches and their locations are not specifically shown, or otherwise
indicated, a test switch/pilot light assembly shall be either factory installed, or field installed
on the luminaire ballast compartment cover.
c.
The contractor shall provide wiring between the remote test switch station locations and the
standby/emergency lighting ballasts.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 20
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
23.
24.
25.
2.8
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Integral Self-Test: Standby/emergency fluorescent lighting ballasts shall be integral self-test type,
provided with the following:
a.
Shall be provided with integral solid-state electronic circuitry and related components that
shall:
1)
Automatically initiate a one minute lamp burn, battery discharge, and internal
diagnostic test at least once every 30 days.
2)
Automatically initiate a 30 minute lamp burn, battery discharge, and internal
diagnostic test once every 6 months.
3)
Comply with the periodic testing requirement of the NEC Article 700, NFPA 110, and
the local authority having jurisdiction.
4)
Provide positive, audible and visual indications of unit malfunctions, during the selftesting routines, and during "normal" operating conditions.
5)
Constantly monitor the proper operation of the luminaire charger and lamp
operation.
b.
In addition to the pre-programmed, self-testing, diagnostic routines, ballasts provided with a
separate, "Push-to-Test" station, designed for remote installation, to allow for manual
testing.
c.
Equipment malfunctions diagnosed, shall be retained in permanent memory within the solidstate electronics, until corrected and reset.
Warranty:
a.
Provide a standard manufacturer's warranty against defects in workmanship or materials,
for not less than five (5) years after installation.
Referenced Products:
a.
T8 linear lamps
The Bodine Company – B50ST Series.
b.
CFL lamps
c.
Acceptable Equivalent Manufacturers: Dual-Lite, Iota, or Side-Lite.
d.
Provide separate product literature documentation for approval, as part of the product data
submittal package.
LIGHTING TRANSFORMERS
A.
Fixture-mounted 120 Volt Secondary Transformers: Provide primary fusing and disconnect for each
transformer.
B.
Fixture-mounted Low Voltage Transformers: Provide NFPA 70 Class 2 transformers that are energylimited to 100VA maximum.
2.9
LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angleiron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B.
Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as luminaire.
C.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as luminaire.
D.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 21
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
E.
Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12
gage (2.68 mm).
F.
Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
G.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire and line voltage and equipped with threaded
attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
2.10
A.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Above and beyond the quantities of material required to execute the contract, provide the following extra
materials:
1.
Spare Luminaires:
a.
Type F1 – Qty 5%.
b.
Type F5 – Qty 5%.
c.
Type F14 – Qty 3%.
2.
Spare Lamps:
a.
Fluorescent:
1)
F32/T8
One case of 36.
2)
F32/TT
One case of 10.
3.
Spare Ballasts:
a.
Fluorescent:
1)
ELEC/T8
Six of 32W.
2)
DIM/T5/T8/
Two of 32W.
3)
ELEC/CFL
Six of 32CFL and Two (2) of 57W.
4)
DIM/CFL
Two of 32W .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Refer to the Luminaire Schedule for additional installation information.
B.
Refer to the contract drawings for quantities and intended locations of luminaires.
C.
Provide for the coordination of ceiling material/luminaire construction and installation, coordination with the
work of this Division, and the work of other Divisions.
D.
Coordinate lamping, ballast, and control system requirements with the respective luminaire manufacturers
and suppliers, prior to procurement, to provide the specified performance.
E.
Coordinate the installation of the various interior lighting system components with field construction. Verify
that the various luminaires provided are compatible and coordinate with the various ceiling types,
materials, and their construction restraints.
F.
Refer to the contract documents and coordinate the installation of interior lighting equipment with respect
to luminaire quantities, luminaire construction with respect to their installation into a particular surface or
material, luminaire quantities, etc.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 22
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
G.
3.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Be responsible for continuous row quantities and lengths. Provide field dimensions to the luminaire
manufacture, for luminaires specified and designed for continuous, wall-to-wall installation.
INSTALLATION – LUMINAIRES
A.
Install luminaires and their related accessories at locations and heights, as shown on Drawings, in
accordance with the respective luminaire manufacturer’s instructions, and the applicable requirements of
the NEC, NECA’s "Standard of Installation," NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices.
B.
Provide luminaires and their associated outlet boxes, with hangers, supports, fasteners etc., to properly
support their weight. Refer to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Submit
design of hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or specified herein, for review by the
Architect.
C.
Except for luminaires designed to be installed and secured directly to their associated outlet box only,
luminaires shall be independently supported and fastened to/from the building structure and not to the
work of any other construction trade.
D.
Provide luminaires of the same type indicated, in any given room or space, except as otherwise indicated.
E.
Provide, for luminaires not factory pre-wired to integral outlet box, an outlet box, installed not less than 12"
from the luminaire wiring terminals, with not more than 72" of tap conductor length, installed in accordance
with NEC Article 410, between the outlet box and the luminaire wiring terminals.
F.
Luminaire Arrangements:
1.
General:
a.
Install plumb, square, and true to building construction. Where indicated by dimension, or
shown on the Drawings, maintain indicated arrangement.
2.
Flush/Recessed:
a.
Roughed In a concealed wiring method, with concealed outlet box(s), backbox(s) installed
flush to the face of their respective wall, floor, or ceiling material.
3.
Surface:
a.
Roughed in a concealed wiring method with concealed outlet box(s), installed flush to the
surface of their respective wall, floor, or ceiling material.
4.
Exposed:
a.
Install utilizing an exposed wiring method, roughed to either exposed electrical outlet box(s),
or roughed directly into the exposed luminaire.
b.
Installed directly over said outlet box(s), or wired directly to the exposed wiring method, and
shall be securely fastened to building surfaces or appurtenances, plumb, square, and true
to building construction.
5.
Lamp Orientation:
a.
Install lamps such that, in any given space, all lamps orient in the same direction. Verify
lamp orientation with Architect.
G.
Emergency Lighting Products Installation:
1.
Unless noted, shown, or otherwise indicated, refer to manufacturers published instructions for field
installation directions.
2.
Luminaires provided for "EXIT" and other directional signage, shall be connected unswitched to
their designated branch circuit wiring.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 23
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Unless noted or shown otherwise, luminaires provided for emergency lighting purposes shall be
connected unswitched to their designated branch circuit wiring.
a.
Provide on unswitched branch circuit conductor, for voltage sensing to emergency lighting
devices that are controlled by other equipment and devices.
Unless noted or shown otherwise, EMERG/FL and ELBD’s shall be factory installed within, or
integral to luminaire housings as the preferred installation method. Installation of these products
remote from a given luminaire’s housing may be provided, if:
a.
Authorized and permitted by the Architect.
b.
Installation is performed per equipment manufacturer’s direction.
c.
Allowed by the authority having jurisdiction.
d.
Installation complies with the equipment’s listing and labeling requirements.
e.
Installation within, or integral to, a given luminaire’s housing is not possible or practical.
ELBD’s shown, noted, or otherwise indicated to be installed remote from their associated
emergency lighting luminaires, shall be installed in readily accessible locations, allowing devices to
be serviced, maintained, and tested.
Install remote test/pilot light component within direct viewing field of luminaires equipped with
EMERG/FL devices, and within the maximum distance limitation stated in the manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
a.
Verify exact locations with Architect, prior to roughing.
b.
Unless otherwise specifically noted or indicated, remote test/pilot light devices shall be
installed flush to wall or ceiling construction, utilizing concealed construction means and
methods.
Emergency Lighting ID: Provide a means of permanently identifying luminaires connected to NEC
517, 700, 701 or 702 lighting branch circuit.
a.
The means shall be an obvious, physical, unique ID marker, red in color, of a size and
shape that is readably identifiable from floor level.
b.
The means shall be permanently applied to the luminaire housing (only in utilitarian,
industrial spaces) or to the ceiling or wall construction, immediately adjacent to the
luminaire location.
c.
Verify exact ID locations with architect prior to installing in architecturally significant spaces.
d.
Luminaires with AC pilot light and test stations installed integral to the luminaire housings
shall not require additional ID.
e.
Luminaires with remote AC pilot light and test stations installed immediately adjacent to, or
in close proximity to the luminaire housing, shall not require additional ID.
Flush/Recessed Luminaire Installation:
1.
Verify construction of wall, floor, or ceiling, and its finished surface material, prior to luminaire
installation.
2.
Provide luminaires complete with factory supplied plaster flanges, frames, etc., to facilitate the
installation of recessed luminaires in wet plaster and drywall type ceilings.
3.
Provide, in concert with the luminaire manufacturers, the required installation hardware, mounting
clips, rails, hangers, and related luminaire accessories, to facilitate flush luminaire installations.
4.
Provide gaskets, flanges, etc., to prevent "light leaks" around luminaires.
5.
Provide field or factory supplied T-bar suspension bars, rails, etc., and hold down clips or devices,
designed for compliance with NEC Article 410.
6.
Provide, for geometrically shaped (1X4, 2X4, 2X2, etc.) luminaires, installed in accessible grid
ceiling type construction, inverted "Y" style chains, hanger wires, or other listed, labeled and
approved supporting device(s), to independently support each luminaire from not less than two
points. Each such support shall be attached and secured to the building structure (not to ceiling
grid or the work of any other trade), and shall have a breaking strength of not less than the weight
of the luminaire, with a safety factor of 3.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 24
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
7.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Provide, for point source and compact fluorescent style luminaires installed in accessible ceiling
type construction, inverted "Y" style chains, hanger wires, or other listed, labeled and approved
supporting devices, to independently support each luminaire from not less than two points. Each
such support shall be fastened and secured to the building structure (not to ceiling grid or the work
of any other trade), and shall have a breaking strength of not less than the weight of the luminaire,
with a safety factor of 3.
I.
Stem/Pendent Style Luminaire Installation:
1.
Provide hang-straight, swivel style canopies for stem/pendent hung luminaires, such that the
luminaires hang plumb and level (unless otherwise indicated). Security attach outlet box feed
points and intermediate supports to the building structure, to support not less than twice the weight
of the suspended luminaire.
2.
Outlet boxes and electrical feed points shall be installed above the luminaire(s) with branch circuit
wiring/cord drop(s) extended down to luminaire housing concealed inside rigid raceway pendants;
or exposed, attached to, and following length of cable suspension points.
3.
Coordinate feed point and intermediate support canopy locations with the Architect, prior to
roughing. In general, canopy locations shall be either centered at a grid intersection, or centered
within a ceiling tile. Verify exact locations with Architect prior to roughing.
4.
Install canopies, and their associated electric work, provided for continuous row luminaire
applications in straight, rows, with no discernable deflections.
5.
Provide stems and pendents, by the luminaire manufacturer, in quantities as recommended by the
luminaire manufacturer, to provide a straight, level, installation, with no discernable luminaire
deflection.
6.
Provide individual stem/pendent mounted luminaires with not less than 2 stems or pendents per
luminaire.
J.
Surface Installation:
1.
Install tight to surface without distorting surface or luminaire. Supports shall be provided on 4 foot
centers max., with a minimum of two hangers per individual four foot luminaire and three hangers
per individual eight foot luminaires.
2.
Space luminaires in continuous rows to correspond to ceiling joint intersections. Continuous row
luminaires may be fed from a single outlet where luminaires are listed as approved wireways and
suitable wiring is used.
3.
Provide hangers for each luminaire, each rated to support not less than four times the luminaire
weight.
4.
Provide offset or trapeze hangers where required. Hangers shall be securely attached to the
building structure and independently supported from ceiling system or other building
appurtenances.
5.
Provide factory supplied surface luminaire collar where outlet box serving luminaire cannot be (or is
not) roughed flush to face of installation surface.
a.
If collar assembly is not available from luminaire manufacturer, contractor shall fabricate
same, or shall have collar fabricated by others.
b.
Surface collar shall match luminaire’s attachment points and raceway entries into and out of
collar/outlet box.
c.
Limit collar depth to depth of outlet box or raceway size servicing luminaire.Seismic
Supporting Requirements For Luminaires:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 25
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
3.6
Except as otherwise noted, seismic supporting means and devices shall not be attached or supported
from ceiling system members. Seismic supporting means shall be attached directly to the building structure.
3.7
Provide a flexible wiring method connection to luminaires. Except for pendent mounted luminaires, installed in exposed construction, rigid raceway connections to luminaires shall not be provided.
3.8
Luminaire Installations in Suspended Ceilings:
3.9
Provide an installation conforming to the prescriptive requirements of ASTM E 580/E 580M (current edition) - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions.
3.10
Positively secure luminaires to suspended ceiling system components with listed and approved devices
that mechanically clamp the luminaires to the suspended ceiling system components.
3.11
Provide not less than two mechanical clamping devices per luminaire. Geometrically shaped luminaires
(1X4’s, 2X2’s, 2X4’s, etc.) designed for installation within suspended ceiling systems shall be provided
with four mechanical clamping devices per luminaire (one installed at each corner intersection with the
suspended ceiling system).
3.12
Clamping devices shall be attached to the suspended ceiling system with screw type fasteners.
3.13
Provide, in addition to luminaire clamping style devices, separate, independent, suspension means designed to support 100% of the luminaire weight.
3.14
Suspension means shall be flexible, and independently attached to building structure above ceiling.
3.15
Provide not less than two suspension attachments per luminaire. Geometrically shaped luminaires (1x4’s,
2x2’s, 2x4’s, etc.) designed for installation within suspended ceiling systems shall be provided with not
less than two inverted "Y" style suspension means per luminaire, with four attachment points to the luminaire housing, or, four separate suspension means, each attached to the luminaire housing.
3.16
The suspension means shall be attached to the luminaires at their factory designated attachment points.
3.17
Surface Mounted Luminaire Installations:
3.18
Exposed Construction - No Ceiling:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 26
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
3.19
Fasten luminaire directly to building structure. Provide flexible wiring method connection to luminaire, from
adjacent electrical outlet box.
3.20
Except for locations where outlet box(s) have been "poured in place", do not attach or support luminaires
directly over electrical outlet box(s). Provide additional support to the building structure above and beyond
outlet box support.
3.21
Surface Mounted to Suspended Grid or Drywall Ceiling System:
3.22
Fasten luminaire to ceiling system support with positive clamping style device that completely surround the
ceiling supporting member.
3.23
Provide, in addition to clamping style devices, separate suspension means designed to support 100% of
the luminaire weight.
3.24
Separate suspension means shall be flexible wire, cable, or chain, independently attached to building
structure above ceiling.
3.25
Provide not less than two suspension means per luminaire, attached to the factory designated location(s)
on the luminaire.
3.26
Pendant Hung Luminaire Installation:
3.27
Support luminaires directly from building structure. Pendant hunt luminaires installed in suspended ceiling
locations, shall not be supported from any suspended ceiling system element.
3.28
Provide "hang-straight", swivel style, canopies at electrical outlet feed points and intermediate suspension
points.
3.29
Electrical outlet boxes and intermediate suspension point boxes and devices shall be independently supported from the building structure above, and designed to support 100% of the luminaire weight.
3.30
Provide, in addition to the electrical outlet box and intermediate suspension point supports, brace wires or
cables securely attached to the luminaire, and to the structure above.
3.31
Brace wires or cables shall be no less than #9 AWG wire, or approved alternate support.
3.32
The number of brace points required shall be determined by the authority having jurisdiction, but in no
case shall the number of points be less than two per luminaire.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 27
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
3.33
Except for the individual pendant hangers themselves, a rigid type of raceway system shall not be used to
feed pendent hung luminaires installed below suspended ceiling systems.
3.34
Pendant hung luminaires installed exposed may be supported from their electrical outlet box feed points
and intermediate suspension points, provided the outlet boxes and intermediate suspension point devices
are securely attached to the building structure, and are designed to support 100% of luminaire weight.
3.35
A rigid raceway installation may be allowed for the connection of exposed pendant hung luminaires provided the rigid raceway is secured tight to the building structure.
3.36
Provide, in addition to the electrical outlet box and intermediate suspension point supports, brace wires or
cables securely attached to the luminaire and structure above.
3.37
Brace wires or cables shall be no less than #9 AWG wire, or approved alternate support.
3.38
The number of brace points required shall be determined by the authority having jurisdiction, but in no
case shall the number of points be less than two per luminaire.
K.
Relocated Luminaires:
1.
Refer to Division 26 Section "Selective Removals, Relocations, and Rearrangements," for
additional relocated luminaire requirements.
2.
Remove luminaires from existing locations and store as for new luminaires. Reinstall as shown on
Drawings. Before reinstalling, luminaires shall be cleaned, provided with new lamps and ballasts
and repaired. The following shall be performed:
a.
Replace ballast.
b.
Replace broken, damaged, worn or faulty lamp sockets.
c.
Provide new luminaire wire.
d.
Replace lenses.
e.
Provide new lamps.
f.
Completely damp clean lens and interior.
g.
Mount as required for new luminaires.
L.
Fasten luminaires securely to supports provided.
M.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening
torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.
N.
Provide complete electrical connection(s) to luminaires furnished and installed under other Divisions, such
as:
1.
Film Illuminators:
a.
Recessed units shall be direct connected.
b.
Provide a duplex receptacle, under right hand corner of surface mounted units, as indicated
on Drawings.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 28
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
O.
3.3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Provide complete electrical connection(s) to luminaires furnished under other Divisions, such as:
1.
Surgical luminaires
2.
Under cabinet and under counter luminaires.
a.
Connect through remote switch control, as shown on Drawings. Connect multiple units to
common switch control. Coordinate number of luminaires per cabinet or counter length with
other Divisions.
3.
Exam lights.
LIGHT SOURCES
A.
Install lamps in luminaires. Lamps shall be new and unused.
B.
Operate luminaires connected to fluorescent dimming systems and components, at full light output, for not
less than 100 hours continuously, prior to commissioning the fluorescent dimming system.
C.
If permanent lighting system is used for temporary construction lighting, lamps shall be replaced upon turn
over to Owner.
D.
Replace lamps that have failed in temporary luminaires provided for lighting during construction.
E.
Replace lamps that have failed in permanently installed luminaires that have been allowed to be used for
lighting during construction.
F.
Replace lamps that have failed within their published warranty period, if so stated, or within their published
average life span, during the Contractor’s warranty period.
G.
Batch replace HID lamps whose color consistency (in the opinion of the Architect or Owner) varies from
lamp to lamp. If such color in consistency exists, replace all lamps within a given room or space to the
Architect’s or Owner’s satisfaction.
H.
Provide, to the Owner, lamp replacement warranty information for their use in resolving lamp replacement
issued with the lamp manufacturers.
3.4
BALLASTS
A.
Factory install into their respective luminaires, unless otherwise specified. Where remote installation is
required (i.e. standby/emergency ballasts), install per the ballast manufacturer and luminaire
manufacturer’s instruction.
B.
Provide multiple-lamp ballasts, where indicated, and field connect in a master/slave arrangement, to
comply with governing energy codes and regulations, and for the separate control of inboard and outboard
lamps.
C.
Install remote luminaire ballasts as recommended by associated luminaire and ballast manufacturers.
Provide enclosure, either factory furnished or contractor supplied, for each remote ballast and install
ballast within maximum distance from luminaire as per their recommendations, NEC requirements, and to
assure maintenance access.
D.
Provide identical luminaires with identical ballasts.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 29
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
E.
Replace ballasts which produce an excessive noise (hum) level or lamp flickering.
F.
Verify that ballasts are labeled with month, year of installation (for warranty purposes).
3.5
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A.
3.6
Provide for the services of a duly authorized factory representative of the Digital Lighting Control
Equipment manufacturer, for not less than 16 on-site hours to perform not less than the following tasks:
1.
Meet with the Owner’s representative(s) and the contractor(s) responsible for the installation of the
lighting equipment and the Digital Lighting Control Equipment for the purposes of:
a.
Verify exact locations of the Digital Lighting Controls Equipment.
b.
Verify delivery of the components required to make the system operational and review
installation requirements of the control equipment and devices.
c.
Review wiring requirements and component installation procedures with the contractor(s).
2.
Upon completion of system wiring and component installation:
a.
Verify that the components are installed and wired per manufacturer’s requirements and
instructions.
b.
Verify with Owner’s representative, the Owner’s desired control schemes and hours of
operation. Provide for not less than 4 schemes, scenes and/or shows.
c.
Program the installed system components to implement the Owner’s desired control
schemes, scenes and shows and hours of operation.
d.
Train the Owner’s personnel in how to operate and change system settings and how to
maintain the installed equipment.
e.
Turn over Operations and Maintenance materials to the Owner’s representative.
LENSES, DIFFUSERS, LOUVERS AND LAMP SHIELDING MEDIA
A.
Install specified products for luminaires.
B.
Clean lighting equipment and luminaires of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation.
Clean fingerprints, smudges, wrapping, etc., from lenses, baffles, louvers, reflectors, etc.
C.
Protect installed luminaires from damage during remainder of construction activity. Replace lenses,
baffles, louvers, reflectors, etc., damaged or broken prior to, during, or after installation.
3.7
ADJUSTMENTS AND RELOCATIONS
A.
Provide for field directed adjustments to lighting equipment, luminaires, etc., and their previously installed
roughing, as follows, under contract:
1.
It is intended that field directed adjustments be limited to relocation of lighting equipment,
luminaires, etc., to directed locations within 10 ft. of their presently installed location.
2.
Provide for not less than 24 hours of workman’s time to disconnect, remove, relocate and reconnect lighting equipment, luminaires, etc., presently installed, to new location(s) directed.
3.
Provide for required tools, equipment, ladders, scaffolding, etc., to facilitate the directed
adjustments.
4.
Provide for the electrical construction work, means and methods required to disconnect, remove,
relocate and re-connect lighting equipment, luminaires, etc.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 30
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
B.
Provide, after the lighting installation is substantially complete, preliminary aiming of adjustable luminaires.
Provide preliminary control settings for luminaires. Verify that luminaires are fully operational.
1.
After the lighting installation is complete, provide two (2) electricians, tools, and equipment, for not
less than 16 hours total, to access and adjust luminaires with Architect and Lighting Designer after
dark. Schedule through appropriate correspondence channels.
C.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested, within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide
on-site assistance in adjusting amiable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide for not less
than two visits to Project site, at other-than-normal occupancy hours, for this purpose. Some of this work
may be required after dark.
1.
Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect and Lighting Designer.
3.8
BONDING
A.
3.9
Provide bonding of all luminaires and their associated controls, to the equipment ground system. Tighten
connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std. 486A to provide a permanent and
effective bonding path to ground.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.10
Apply electrical energy to luminaires, upon completion of their installation, and after building circuitry has
been energized to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with
new units, and proceed with retesting.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspections and Tests:
1.
Perform inspection and test procedures as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections
and Testing", and the following additional requirements:
a.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
B.
Standby/Emergency Lighting Luminaires:
1.
Interrupt the normal power source to demonstrate proper luminaire operation after units have been
installed and building circuits have been energized under normal power source.
2.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and proceed with retesting.
3.
Give the Architect advance notice of dates and time for field tests.
4.
Provide instruments as required to make positive observation of test results. Include the following
in tests:
a.
Duration of supply.
b.
Low battery voltage shutdown.
c.
Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
d.
Low supply voltage transfer.
e.
Insulation Resistance Test: Perform as specified in Division 26 Section "Low Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables," both before and after connection of luminaires
and equipment.
f.
Electrical Continuity Tests: Perform as specified in Division 26 Section "Low Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 31
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.00
C.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
Prepare, and deliver to the Architect, at substantial completion, a written report of all conducted tests,
inspections, observations, and verifications, indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to
the previously tested installation, retest to demonstrate compliance with the project requirements or
indicated standards.
STARTUP SERVICE
Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner.
Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full
voltage.
DISPOSAL OF REMOVED LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Refer to Division 26 Section "Selective Removals, Relocations, and Rearrangements" for requirements.
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00 - 32
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes specifications and design criteria for the following:
1.
Exterior luminaires and their associated lamps, ballasts and accessories.
2.
Photoelectric controls integral to luminaires.
3.
Poles, luminaire support structures and their associated accessories.
4.
Luminaire lowering devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
B.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
C.
Luminaire: A complete lighting assembly or product consisting of not less than a light source(s) and
related devices to position the light source(s), housing or enclosure, light source control and optics and
light source power supply control device(s).
D.
NRTL: Nationally recognized testing laboratory.
E.
Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower for large area illumination.
F.
Solid State Lighting/Luminaires: Light sources and their associated luminaires that produce light (radiant
energy) without the use of electrical filaments, excited gas or plasma, such as LED, OLED, or PLED.
G.
Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.
H.
TGIC – Triglycidyl Isocyanurate polyester powder type paint finish.
1.3
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION
A.
Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting
structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.
B.
Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf (2224 N), distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.
C.
Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft. (143.6 Pa), applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.
D.
Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01 Specification
Sections and Division 26 Section "Basic Division 26 Requirements."
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
1.5
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide for each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of Luminaire
Schedule designation. Include data relating to features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.
Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and
verification of indicated parameters.
2.
Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.
3.
Details of installation and construction.
4.
Luminaire finish and color information.
5.
Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps,
ballasts, and accessories.
a.
Photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric
data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.
b.
Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation
under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting
Products.
6.
Photoelectric control relays.
7.
Ballasts, Power Supplies and Drivers: Provide separate data sheet, per luminaire tag, proving
specification and design criteria written herein.
8.
Lamps: Provide separate data sheet, per luminaire tag, providing specification and design criteria
written herein.
9.
Pole and/or support structure data: Provide separate data sheet, per luminaire tag, indicating
material(s), dimensions, finishes, accessories, etc. proving specification and design criteria written
herein.
10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for
components involved.
11. Pole and support structure anchor bolt information.
12. Pre-manufactured pole foundation information.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Anchor bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
2.
Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of screw
foundations and soil conditions on which they are based.
3.
Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring.
C.
Luminaire Samples for Verification: For specific products designated for sample submission in Luminaire
Schedule, or herein, provide a fully functional, operating sample with not less than the following:
1.
Lamp(s): As specified, install in sample luminaire.
2.
Cord and Plug: Wired to luminaire junction box or ballast.
3.
120 VAC ballast (for ballasted luminaires).
4.
Delivered with the specified finish/color applied, or submitted with a finish and color sample for
evaluation.
D.
Finish and Color Samples for Verification: Where designated in the Luminaire Schedule, or herein,
provided the following:
1.
A factory supplied 3” x 5” sample of the specified finish and color, applied on the specified material.
E.
Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are
designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4 and that load imposed by luminaire has been
included in design.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
F.
1.6
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
LEED Credit Applicability: Provide compliance data.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for luminaires.
B.
Field quality control test reports.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
B.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories
that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient
Lighting Products.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections and Testing” for field inspections and
testing requirements related to this Section including:
1.
Electrical Acceptance Testing Responsibilities
2.
General Electrical Field Quality Control
3.
Testing Agency Qualifications
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
B.
Store poles on decay resistant treated skids at least 12 inches (300 mm) above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C.
Handle poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole surface more
than 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed below ground line.
D.
Retain factory applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before pole
installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
E.
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
Retain factory applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with
nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk
due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude
lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special
warranty coverage.
1.
Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.
Warranty Period for Luminaire Metal Corrosion: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
3.
Warranty Period for Luminaire Color Retention: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
4.
Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from date of
Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months
from date of Substantial Completion.
5.
Warranty Period for Poles and Support Structures: Repair or replace poles and standards that fail
in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less
than three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Lamps: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
2.
Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating
installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3.
Ballasts: 1 for every 50 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
4.
Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers listed in
the Luminaire Schedule.
B.
Basis of Design Product: The design of each luminaire and its support is based on the descriptions,
product features and specifications included in the Luminaire Schedule. Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by the other manufacturers
scheduled.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.
C.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D.
Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support
to prevent warping and sagging.
E.
Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use.
Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating
conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames,
lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in
operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect
ballast when door opens.
G.
Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H.
Non Metallic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and
UV radiation.
I.
Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to
indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2.
Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K.
Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat and aging resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses
and refractors in luminaire doors.
L.
Luminaire Finish: Except as otherwise noted or specified, manufacturer's standard paint finish applied to
factory assembled and tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, provide finish process and
color specified.
M.
Factory Applied Painted Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove
dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish
surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel,
complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2.
Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's factory painted finish consisting of one or more coats of primer
and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a.
b.
Color: Refer to Luminaire Schedule.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
N.
2.3
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
Factory Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2.
Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with
AA-M20, over finished surface. Seal surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.
3.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish:
etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker)
complying with AAMA 611.
4.
Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical
Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or
electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
5.
Manufacturer’s factory painted finish, consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats
of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a.
Color: Refer to Luminaire Schedule.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
2.4
Refer to Division 26 Section “Interior Lighting” for fluorescent lamp specifications.
FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Reference herein, to specific ballast manufacturers and their respective product, model, or series,
have been included to provide the listed luminaire and ballast manufacturers a guide as to the level
of ballast/lamp performance that shall be met by the supplied ballast products.
a.
Basis of Design Product: The design, performance and specification criteria for any given
ballast designation is based on those products listed herein as the Referenced Product.
b.
Acceptable Equivalent Manufacturers:
1)
Advance Transformer
2)
GE Lighting
3)
Osram/Sylvania
4)
Robertson Worldwide
5)
Universal Lighting Technologies
B.
General – Ballasts shall:
1.
Be factory provided, by the respective luminaire manufacturers, and shall be suitable for their
intended use, to operate the designated lamps listed in the Luminaire Schedule, and as specified
herein, to their full light output.
2.
Be submitted as separate ballast submittal sheet(s) included as part of the product data submittal
package. Refer to Part 1 for submittal requirements.
3.
Be listed and labeled per UL-935 - Fluorescent Ballasts, and shall be Class P, Type 1 Outdoor; and
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) certified where applicable.
4.
Comply with ANSI C62.41 - Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits, Category A for transient protection.
5.
Comply with ANSI C82.11 where applicable.
6.
Comply with the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and
regulations, Title 47 CFR part 18, Non-Consumer (Class A) for EMI/RFI (conducted and radiated).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
7.
8.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
Be physically interchangeable with standard electromagnetic and standard electronic ballasts,
where applicable.
Be totally enclosed within a metallic enclosure, and shall be provided with integral leads color coded
per ANSI C82.11, or with poke-in style wire retaining connectors.
C.
Warranty:
1.
Except as otherwise noted, ballasts provided shall be backed by a five-year, manufacturers
standard, full replacement, limited warranty against defects in materials or workmanship, beginning
at date of ballast manufacture.
D.
Low Temperature Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps
1.
Refer to Div. 26 Section “Interior Lighting”, for other electronic ballast specifications for linear
fluorescent lamps.
E.
Low Temperature Electronic Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps
1.
Refer to Div. 26 Section “Interior Lighting”, for other electronic ballast specifications for compact
fluorescent lamps.
2.
ELEC/CFL/LT – Shall be electronic, solid-state, with the following performance specifications,
features, and requirements:
a.
Shall be programmed start type, designed, built, and tested for operating the various DT
and TT compact fluorescent lamps specified.
b.
May be series or parallel connected to lampholders.
c.
Shall be provided with auto restart circuitry to allow lamps to restart without interrupting or
resetting power to the ballast.
d.
Ballasts provided shall be universal voltage sensing, (120 thru 277VAC), for operation on
50/60 Hz AC systems, and shall allow for sustained variations of +/- 10% nominal system
voltage and frequency, with no damage to the ballast.
e.
Shall be high frequency electronic type and shall operate their respective lamps at a
frequency above 42 kHz.
f.
Operating Power Factor – Not less than 0.98.
g.
Ballast Factor – Not less than 0.98 for any lamp/ballast combination.
h.
Lamp Current Crest Factor – Less than 1.7.
i.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) – Less than 10%
j.
Sound Rating - Class A
k.
Min. Starting Temperature: -20°F.
l.
Shall be provided with integral End-Of-Life circuitry to disconnect lamp from ballast at lamp
end of life.
m.
Referenced Product
1)
GE - “ProLine” Series
F.
Low Temperature Emergency Lighting Fluorescent Ballasts:
1.
EMER/FL/LT - Where indicated, provide single, self-contained emergency lighting devices designed
for installation within, or remote from, a given luminaire.
2.
Shall be provided with the following performance specifications, features, and requirements:
a.
Integral Battery - Field replaceable, maintenance free, nickel cadmium type.
b.
Charger - Integral to housing, solid-state type, designed, built, and tested to recharge a fully
discharged battery in not more than 24 hours.
c.
AC voltage sensing circuitry and transfer relay.
d.
Test switch and pilot light.
3.
Shall be UL listed for factory or field retrofit, in accordance with Underwriter’s Laboratories Standard
924 – Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.5
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
Shall be designed, built, and tested for dual input voltage compatibility – 120/277VAC, 60 Hz.
Operation: Those luminaires specified, and provided with additional emergency lighting ballasts
shall:
a.
Under “normal” operating conditions, the lamps in a given luminaire shall be operated and
controlled via the luminaire’s normal ballast(s), and the emergency battery shall be float
charged.
b.
Under a “power fail” mode – The integral voltage sensing circuit shall sense the loss of
“normal” AC voltage, and automatically transfer control of the designated lamp(s) to the
emergency lighting ballast, and illuminate the lamp(s) to the specified lumen output, for not
less than 90 min.
c.
Upon resumption of “normal” AC voltage, the integral voltage sensing circuit shall sense the
return of “normal” AC voltage, and the transfer relay shall automatically re-transfer operation
and control of the designated lamp(s) back to the normal ballast. The emergency battery
shall automatically revert back to the charge mode.
Lumen output in the emergency lighting mode of operation, for the following linear and compact
fluorescent lamps, shall be not less than:
a.
b.
One F42/TT CFL
1250 lumens @ 25°C/400 lumens @ 0°C.
Ballast components, except the test switch (when specified to be remote mounted), shall be selfcontained within a metal, “F” can shaped enclosure, designed for installation within a fluorescent
luminaire ballast compartment.
a.
Ballasts that are shown, specified, or otherwise indicated to be installed remote from the
luminaire, may require an additional enclosure, that shall be contractor or ballast
manufacturer supplied and installed.
“Push-To-Test” switch and AC Pilot/Charging indicating pilot light shall be provided.
a.
For luminaires scheduled, specified, or otherwise indicated with remote test stations, the
test switch and pilot light shall be factory assembled on a standard, single gang, white
coverplate, designed for remote installation over a single gang electric box opening.
b.
The contractor shall provide wiring between the remote test switch station locations and the
standby/emergency lighting ballasts.
Warranty
a.
Provide a standard manufacturer’s warranty against defects in workmanship or materials,
for not less than 5 years after installation.
Acceptable Manufacturers
a.
Referenced Products:
1)
2)
CFL lamps
The Bodine Company – B4CF Series
b.
Or equivalent products by: Dual-Lite, Iota, or Side-Lite
SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use
stainless steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support
components.
1.
Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2.
Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, unless
stainless steel items are indicated.
3.
Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
C.
2.6
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4.
IN-LINE FUSING
A.
Shall be UL listed and labeled, single pole, 600VAC, breakaway non-breakaway style, in-line fuse holders,
designed for field installation onto pole supported luminaires.
B.
Shall be two part device, consisting of water resistant type lineside and loadside mechanical crimp
connector terminals to accept stranded or solid conductors, with insulating boots, designed to accept
midget size fuses up to 30A.
C.
Provide complete with fuses, sized to the specific load.
D.
Referenced Product:
1.
Cooper/Bussmann – “TRON” HEB series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
B.
Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1.
Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application
and approved by manufacturer.
C.
Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
D.
Provide box wiring identification per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
E.
EMER/FL - Emergency Lighting Fluorescent Ballasts:
1.
In general ballasts shall be factory installed and pre-wired in the designated luminaries. Where
factory installation is not possible, the contractor shall provide shop/field installation.
2.
Provide the appropriate ballast per the specified luminaire and lamp. Except as otherwise
specifically noted, ballasts shall be installed internal to the luminaire.
3.
Follow the manufacturer’s published instructions for field installation.
4.
Except as otherwise noted, shown, or specified, ballasts shall be connected to the same lighting
branch circuit serving the other ballast(s) in any given luminaire.
a.
Unless otherwise noted, shown, or specified, the lighting branch circuit shall be connected
to the emergency lighting ballast un-switched, such that, upon loss or failure of the “normal”
lighting branch circuit, the voltage sensing circuit in the emergency lighting ballast will detect
the loss or failure, and deliver battery supplied, inverted AC power to the designated lamps
within the luminaire.
b.
Normal “OFF” switching, or other control of the “normal” lighting branch circuit, shall not
cause the emergency lighting ballast to operate.
5.
If required, install the ballast assembly remote from, but in close proximity (per manufacturer’s
direction) to, the designated luminaire, and provide wiring between the ballast and luminaire.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
6.
3.2
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
As specified, noted, shown, or required, provide test stations remote from the luminaire housing.
a.
Where required to be installed remote, install test stations in close proximity to the
emergency lighting luminaire.
b.
Test stations shall be installed where directed by Architect.
CORROSION PREVENTION
A.
Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal,
protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B.
Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In
concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied
with a 50 percent overlap.
3.3
GROUNDING AND BONDING
A.
Bond metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
1.
Install a grounding electrode at each pole, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Install a grounding electrode conductor at the base of each pole, bonded to the branch circuit
equipment ground conductor.
B.
Bond nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding
for Electrical Systems."
1.
Install a grounding electrode for each pole.
2.
Install a grounding electrode conductor and conductor protector.
3.
Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspections and Tests
1.
Perform inspections and test procedures as required by Division 26 Section “Electrical Inspections
and Testing”, ANSI/NETA ATS “System Functional Tests” and “Thermographic Survey”
requirements, and the following additional requirements:
a.
Follow-up thermographic survey shall not be required.
b.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
c.
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
d.
Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires
and energizing circuits with normal power source.
1)
Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
e.
Illumination Tests:
1)
Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to
NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):
a)
IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting."
b)
IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting
Installations."
c)
IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations."
d)
IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas."
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 00 – Exterior Lighting
e)
3.5
IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain luminaire lowering devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 - 11
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 10 00 – Common Work Results
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Champaign CUSD 4 (CUSD 4) requires the provision and installation of a new communications
cabling system for the renovation and addition to the Kenwood Elementary School located at
1001 South Stratford Street in Champaign, Illinois.
B.
This section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution
of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
C.
1.3
1.
Common work results for communications cabling systems
2.
Firestopping for communications cabling systems
Related Sections:
1.
Division 01 Sections pertaining to project management, coordination, jobsite safety and
requirements, operation and maintenance requirements, and closeout procedures.
2.
Division 26 Sections related to raceways, conduits, and electrical boxes.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AVIC: Audiovisual Installation Contractor
B.
CIC: Cabling Installation Contractor
C.
GC: General Contractor
D.
EC: Electrical Installation Contractor
E.
ECIC: Emergency Communications Contractor
F.
MEP: Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing
G.
PIC: Paging Installation Contractor
H.
SIC: Security Installation Contractor
1.4
SCOPE
A.
Champaign CUSD 4 is renovating the Kenwood Elementary School. There will be a two
distributed telecommunications rooms that will serve as the termination points for all station and
backbone cabling. The distributed telecommunications rooms will be connected to each other
via fiber optic cabling and copper cabling.
B.
The new communications cabling system shall be capable of supporting the voice, data, and
video requirements of CUSD 4 at and beyond 1000 Mbps.
C.
All cable, associated materials and labor required for a complete installation of the
communications cabling system shall be provided by the CIC unless otherwise stated in this
document.
D.
Due care and diligence has been used in preparation of this information, and it is believed to be
substantially correct. However, the responsibility for determining the full extent of exposure and
the verification of all information presented herein shall rest solely with the CIC. CUSD 4,
Sentinel Technologies, and any other representatives will not be responsible for any errors or
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 10 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 10 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
omissions in these specifications, nor for the failure on the part of the CIC to determine the full
extent of the exposures.
E.
1.5
The CIC shall not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions in these
specifications and associated project drawings. Where errors or omissions appear in these
specifications or drawings, the CIC shall promptly notify Sentinel Technologies in writing of such
errors or omissions. Any significant errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the specifications
shall be reported no later than five (5) days before the submission deadline. CUSD 4, Sentinel
Technologies, and any other representatives will not be responsible for errors that go
undiscovered.
DRAWINGS
A.
Associated drawings are diagrammatic in nature and may not represent exact field conditions.
The CIC shall field-verify critical installation requirements and provide necessary associated
work.
B.
The locations of telecommunication equipment and devices shown are approximate. The CIC
shall, prior to installation, verify exact locations by cross-checking architectural and electrical
drawings, field conditions and approved shop drawings.
C.
The CIC shall be prepared to relocate equipment or devices provided under this scope of work
when directed by the project team without cost, provided equipment has not been installed and
the new location is not greater than twenty five feet (25’) from the location originally shown.
D.
Outlets shall be located at same height, and of same orientation, unless otherwise noted.
E.
Wiring, signal and control devices, where provided, shall be flush-mounted in finished areas.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings and product data of standard cataloged products shall be submitted with
applicable data that meet the job requirements. Submittals that include information on multiple
devices or equipment are acceptable only when items applicable to the job are identified with
arrows, check marks or other call outs. The CIC shall clearly identify which manufacturer
solutions are being proposed at the time of bid response.
B.
When shop drawings are created from or incorporated with Sentinel’s drawings, the CIC shall
remove the architect’s, engineer's, and Sentinel’s title blocks and replace it with the CIC’s own,
unique title block. The CIC’s title block shall include, at a minimum, the CIC's name, address
and telephone number, and the project name.
C.
Shop drawings of related equipment, devices and material shall be submitted at same time so
the project team can coordinate the related components.
D.
No material or equipment shall be released for manufacture or shipment without first obtaining
the approval of the project team. Only the CIC shall be responsible for costs and coordination of
returning items purchased prior to approval.
E.
The CIC shall submit three (3) hard copy submittals (for Sentinel, the GC’s records, and the
MEP engineer’s records) unless directed otherwise by the GC or the owner. One or all of these
three copies may be subject to approval, or rejection with commentary. Submittals may consist
of but not be limited to one or any appropriate combination of the following:
1.
Manufacturer cut-sheets
2.
Shop drawings (including single-line diagrams)
3.
Catalog sheets
4.
Written specifications
5.
Originals or copies of the above
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 10 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 10 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
F.
The submittals should be bound in a standard three-ring binder with a minimum of the CIC's
name, address and telephone number, and the project name.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials and labor provided by the CIC shall be of the highest quality.
B.
The CIC shall be certified to install the solution that the CIC has proposed as specified in this
document.
C.
Only the highest grade components shall be considered, and all components shall be balanced
with each other from an electrical and performance characteristic standpoint.
D.
The communications cabling system shall be end-to-end certified by the CIC and the
manufacturer. A written document addressing the communication cabling system’s certification
shall be provided by the manufacturer once the installation is complete.
E.
All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner according to generally accepted trade
practices.
F.
Appropriate union requirements shall be strictly followed and all CIC employees on site shall
have appropriate union licenses.
G.
All work to be performed by the CIC shall be coordinated with the other trades and the General
Contractor.
H.
The CIC shall conform and adhere to all job site requirements as defined by the General
Contractor. It is the responsibility of the CIC to obtain these requirements from the General
Contractor.
I.
All necessary permits are to be secured by the CIC.
J.
Appropriate levels of insurance and bonding shall be maintained. Certificates of Insurance may
be requested, and shall be provided at the CIC’s expense.
K.
Any variations to the installation of the communications cabling system as described in this
specification and the associated project drawings shall be subject to the control and approval of
the General Contractor, CUSD 4 and Sentinel.
L.
Substitution of any materials specified in this document shall only be considered once a request
to do so has been submitted in writing to the General Contractor, CUSD 4 and Sentinel for prior
approval. This submittal shall discuss the scope of the change, the ramifications on the overall
communications cabling system and the advantages to be gained by CUSD 4.
M.
The CIC shall conform to the following standards when provisioning and installing the new
communications cabling system:
1.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 (Including all current addenda), Generic Telecommunications Cabling
for Customer Premises
2.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.1
(Including
all
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
3.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 (Including all current addenda),
Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard
4.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 (Including all current addenda), Optical Fiber Cabling Components
Standard
5.
ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial Telecommunications
Cabling
6.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual (latest edition)
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
current
addenda),
Commercial
Balanced
Building
Twisted-Pair
27 10 00-3
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 10 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
7.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Information Transport
Systems Installation Manual (latest edition)
N.
1.8
8.
ANSI/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces
9.
ANSI/TIA-526-14, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable
Plant
10.
ANSI/TIA-526-7, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable
Plant
11.
ANSI/TIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings
12.
ANSI-J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
13.
NEC 2008, National Electrical Code (where more stringent than local codes)
14.
All applicable local, county and state building and electrical codes with local addenda
15.
UL 444, Communication Cables, Published July, 2008
16.
FCC Part 68 Regulations
17.
IEEE 802.3, Ethernet Standard
18.
ANSI/ANSI/TIA 942, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers
19.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Electronic Safety and Security
Reference Manual (latest edition)
20.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) AV Design Reference Manual
(latest edition)
21.
ANSI/TIA-758 (Including all current addenda), Customer-Owned Outside Plant
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
22.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Customer-Owned Outside
Plant Manual (latest edition)
First-Named Manufacturer
1.
Within these specifications and associated drawings, the first-named approved
manufacturer indicates that its respective device, equipment or system may have been
used to meet the job requirements and to determine the space and dimensional
requirements. The CIC’s use of another pre-approved system may require that the CIC
verify that the respective devices, equipment, systems or products will meet the job
requirements and will fit the allocated space.
2.
The listing of a manufacturer as acceptable or pre-approved does not in any way relieve
the CIC from the responsibility for providing devices, equipment or systems that meet the
requirements of the specifications. The CIC shall verify that performance requirements
are met, as no two manufacturers should be trusted as exactly identical in function, fit, or
finish.
COORDINATION
A.
The CIC shall coordinate the arrangement, installation, and finishing of the communications
cabling system.
1.
All faceplate colors and finishes shall be coordinated with the architect.
2.
Any conduit, pathway, or sleeve requirements shall be coordinated with the MEP
engineer.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 10 00-4
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 10 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
3.
The alignment and positioning of pull boxes, junction boxes, back boxes, conduit ends,
stubs, sleeves, etc., with CIC-installed raceways, horizontal or vertical trays, racks, and
cabinets, etc.
B.
4.
Any equipment cut into, mounted on, or suspended from architectural elements such as
walls or ceiling shall be coordinated with the architect to ensure there is no conflict with
design intent or functionality.
5.
Any other elements that might or will interfere with elements installed by other trades
shall be coordinated with the GC and those respective trades.
6.
Although quantities of patch cords may be detailed later in this document, the CIC shall
be responsible for coordinating final quantities, lengths, and colors with the end user’s
information technology department and Sentinel.
Conflicts requiring noticeable deviation from the associated project drawings or these
specifications shall be coordinated with Sentinel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Fire stop systems shall be UL-listed or Factory Mutual approved. The CIC shall furnish and
install the proper fire stop system with classified products and materials compatible with the
appropriate penetrating elements, type of construction material and dimensions of the wall,
partition, barrier, or floor, and the environment and temperature range of both sides of the
opening. Fire stop systems shall maintain the original fire resistance rating of the wall, partition,
barrier, or floor prior to the penetration.
B.
Expansion type fire stop material shall be used where necessary to protect and close the
opening upon failure of the penetrating element due to fire.
C.
Fire stop penetrations in fire-rated walls and floors for sleeves, cables, conduits, ducts, and
cable trays.
D.
Fire stopping for openings through fire and smoke-rated walls and floor assemblies shall be
listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for “Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems.” The system shall meet the requirements of “Fire Tests of ThroughPenetration Firestops” designated ASTM E814.
E.
The CIC shall furnish and install systems fire tested by a third party according to ASTM E814
(or UL 1479) tested under positive pressure.
F.
Provide only material combinations that are qualified by independent agencies based on the
material’s performance when tested in a particular configuration.
G.
Thickness of materials must be established by formal ASTM E814 or UL 1479 tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INSTALLATION
A.
Locations and routes of pathways shown on drawings are schematic and not necessarily
reflective of conditions at time of installation, or were positioned for clarity rather than exact
spacing, bending, or desired separation. The CIC shall review any and all such pathways shown
on the drawings to ensure that the proposed solution will function as intended with regard to
quantities, sizes, locations, etc.
B.
The CIC shall review the actual conduit plans proposed by the MEP or EC to ensure that
conduits intended for the communications cabling system are correctly sized, adequately
positioned, and have the requisite number of pull boxes as required by the actual materials
proposed by the CIC, and/or as the CIC desires as optimal for installation. The CIC shall be
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 10 00-5
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 10 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
responsible for any and all costs associated with conduit changes resulting from failure to
preview and approve the pathways installed by others.
C.
Install all materials in compliance with manufacturer’s written directions.
D.
The CIC shall protect all stored or installed materials as part of these systems before, during, or
after installation from damage caused by other trades until turnover and final acceptance. If
damage occurs despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the
entire unit(s) as required to provide a solution in an original, undamaged condition.
E.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before
installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
F.
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on the associated
project drawings.
G.
Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by
differing field conditions outside the control of the CIC, submit a request for information to the
GC according to the requirements specified in Division 01.
3.2
FIRESTOPPING
A.
The CIC shall install fire stopping material in accordance with construction elements and
manufacturer specification.
B.
Thoroughly clean and remove any fire stopping material that drips or falls onto wall or floor
surfaces.
C.
After installation, protect the fire stop material from damage during construction. If damage
occurs despite such protections, remove and replace fire stopping material as required to
restore the integrity of the fire rating.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 10 00-6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 11 00 – Backbone Communications Cabling
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Fiber Optic Backbone Cable
2.
Fiber Optic Connectors and Panels
3.
UTP Backbone Cable
4.
UTP Connector
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The CIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the provision and installation of CUSD 4’s backbone communications
cabling.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 271000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The CIC shall review any and all sleeve, riser conduit, and bushings with the EC prior to
installing backbone cabling.
B.
The CIC shall review all applicable building requirements for passing cabling between floors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIBER OPTIC BACKBONE CABLE
A.
50-micron laser-optimized armored multimode fiber optic cable (OM3-grade) shall be installed
between the two telecommunications rooms (refer to associated drawings for quantities).
B.
All fiber optic cable shall be OFCP listed (optical fiber conductive plenum cable) for plenum
spaces as specified in NEC section 770-50.
C.
All fiber optic cable shall be from the same manufacturer and be the same type.
D.
All multimode fiber optic cable shall meet or exceed the following requirements:
1.
Contain graded-index fibers with a laser-optimized 50-micron core.
2.
Support dual wavelength capability for transmitting at the 850nm and 1300nm
wavelengths.
3.
Meet or exceed the following graded performance:
a.
A maximum attenuation of 3.5 dB/km and minimum bandwidth of 2,000 MHz/km at
the 850 nm wavelength
b.
A maximum attenuation of 1.5 dB/km and minimum bandwidth of 500 MHz/km at
the 1,300 nm wavelength
BACKBONE COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 11 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 11 00 – Backbone Communications Cabling
1009/4010.01
E.
Only fiber optic cables from the following manufacturers that meet the performance
specifications listed above shall be considered:
1.
2.2
Panduit – FOPPX24Y
FIBER OPTIC CONNECTOR AND PANEL
A.
Fiber optic connectors shall be of the LC type.
B.
Only fiber optic connectors and panels from the following manufacturers shall be considered:
1.
2.3
Panduit - FRME1, FAP12WAQDLCZ, and FLCSMC5BLY
UTP BACKBONE CABLE
A.
4-pair Category 6 cables shall be installed between the telecommunications rooms to form a
data backbone (refer to associated project drawings for quantities).
B.
All UTP cable shall be CMP listed (communications plenum cable) for plenum systems as
specified in NEC Section 800-50.
C.
All UTP cable shall be from the same manufacturer and be the same type.
D.
All Category 6 UTP cable and connectors shall meet or exceed the channel requirements as
defined by the latest standard referenced in Section 271000, Part 1, Subsection M (the CIC
should be aware that all testing requirements will be for the permanent link).
E.
Only UTP cables from the following manufacturers that meet the performance specifications
listed above shall be considered:
1.
2.4
Panduit – PUP6004BU-UY
UTP CONNECTOR
A.
Only 8 position, 8 conductor (8P8C) Category 6 connectors shall be used.
B.
Only UTP connectors from the following manufacturers that meet the performance
specifications listed above shall be considered:
1.
2.5
Panduit – DPA24688TGY
COAXIAL BACKBONE CABLE
A.
The coaxial backbone cabling system shall be able to support either bidirectional high definition
cable television (CATV) or high definition satellite television (SATV) services from a main
distribution point to intermediate distribution points as required.
B.
RG 11 coaxial cabling, where used, shall consist of a 14 AWG solid copper core quad-shielded
solution that has been swept-tested to 3,000 MHz.
C.
All coaxial cable shall be CATVP (CATV plenum cable) for plenum spaces as specified in NEC
Section 820-50. CATVX cabling shall not be used in the backbone.
D.
All coaxial cable shall be from the same manufacturer and be the same type:
E.
1.
Belden 1153A
2.
Gepco C3529
3.
Commscope/Uniprise 2287K
4.
Liberty RG11-QUAD PL
5.
Pre-approved equivalent
The CIC shall review the associated project drawings and identify all cumulative dB losses or
gains through the entire coaxial system to develop a comprehensive framework indicating the
BACKBONE COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 11 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 11 00 – Backbone Communications Cabling
1009/4010.01
need for line amplification. This is not a required deliverable, but the CIC shall note that the CIC
is responsible to verify these values as part of their installation so that signal strength does not
reach or drop below +5 dBmv.
F.
2.6
The CIC shall furnish and install all necessary splitters, taps, directional couplers, etc., to
provide a complete coaxial video distribution system. Directional couplers, tapoffs, splitters and
combiners, where used, shall meet the following requirements:
1.
The CIC shall review the associated project drawings and review any information
provided therein by Sentinel. Because the CIC’s proposed solution may provide better
performance than the minimal guidelines provided therein, the CIC may revise the
quantities and placement of all couplers, taps, splitters, and combiners.
2.
All components shall provide for a minimum of 3,000 MHz frequency range.
3.
All components shall be mounted securely to a plywood wall within the distributed
telecommunications room; refer to associated drawings.
4.
All components shall support female F-type CATV connectors for both RF input and
outputs.
5.
Tap values shall be appropriately rated for the estimated signal strength at that point of
insertion.
6.
Thru-line losses shall be calculated for 3,000MHz frequencies.
7.
All coaxial backbone runs shall be appropriately terminated with 75Ω terminators as
required.
AMPLIFIERS
A.
2.7
The CIC shall not furnish or install any amplifiers, line distribution amplifiers, or multiswitches for
distribution; these shall be provided by either the CATV or the SATV provider under the
direction of the owner.
COAXIAL BACKBONE CONECTOR
A.
F-type CATV connectors shall be used, either compression or high-strength screw-on.
B.
Connectors shall be rated for the appropriate grade cable (that is, RG 6 or RG 11) and be rated
to at least 3,000 MHz.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A.
All UTP cable and connecting hardware shall be rated as Category 6 and shall exceed the most
current ANSI/TIA performance specifications for Category 6 permanent link performance (as
shown in this specification’s overview) unless stated otherwise.
B.
All multimode fiber shall be laser-optimized 50-micron cable (OM3-grade) and shall exceed the
most current ANSI/TIA performance specifications (as shown in this specification’s overview)
unless stated otherwise.
C.
The T568B wiring pattern shall be used for all UTP cable terminations.
D.
All fiber optic, coaxial, and UTP backbone cable shall be installed above the ceilings.
E.
All fiber optic and UTP backbone cable runs shall contain no splice or transition points between
the distributed telecommunications rooms.
F.
All cables shall be installed such that the respective manufacturers’ recommended bend radius
for each cable type is not exceeded.
BACKBONE COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 11 00-3
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 11 00 – Backbone Communications Cabling
1009/4010.01
G.
The CIC shall be responsible for verifying the actual distances for each fiber optic, coaxial, and
UTP backbone cable run between the telecommunications rooms.
H.
All UTP, coaxial, and fiber optic cables shall be properly dressed, tied and trimmed.
I.
Cable pulling lubricants, where used, shall be approved by the cable manufacturer so that the
lubricating compound can not deteriorate the cable jacket.
J.
The CIC shall assume responsibility for any damage to the cable during installation.
K.
The CIC shall test, label and document the backbone cabling as described in section 271700 of
this document.
END OF SECTION
BACKBONE COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 11 00-4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 12 00 – Horizontal Communications Cabling
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Category 6 UTP cables and connectivity
2.
Coaxial cables and connectivity
3.
Patch cords
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The CIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the provision and installation of CUSD 4’s horizontal and station
communications cabling.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 271000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The CIC shall review any and all conduit, stubs, pull boxes, back boxes, and junction boxes with
the EC prior to installing cabling.
B.
The CIC shall confirm final patch cord quantities, colors, and lengths with CUSD 4 and Sentinel
prior to ordering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
UTP HORIZONTAL STATION CABLE
A.
All UTP cable shall be CMP listed (communications plenum cable) for plenum spaces as
specified in NEC Section 800-50.
B.
All UTP cable shall be from the same manufacturer and be the same type.
C.
All Category 6 UTP cable and connectors shall meet or exceed the channel requirements as
defined by the latest standard referenced in Section 271000, Part 1, Subsection M (the CIC
should be aware that all testing requirements will be for the permanent link).
D.
Only UTP cables from the following manufacturers that meet the performance specifications
listed above shall be considered:
1.
2.2
Panduit – PUP6004BU-UY
UTP CONNECTOR
A.
Category 6 8P8C (RJ45) connectors shall be used.
B.
Only UTP connectors from the following manufacturers that meet the performance
specifications listed above shall be considered:
1.
Panduit – CJ688TGWH, CJ688TGBU, DPA24688TGY, and DPA48688TGY
HORIZONTAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 12 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
2.3
COAXIAL HORIZONTAL STATION CABLE
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 12 00 – Horizontal Communications Cabling
A.
The coaxial horizontal cabling system shall be able to support either bidirectional high definition
cable television (CATV) or high definition satellite television (SATV) services from a distribution
point to the faceplate.
B.
All coaxial cable shall be CATVP (CATV plenum cable) for plenum spaces as specified in NEC
Section 820-50. CATVX cabling shall not be used in the horizontal portion of the installation.
C.
All coaxial cable shall be from the same manufacturer and be the same type.
D.
RG 6 coaxial cabling shall consist of an 18 AWG solid copper core quad-shielded solution that
has been swept-tested to 3,000 MHz.
E.
All coaxial cable shall meet or improve upon the following nominal requirements:
1.
F.
9.9 db of loss for every 100 feet of run at 3,000 MHz
Only coaxial cables and connectors from the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the
performance and construction specifications listed above shall be considered:
1.
Belden 1189AP
2.
Gepco C3525
3.
Commscope/Uniprise 2229V
4.
West-Penn 256300
5.
Liberty RG6-QUAD CMP
6.
Pre-approved equivalent
G.
All station runs shall be calculated to ensure that a signal strength of +5dBmv or greater exists
at the far end coaxial connector.
H.
If the signal strength at the connector exceeds (e.g., buzzing occurs when text is shown on a
standard television monitor), the CIC shall furnish and install the appropriate attenuator pad to
reduce the signal as close to +5dBmv as possible.
I.
The CIC may use adjustable attenuator pads in the standard -1dBmv to -20dBmv range.
J.
It is not necessary for the CIC to provide attenuator pads at each station location—only for
those outlets which exceed a standard NTSC television monitor’s or flat panel display’s ability to
compensate.
2.4
COAXIAL CONNECTOR
A.
F-type CATV connectors shall be used, either compression or high-strength screw-on.
B.
Connectors shall be rated for the appropriate grade cable (that is, RG 6 or RG 11) and be rated
to at least 3,000 MHz.
2.5
PATCH CORDS
A.
The CIC shall provide an allowance to provide and install all necessary patch cords unless
directed otherwise by CUSD 4 or Sentinel.
B.
Patch cords shall be blue in color unless directed otherwise by CUSD 4 or Sentinel.
C.
The patch cords shall be pre-manufactured and tested at the factory by the same manufacturer
that supplied the communications cabling system: field construction of these patch cords is not
acceptable.
D.
For all coaxial cabling faceplates, the CIC shall furnish one (1) 3-foot or 4-foot RG-59 patch
cord, black or white in color.
HORIZONTAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 12 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 12 00 – Horizontal Communications Cabling
HORIZONTAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
A.
All UTP and horizontal cable runs shall contain no splice or transition points from the computer
room or each distributed telecommunications room to each outlet location.
B.
The CIC shall coordinate with the architect the exact color and orientation and placement of all
faceplates before any components are purchased and installed.
C.
The CIC shall provide and install all jacks and appropriate inserts for all locations, including
those inside floor and table-top boxes.
D.
The jacks shall correspond to the following colors and positions (refer to associated faceplate
drawings):
E.
1.
Position 1 – Blue (Upper Left)
2.
Position 2 – White (Upper Right)
3.
Position 3 – Blue (Lower Left)
The outlet types and their configurations consist of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Type 1 – Wallphone
a.
One (1) Category 6 UTP cable and one (1) Category 6 8P8C (RJ45) jack to
support wall phone locations. Associated faceplate shall have attachment points
for a customer provided telephone handset.
b.
Plan symbol consists of a solid triangle with the letter “W” next to it. All locations
are 48-inches AFF unless noted otherwise.
Type 2 – One-Port Faceplate
a.
One (1) Category 6 UTP cable and one (1) Category 6 8P8C (RJ45) jack to
support work station locations.
b.
Plan symbol consists of a solid triangle with the number “1” next to it.
Type 3 – Television Faceplate
a.
One (1) RG6 coaxial cable, one (1) F-type connector, two (2) Category 6 UTP
cables and two (2) Category 6 8P8C (RJ45) jacks to support television monitor
locations.
b.
Plan symbol consists of a solid triangle with the letters “TV” next to it.
Type 4 – Two-Port Faceplate
a.
Two (2) Category 6 UTP cables and two (2) Category 6 8P8C (RJ45) jacks to
support work station locations.
b.
Plan symbol consists of a solid triangle with the number “2” next to it.
Type 5 – Three-Port Faceplate
a.
Three (3) Category 6 UTP cables and three (3) Category 6 8P8C (RJ45) jacks to
support work station locations.
b.
Plan symbol consists of a solid triangle with the number “3” next to it.
Type 6 – Wireless Access Point Location
a.
One (1) Category 6 UTP cable and one (1) Category 6 8P8C (RJ45) jack installed
in a surface mounted box above the finished ceiling with a 25-foot service loop to
allow the customer to adjust the final location of the wireless access points and
CCTV cameras.
HORIZONTAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 12 00-3
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 12 00 – Horizontal Communications Cabling
1009/4010.01
b.
Plan symbol consists of a solid triangle inside a circle with the letters “WAP” or “C”
next to it.
F.
All faceplates shall be installed level to within one-sixteenth of an inch of true; the CIC shall
verify faceplates with a torpedo level to ensure faceplates are not visibly crooked.
G.
All UTP cable and connecting hardware shall be rated as Category 6 and shall exceed the most
current ANSI/TIA performance specifications for Category 6 permanent link (as shown in this
specification’s overview) unless stated otherwise.
H.
The T568B wiring pattern shall be used for all UTP cable terminations.
I.
All UTP and coaxial cable shall be installed above the ceilings.
J.
All cables shall be installed such that the recommended bend radius for each cable type is not
exceeded.
K.
The CIC shall be responsible for verifying the actual distances for each UTP and coaxial cable
run from each distributed telecommunications room to each outlet location.
L.
All UTP and coaxial cables shall be properly dressed, tied and trimmed.
M.
Cable pulling lubricants, where used, shall be approved by the cable manufacturer so that the
lubricating compound cannot deteriorate the cable jacket.
N.
The CIC shall assume responsibility for any damage to the cable during installation.
O.
The CIC shall test, label and document the horizontal cabling as described in section 271700 of
this document.
END OF SECTION
HORIZONTAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 12 00-4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 13 00 – Interior Communications Pathways
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Other supports
2.
Innerduct
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The CIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the routing and interior pathways of all cabling within the building.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 271000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The CIC shall review any and all pathways to identify areas or locations where there may be
conflict with other trades, particularly architectural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, or fire
protection-related.
B.
The CIC shall coordinate all cable tray installation with the architects, MEP engineers and the
other trades on the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OTHER SUPPORTS
A.
Bridle rings or other equivalent supports shall be installed in areas where ducts, conduits or
cable trays are not available.
B.
The CIC shall furnish and install all EMT sleeves required to allow cabling to pass through wall
partitions.
2.2
INNERDUCT
A.
Where drawings or requirements call out for innerduct, the CIC shall furnish and install 1-1/4inch corrugated innerduct within the conduit system as well extending out of conduits or sleeves
to termination points.
B.
Plenum-rated innerduct shall meet UL 910 and UL 2024 requirements.
C.
The CIC shall furnish and install innerduct (minimum three quarter inch (3/4”)) for any location
where cabling extends out from floor cores and into furniture system splines, or to bridge a gap
between a cabling pathway to an architectural element.
D.
In such cases, the innerduct shall be black in color and consist of any of the following:
1.
Corrugated tubing
2.
Split harness tubing
INTERIOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 13 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.
Spiral wrap
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 13 00 – Interior Communications Pathways
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
OTHER SUPPORTS
A.
J-hangers, J-hooks or other equivalent supports shall be installed at a minimum of every three
to four feet (3-4’).
B.
The CIC shall assume responsibility for any damage to the bridle rings or other equivalent
supports during installation.
3.2
INNERDUCT
A.
All innerduct shall be installed so that there are no bends, kinks, or deformation of the tubing.
B.
All innerduct shall follow the pathway requirements in this section for location, bend radius,
placement, and dressing.
C.
In 1-1/4-inch innerducts, a pull string shall be installed and secured at each end.
3.3
GENERAL
A.
All UTP, fiber optic and coaxial backbone and horizontal station cabling shall be installed
through the ceiling. It is the responsibility of the CIC to supply, install and use J-hangers, Jhooks, or other equivalent supports to route cable where conduits, ducts or trays are not
available. These supports shall be installed at least every three-to-four feet (3-4’).
B.
All UTP, fiber optic and coaxial backbone and horizontal station cabling shall be self-supported
(i.e., not sharing a support structure with the ceiling grid or other suspended components), and
installed such that a visible sag is present between supports.
C.
It is the responsibility of the CIC to review any associated conduit plans and notify Sentinel, the
General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor, and CUSD 4 of any concerns, deficiencies,
changes, or areas of cost savings regarding conduit size, placement, routing, and location,
sizing, and quantity of pull boxes.
D.
All UTP, fiber optic and coaxial backbone and horizontal station cables shall be installed such
that the recommended bend radius is not exceeded.
E.
All UTP and fiber optic horizontal station cables shall not exceed 90 meters in length from their
termination point at the station outlet and the termination point at the cross-connect.
F.
All UTP and coaxial cables shall be installed at a minimum distance of six inches (6”) from the
nearest sources of electromagnetic interference including such sources as radio antennas,
radar transmitters, X-ray equipment, medium and high voltage electrical wiring, induction
heaters, fluorescent fixtures, ballasts and high-intensity discharge devices.
G.
All UTP, fiber optic and coaxial cables shall be installed at a minimum distance of twenty four
inches (24”) from steam or hot water piping.
H.
All UTP and coaxial cables shall not be installed parallel to, nor at the same level as the lighting
fixtures.
END OF SECTION
INTERIOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 13 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 15 00 – Telecommunications Room Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Open relay racks
2.
Ladder tray
3.
Horizontal wire management
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The CIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the telecommunications rooms’ cabling system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 271000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The CIC shall review any and all pathways to identify areas or locations where there may be
conflict with other trades, particularly architectural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, or fire
protection-related.
B.
The CIC shall coordinate all installation with the architects, MEP engineers and the other trades
on the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPEN RELAY RACKS
A.
Seven foot (7’) tall x nineteen inch (19”) wide two-post open relay racks are required in the
telecommunications room to support CIC-provided patch panels and network equipment
provided by CUSD 4 (refer to associated drawings for exact quantity and placement). These
racks shall be securely bolted to the floor in accordance with the requirements of the rack
manufacturer and, if required, the floor manufacturer. These racks shall also be grounded to
the telecommunications grounding busbar (busbar by others).
B.
The racks shall consist of:
1.
Panduit CMR19X84
2.
Chatsworth High Density Patching Frame (55100-703)
3.
Pre-approved equivalent
C.
Each rack shall feature bilateral vertical wire management as shown on the associated
drawings.
D.
The CIC shall verify that the vertical wire management is sized properly to accommodate CICand customer-installed patch cords.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 15 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 15 00 – Telecommunications Room Requirements
1009/4010.01
1.
At a minimum, the wire management between any two racks shall provide an eight inch
(8”) wide channel.
2.
At a minimum, the wire management at either end of any row shall provide a four inch
(4”) wide channel.
E.
The CIC shall furnish and install a cabinet grounding strip (Panduit RGS134-series) to one post
of each relay rack in order to facilitate the correct grounding of the relay rack.
F.
The CIC shall furnish and install shelves within the rack to support customer provided servers.
The CIC shall coordinate with the customer the exact quantity and location of the shelves.
2.2
LADDER TRAY
A.
The CIC shall install a twelve inch (12”) wide ladder type cable tray with a black finish within the
telecommunications room to allow for the installation of cabling to the rack-mounted patch
panels, as well as to provide CUSD 4 with the means to patch between the racks (refer to
associated drawings for exact placement).
B.
Acceptable manufacturers include:
C.
2.3
1.
Chatsworth 10250-712
2.
Hubbell HLS1012B
3.
B-Line SB-13-12FB
4.
Pre-approved equivalent
The CIC shall further furnish and install all necessary brackets, mounts, supports, and clamps to
provide a complete tray system in compliance with manufacturer requirements.
HORIZONTAL WIRE MANAGEMENT
A.
Horizontal cable managers shall be installed above and below each patch panel (refer to
associated drawings for exact quantities, size and placement) to accommodate owner patch
cord installation.
B.
Acceptable manufacturers include:
1.
Panduit NCMHF-series
2.
Chatsworth Universal Horizontal Cable Manager-series
3.
Pre-approved equivalent
C.
The CIC shall provide the appropriate covers for the horizontal wire management. Coverless
systems are not acceptable.
D.
D-ring-style, front/rear combination units, rod (G-ring) style, or Velcro®-style managers are not
acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
OPEN RELAY RACKS
A.
The two post open relay racks shall be level and be securely bolted to the floor. The CIC shall
install a minimum #6 AWG ground wire from each open relay rack to the nearest
telecommunications grounding busbar.
B.
The rack shall be installed so that vertical management can be placed without blocking conduit,
and that vertical management doors open fully and easily.
C.
The CIC shall install all horizontal cable managers and their corresponding covers per the
associated drawings, level horizontally.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 15 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 15 00 – Telecommunications Room Requirements
1009/4010.01
D.
After installation, protect the components from damage during construction. If damage occurs
despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the entire unit as
required to provide components in original, undamaged condition.
3.2
LADDER TRAY
A.
The CIC shall mount the ladder tray system to the height or heights indicated on the drawings.
Finished horizontal segments shall be level within one-eighth inch.
B.
The CIC shall observe all bend radius requirements as allowed by the field conditions, and in
accordance with Sentinel drawings or directions. The CIC shall assume a 10x radius for the
largest fiber sheath (if present) or a 4x or four inch (4”) radius (whichever is greater) for copper
conductors. The CIC shall notify Sentinel if bend radius requirements exceed the width of the
ladder tray defined herein.
C.
All vertical bends shall follow bend radius requirements as allowed by the field conditions as
described in B, above.
D.
The entire tray system shall be grounded to the nearest telecommunications busbar as
described in Section 271600.
E.
The CIC shall review the associated drawings and observe any components intended to be
mounted to the ladder tray (backboxes, panels, standoff brackets, etc.); the CIC shall ensure
that no supports, brackets, or hardware could interfere with the placement or function of these
critical design components.
F.
The CIC shall verify that the combined weight of the cabling does not exceed the weight
capacity of any segment of the tray system prior to installation; in the event that the combined
weight of cabling exceeds the loading of the proposed tray system, the CIC shall contact the
architect as well as Sentinel for direction.
G.
After installation, protect the components from damage during construction. If damage occurs
despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the entire unit as
required to provide components in original, undamaged condition.
3.3
HORIZONTAL WIRE MANAGEMENT
A.
The CIC shall install horizontal wire managers per the associated drawings, and ensure that
covers are closed and ready for owner-installed patch cords.
B.
After installation, protect the components from damage during construction. If damage occurs
despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the entire unit as
required to provide components in original, undamaged condition.
END OF SECTION
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 15 00-3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 16 00 – Telecommunications Grounding Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Grounding system
2.
Telecommunications main grounding busbar
3.
Bonding conductors
4.
Telecommunications bonding backbone
5.
Grounding equalizers
6.
Telecommunications grounding busbars
7.
Bonding jumpers
8.
Grounding telecommunications equipment
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The CIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the telecommunications grounding system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 271000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The CIC shall coordinate all ground-related work with the EC and GC to determine installation
responsibility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GROUNDING SYSTEM
A.
The CIC shall furnish and install all required grounding components for racks, cable trays,
sleeves, and conduits to allow interconnection with the telecommunications grounding system.
B.
Some materials and components may be existing or may be provided and installed by the
electrical contractors (EC). The CIC and GC shall verify the responsibilities accordingly from the
following information. Refer to the associated project drawings for quantities and locations of the
following components.
2.2
TELECOMMUNICATIONS MAIN GROUNDING BUSBAR
A.
Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB). The TMGB serves as a dedicated
extension of the building grounding electrode system and serves as the central attachment point
for the TBB(s) and components.
B.
The TMGB shall be predrilled with holes for use with standard sized lugs and have minimum
dimensions of 0.25-inches thick by 4-inches wide and a minimum of 24-inches long.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 16 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 16 00 – Telecommunications Grounding Requirements
1009/4010.01
C.
The grounding busbar shall be furnished and installed by the EC.
2.3
BONDING CONDUCTOR FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS
A.
Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT). The BCT bonds the TMGB to the electrical
power ground.
B.
The minimum size conductor used shall be a 6 AWG.
2.4
TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING BACKBONE
A.
Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB). The TBB is a 6 AWG or larger bonding
conductor that provides a direct bond between different telecommunication grounding locations
within the building.
B.
The TBB shall connect all TGBs to the TMGB, and shall be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of
conductor length up to a maximum of 4/0 AWG.
C.
2.5
1.
TBB Length (Feet) TBB Size (AWG)
2.
If the TBB is less than 13-feet long, utilize a 6 AWG conductor.
3.
If the TBB is 13 – 19.99-feet long, utilize a 4 AWG conductor.
4.
If the TBB is 20 – 25.99-feet long, utilize a 3 AWG conductor.
5.
If the TBB is 26 – 32.99-feet long, utilize a 2 AWG conductor.
6.
If the TBB is 33 – 43.99-feet long, utilize a 1 AWG conductor.
7.
If the TBB is 44 – 51.99-feet long, utilize a 1/0 AWG conductor.
8.
If the TBB is 52 – 65.99-feet long, utilize a 2/0 AWG conductor.
9.
If the TBB is 66 – 99.99 long, utilize a 3/0 AWG conductor.
10.
If the TBB is 100-feet or longer, utilize a 4/0 AWG conductor.
The TBB will be furnished and installed by the EC.
GROUNDING EQUALIZER
A.
Grounding Equalizer (GE). In the event two (2) or more TBBs are used within a multistory
building, the TBBs shall be bonded together with a GE (Grounding Equalizer) at the top floor
and at every third floor in between as required.
B.
The GE should be sized the same as the TBB per the chart above.
2.6
TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING BUSBAR
A.
Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB). The TGB is the grounding connection point for
all communications systems and equipment in the area served by the technology space in
which it is placed.
B.
The TGB shall be predrilled with holes for use with standard sized lugs and have minimum
dimensions of 0.25-inches thick by 2-inches wide and a minimum of 12-inches long.
C.
The grounding busbar shall be furnished and installed by the EC.
2.7
BONDING CONDUCTOR
A.
Bonding Conductor (BC). BCs are used to tie the cable or basket tray, ladder racking, racks,
cabinets, conduits and other equipment to the nearest TGB.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 16 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 16 00 – Telecommunications Grounding Requirements
1009/4010.01
B.
NEC 800.40(A) requires at least a 14 AWG stranded-insulated or solid-insulated conductor for
connecting telecommunications protectors and associated non-metallic cable sheaths to
selected ground.
C.
Ground requirements indicate a minimum 6 AWG stranded conductor with an overall green
insulated jacket.
D.
The type of bond used should be sized for the application and the fault current-carrying capacity
needed.
E.
The electrical engineers may ask the CIC to install a BC with an unshielded copper backbone
cable as a form of protection. This BC shall also be a minimum of 6 AWG and would run
parallel with the unshielded backbone cable. The CIC would bond each end to the nearest
TGB.
2.8
BONDING JUMPERS
A.
Bonding jumpers shall be furnished and installed as required for all basket tray or ladder tray
segments, so that the tray system forms a continuous path to ground.
B.
These jumpers shall be attached by split bolts to the tray system; remove paint from the tray as
necessary to ensure metal-to-metal contact.
2.9
HANGER BRACKETS
A.
2.10
Utilize ground conductor hanger brackets to feed BCs to the TMGB or TGB within the space.
GROUNDING EQUIPMENT
A.
All CIC-supplied relay racks shall feature a rack ground busbar mounted to the real mounting
rails one rack unit from the top rail position on each rack, so that equipment mounted in this
rack may, on day one or in future, be grounded directly to the telecommunications grounding
system. Refer to associated project drawings for additional details.
B.
Other components include but are not limited to the wiring, two-hold compression connectors,
copper compression HTAPs, U-bolt grounding clamps, long barrel lugs, jumper kits, etc., to
connect all CIC-supplied components within the room in order to provide a complete grounding
solution in compliance with the standards listed previously.
C.
Use #12-24 slotted hex-head zinc-plated thread-forming screws in conjunction with paintpiercing washers against all painted surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install all grounding components in compliance with the respective components’ manufacturer
requirements to ensure a continuous grounding system.
B.
The CIC shall install solid conductors for conductors #10 AWG or smaller, and stranded
conductors for #6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Use irreversible crimp and/or exothermic welds to form permanent grounding connections.
Equipment which may be removed in the future shall use the #12-24 slotted hex-head zincplated thread-forming screws in conjunction with paint-piercing washers against all painted
surfaces. The CIC shall remove paint as required to ensure a metal-to-metal contact.
D.
Exothermic welded connectors shall be used for all outdoor locations or in locations exposed
however briefly to the elements; however, the CIC shall use a bolted clamp for disconnect-type
connections.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 16 00-3
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 16 00 – Telecommunications Grounding Requirements
1009/4010.01
E.
All conductors shall be routed along the straightest and shortest paths available, unless
otherwise indicated or required be Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where
they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
F.
All jumpers, straps, and other bonding components shall be installed in locations permitting
inspection and maintenance, except where routed through conduit.
G.
Adjacent racks or cabinets shall be grounded with a home-run connection to the TMGB or TGB
(for four racks or cabinets or less), or tapped in series to a grounding connector. Under no
circumstances shall racks or cabinets be daisy-chained via grounding conductors, even where
permitted by code. Racks or cabinets over raised access flooring may be connected to the subfloor grounding mesh via an access floor grounding clamp, in lieu of a dedicated home run or
tapped into a buss.
H.
Install grounding systems and components so that vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted
equipment.
I.
The grounding and bonding systems shall be tested using a clamp-on ground-resistant tester
and/or using a digital ground-resistant tester. The total grounding system resistance shall be
less than 5 ohms. The test results should be kept in an Excel Spreadsheet and submitted to the
GC with all the other documents at the end of the project.
END OF SECTION
TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 16 00-4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 17 00 – Testing, Identification, and Administration Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Cable system testing
2.
Cabling identification and labeling
3.
Cable system administration
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The CIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the specifications and requirements for the testing, identification and
administration of the communications cabling system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 271000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM TESTING
A.
A Level IV certified testing device shall be used. The tester shall have been field calibrated
within the last month.
B.
The CIC shall ensure that the appropriate adapters and test cords are used.
2.2
COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A.
Labels shall meet the legibility, exposure defacement and adhesion requirements of UL969.
B.
Labels shall be preprinted or printed by a computer. Labels written by hand are not acceptable.
2.3
COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
A.
The CIC shall provide records drawings in an AutoCAD compatible format or in PDF format.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM TESTING
A.
All pairs of all horizontal station cabling and backbone cabling shall be tested from the jack to
the patch panel or block, and from patch panel to patch panel in a bi-directional manner using a
Level IV certified testing device.
B.
All testing shall be conducted on the permanent link.
C.
The CIC shall provide test results and certification as to the communications cabling system’s
adherence to the standards and performance requirements referenced in this document.
TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 17 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Renovation and Addition
27 17 00 – Testing, Identification, and Administration Requirements
1009/4010.01
D.
Test results shall meet or exceed the requirements set forth in the respective sections of this
document.
3.2
COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A.
The CIC shall thoroughly label the entire communications cabling system for future
maintainability.
B.
All station cables shall be labeled at the faceplate, the patch panel jack or port, and the rear of
the patch panel above or below the 110 punchdown (for UTP) or jack or port position (fiber or
coax) indicating location number.
C.
All backbone cables shall be labeled at the patch panel jack or port, and the rear of the patch
panel above or below the 110 punchdown (for UTP) or jack or port position (fiber or coax)
indicating location number.
3.3
COMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
A.
The CIC shall thoroughly document the entire communications cabling system for future
maintainability and troubleshooting.
B.
Documentation shall include but not be limited to:
1.
AutoCAD or PDF scale drawings of the project (backgrounds available from Sentinel)
clearly showing:
a.
Precise faceplate locations and identification numbers
b.
Approximate pathways of horizontal cable runs to their nearest points of
termination
c.
Approximate pathways of all backbone cable runs to their respective points of
termination
d.
Precise locations of installed pull boxes, junction boxes, and enclosures related to
any communications conduits that may be installed
e.
Conduit sizes for any conduit above three quarter inch (3/4”) in size (if used)
f.
Detailed elevation views of any wall-mounted equipment, including but not limited
to 110 blocks, wall-mounted patch panels, grounding busbars
g.
Single line diagrams and/or backbone schematics
h.
Any outside plant services or exterior services, dimensioned from building corners
or other permanent structures (trees, plants, parking lot curbing, fencing, etc., are
not acceptable landmarks).
2.
Product cut sheets, shop drawings, etc., as outlined in 271000, 1.5.
3.
Documentation shall be submitted to CUSD 4 prior to final payment.
END OF SECTION
TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 17 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 18 00 – Cutover and Training Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Cutover services
2.
Training services
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The CIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the specifications and requirements for the cutover of the communications
cable system and subsequent user training
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 271000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The CIC shall coordinate all training with CUSD 4 to determine the extent, duration, and
schedule of the training session.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CUTOVER AND TRAINING SERVICES
A.
The CIC shall provide on-site support during and immediately after start-up for a period of 2
business days.
B.
The CIC shall provide training for CUSD 4 personnel to ensure knowledge transfer regarding
documentation and operation of the communications cabling system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CUTOVER AND TRAINING SERVICES
A.
The CIC shall be available or on-call with a 2-hour response time for 2 business days after the
communications cabling system is turned over to CUSD 4 in order to investigate and repair any
components of the system that do not function properly.
B.
The CIC shall provide a training session with the appropriate CUSD 4 staff to explain and orient
the staff in the use and maintenance of the communications cabling system. This training
session shall be scheduled directly with CUSD 4 prior to turnover.
C.
The CIC is not responsible for the installation of patch cords, mounting of active components, or
configuration of active components.
D.
At closeout, clean or re-clean entire work to normal level for "first class" maintenance/cleaning
of building projects of a similar nature. Remove non-permanent protection and labels, clean
exposed finishes, touch-up minor finish damage, remove debris and broom-clean spaces,
sanitize work, and perform similar cleanup operations needed to produce a clean condition
CUTOVER AND TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 18 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 18 00 – Cutover and Training Requirements
END OF SECTION
CUTOVER AND TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 18 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
27 19 00 – Support and Warranty Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes the support and warranty of the communications cable system.
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The CIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the specifications and requirements for the support and warranty of the
communications cabling system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 271000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY
A.
The communications cabling system shall be end-to-end certified by the CIC and the
manufacturer.
B.
An extended material, labor and performance warranty shall be provided by the manufacturer.
C.
A written document addressing the communication cabling system’s certification shall be
provided by the manufacturer at the completion of the project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY
A.
Once the communications cabling system is certified, the CIC shall repair–at no additional
charge–any part of the communications cabling system that is not working properly within 24
hours of the report of the problem, unless other arrangements are made with the manufacturer
issuing the warranty.
B.
The CIC shall deliver to CUSD 4 documentation outlining the terms and conditions or the
warranty. A minimum 20-year application performance warranty is required.
END OF SECTION
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 19 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Champaign CUSD 4 (CUSD 4) requires the provision and installation of a paging and intercom
system for the renovation and addition to the Kenwood Elementary School located at 1001
South Stratford Street in Champaign, Illinois.
B.
This section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution
of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
C.
1.3
1.
Distributed paging systems
2.
Intercom systems
3.
Firestopping for paging systems
4.
Grounding of equipment
5.
Amplifiers, speakers, and other components
Related Sections:
1.
Division 01 Sections pertaining to project management, coordination, jobsite safety and
requirements, operation and maintenance requirements, and closeout procedures.
2.
Division 26 Sections related to raceways, conduits, and electrical boxes.
3.
Division 27 Sections related to communications cabling systems
DEFINITIONS
A.
AVIC: Audiovisual Installation Contractor
B.
CIC: Cabling Installation Contractor
C.
GC: General Contractor
D.
EC: Electrical Installation Contractor
E.
ECIC: Emergency Communications Contractor
F.
MEP: Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing
G.
PIC: Paging Installation Contractor
H.
SIC: Security Installation Contractor
1.4
SCOPE
A.
Champaign CUSD 4 is renovating and expanding the Kenwood Elementary School. The PIC
shall install a Valcom Class Connection paging system that will support seventy-two (72)
discreet paging zones. In addition, the paging system shall provide tones for change of class
signaling and provide talk-back functionality in classrooms. The PIC shall coordinate the design
and configuration of paging zones and zone paging groups with CUSD 4 prior to installation.
The PIC shall also furnish and install an intercom system that is capable of allowing staff to
unlock selected entrances through the phone system.
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 30 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
B.
The new paging system shall consist of components from Valcom and the intercom shall consist
of components from Viking. The PIC can propose a system based on components from another
manufacturer. If the PIC chooses to propose an alternative, the PIC shall ensure that this
alternative can meet the performance and functionality of the Valcom and Viking components
listed.
C.
The PIC shall furnish and install a new paging system including the following components:
D.
1.5
1.
Amplifier
2.
Speakers, Baffles, Enclosures
3.
Equipment Rack
4.
Wiring
5.
Intercom stations
All components and associated materials and labor required for a complete installation of the
paging system shall be provided by the PIC unless otherwise stated in this document.
DRAWINGS
A.
Associated drawings are diagrammatic in nature and may not represent exact field conditions.
The PIC shall field-verify critical installation requirements and provide necessary associated
work.
B.
The locations of paging equipment and devices shown are approximate. The PIC shall, prior to
installation, verify exact locations by cross-checking architectural, electrical, and
communications drawings, field conditions and approved shop drawings.
C.
The PIC shall be prepared to relocate equipment or devices provided under this scope of work
when directed by the project team without cost, provided equipment has not been installed and
the new location is not greater than twenty five feet (25’) from the location originally shown.
D.
Installed devices shall be located at same height, and of same orientation, unless otherwise
noted.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings and product data of standard cataloged products shall be submitted with
applicable data that meet the job requirements. Submittals that include information on multiple
devices or equipment are acceptable only when items applicable to the job are identified with
arrows, check marks or other call outs. The PIC shall clearly identify which manufacturer
solutions are being proposed at the time of bid response.
B.
When shop drawings are created from or incorporated with Sentinel’s drawings, the PIC shall
remove the architect’s, engineer's, and Sentinel’s title blocks and replace it with the PIC’s own,
unique title block. The PIC’s title block shall include, at a minimum, the PIC's name, address
and telephone number, and the project name.
C.
Shop drawings of related equipment, devices and material shall be submitted at same time so
the project team can coordinate the related components.
D.
No material or equipment shall be released for manufacture or shipment without first obtaining
the approval of the project team. Only the PIC shall be responsible for costs and coordination of
returning items purchased prior to approval.
E.
The PIC shall submit three (3) hard copy submittals (for Sentinel, the GC’s records, and the
MEP engineer’s records) unless directed otherwise by the GC or the owner. One or all of these
three copies may be subject to approval, or rejection with commentary. Submittals may consist
of but not be limited to one or any appropriate combination of the following:
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 30 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
F.
1.7
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
1.
Manufacturer cut-sheets
2.
Shop drawings (including single-line diagrams)
3.
Catalog sheets
4.
Written specifications
5.
Originals or copies of the above
The submittals should be bound in a standard three-ring binder with a minimum of the PIC's
name, address and telephone number, and the project name.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials and labor provided by the PIC shall be of the highest quality.
B.
The PIC shall be certified to install the paging solutions that the PIC has proposed as specified
in this document.
C.
Only the highest grade components shall be considered, and all components shall be balanced
with each other from an electrical and performance characteristic standpoint.
D.
All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner according to generally accepted trade
practices.
E.
Appropriate union requirements shall be strictly followed and all PIC employees on site shall
have appropriate union licenses.
F.
All work to be performed by the PIC shall be coordinated with the other trades and the General
Contractor.
G.
The PIC shall conform and adhere to all job site requirements as defined by the General
Contractor. It is the responsibility of the PIC to obtain these requirements from the General
Contractor.
H.
All necessary permits are to be secured by the PIC.
I.
Appropriate levels of insurance and bonding shall be maintained. Certificates of Insurance may
be requested, and shall be provided at the PIC’s expense.
J.
Any variations to the installation of the paging system as described in this specification and the
associated project drawings shall be subject to the control and approval of the General
Contractor, CUSD 4 and Sentinel.
K.
Substitution of any materials specified in this document shall only be considered once a request
to do so has been submitted in writing to the General Contractor, CUSD 4 and Sentinel for prior
approval. This submittal shall discuss the scope of the change, the ramifications on the overall
paging cabling system and the advantages to be gained by CUSD 4.
L.
The PIC shall conform to the following standards when provisioning and installing the new
paging system:
1.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.1
(Including
all
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
2.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 (Including all current addenda),
Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard
3.
ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial Telecommunications
Cabling
4.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual (latest edition)
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
current
addenda),
Commercial
Balanced
Building
Twisted-Pair
27 30 00-3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
M.
1.8
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
5.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Information Transport
Systems Installation Manual (latest edition)
6.
ANSI/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces
7.
ANSI/TIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings
8.
ANSI-J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
9.
NEC 2008, National Electrical Code (where more stringent than local codes)
10.
All applicable local, county and state building and electrical codes with local addenda
11.
UL 444, Communication Cables, Published July, 2008
12.
FCC Part 68 Regulations
13.
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
First-Named Manufacturer
1.
Within these specifications and associated drawings, the first-named approved
manufacturer indicates that its respective device, equipment or system may have been
used to meet the job requirements and to determine the space and dimensional
requirements. The PIC’s use of another pre-approved system may require that the PIC
verify that the respective devices, equipment, systems or products will meet the job
requirements and will fit the allocated space.
2.
The listing of a manufacturer as acceptable or pre-approved does not in any way relieve
the PIC from the responsibility for providing devices, equipment or systems that meet the
requirements of the specifications. The PIC shall verify that performance requirements
are met, as no two manufacturers should be trusted as exactly identical in function, fit, or
finish.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
The PIC shall coordinate the arrangement, installation, and finishing of the paging system.
1.
Where a given component offers multiple color options, all such finishes shall be
coordinated with the architect.
2.
Any conduit, pathway, or sleeve requirements shall be coordinated with the MEP
engineer.
3.
The alignment and positioning of pull boxes, junction boxes, back boxes, conduit ends,
stubs, sleeves, etc., with PIC-installed devices.
4.
Any equipment cut into, mounted on, or suspended from architectural elements such as
walls or ceiling shall be coordinated with the architect to ensure there is no conflict with
design intent or functionality.
5.
Any other elements that might or will interfere with elements installed by other trades
shall be coordinated with the GC and those respective trades.
6.
Network-based devices requiring IP addresses shall be coordinated with CUSD 4, if any.
Conflicts requiring noticeable deviation from the associated project drawings or these
specifications shall be coordinated with Sentinel.
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 30 00-4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Fire stop systems shall be UL-listed or Factory Mutual approved. The PIC shall furnish and
install the proper fire stop system with classified products and materials compatible with the
appropriate penetrating elements, type of construction material and dimensions of the wall,
partition, barrier, or floor, and the environment and temperature range of both sides of the
opening. Fire stop systems shall maintain the original fire resistance rating of the wall, partition,
barrier, or floor prior to the penetration.
B.
Expansion type fire stop material shall be used where necessary to protect and close the
opening upon failure of the penetrating element due to fire.
C.
Fire stop penetrations in fire-rated walls and floors for sleeves, wiring, cables, conduits, ducts,
and cable trays.
D.
Fire stopping for openings through fire and smoke-rated walls and floor assemblies shall be
listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for “Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems.” The system shall meet the requirements of “Fire Tests of ThroughPenetration Firestops” designated ASTM E814.
E.
The PIC shall furnish and install systems fire tested by a third party according to ASTM E814 (or
UL 1479) tested under positive pressure.
F.
Provide only material combinations that are qualified by independent agencies based on the
material’s performance when tested in a particular configuration.
G.
Thickness of materials must be established by formal ASTM E814 or UL 1479 tests.
2.2
PAGE CONTROL
A.
The PIC shall furnish and install a rack-mount Valcom Class Connection page control to act as
a headend for the system.
B.
The page control shall consist of the following Valcom components:
2.3
1.
VE72TR-5 – Talkback Package
2.
V-SER – Serial Board
3.
VERCA – Remote Card Adapter
4.
V-CLK – Clock Control Interface Package
5.
VEADP – Administrative Telephone
6.
V-6120 – 6 Channel Amplifier
7.
VP-6124-UPS – Battery Backup
8.
VBB-1424 – Battery Box with Batteries
INTEGRATION SERVICES
A.
2.4
The PIC shall provide a patch cord for the page input port. Although the PIC shall connect this
patch cord into the paging system, the telephone system provider shall connect the other end of
the patch cord into the phone port (phone port provided by others).
POWER SUPPLY
A.
The PIC shall furnish and install a power supply in order to provide full power to all speakers in
all zones, so that all speakers in all zones function correctly.
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 30 00-5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
B.
Depending upon the paging system design, this can consist of the page control device as well
as augmented power supplies.
C.
All power supplies, whether internal or external, shall be located with the page control device.
2.5
SPEAKERS
A.
The PIC shall furnish and install a speaker for each location shown on the associated project
drawings.
B.
The speaker shall be a Valcom:
1.
V-2991-W – Call In Switch
2.
V-9933A – Noise Sensing Volume Control
3.
VC-9062 – 2’ x 2’ Lay-in Ceiling Speaker – Talk Back
4.
VE-9022 – 2’ x 2’ Lay-in Ceiling Speaker
5.
V-1090 – FlexHorn Speaker – Talk Back
C.
The paging speakers shall lay directly into the ceiling grid where possible. In areas where there
is not a ceiling grid the PIC shall provide an appropriate speaker that will provide the
functionality required at that location.
D.
The PIC shall furnish and install the appropriate bridge and backbox for each speaker based on
the ceiling type.
2.6
INTERCOM
A.
The PIC shall furnish and install an intercom system (refer to the drawings for type, placement,
and quantities.
B.
The intercom shall consist of a Viking:
a. W-3000-EWP – Doorbox
b. C-1000B – Universal Door Entry System
c. All necessary components to allow interface with the door locking mechanism
2.7
VOLUME CONTROLS
A.
The PIC shall furnish and install a wall-mounted volume control for each location shown on the
associated project drawings.
B.
The control shall consist of a Valcom V-1092 or equivalent.
2.8
WIRING
A.
The speaker and intercom wiring consist of plenum rated enhanced Category 5E UTP cabling.
B.
All wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s wiring instructions.
C.
Complete interconnection diagrams shall be provided by the PIC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FIRESTOPPING
A.
The PIC shall install fire stopping material in accordance with construction elements and
manufacturer specification.
B.
Thoroughly clean and remove any fire stopping material that drips or falls onto wall or floor
surfaces.
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 30 00-6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
C.
3.2
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
After installation, protect the fire stop material from damage during construction. If damage
occurs despite such protections, remove and replace fire stopping material as required to
restore the integrity of the fire rating.
ZONING
A.
3.3
CUSD 4 requires a zoned paging system as described in the associated drawings. The PIC
shall coordinate all zoning and bell scheduling requirements with CUSD 4 prior to system
installation.
HEADEND ASSEMBLY
A.
3.4
The PIC shall assemble the headend in accordance with manufacturer requirements and as
described in the project drawings.
GROUNDING
A.
Install all grounding components in compliance with the respective components’ manufacturer
requirements to ensure a continuous grounding system.
B.
The PIC shall install solid conductors for conductors #10 AWG or smaller, and stranded
conductors for #6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Use irreversible crimp and/or exothermic welds to form permanent grounding connections.
Equipment which may be removed in the future shall use the #12-24 slotted hex-head zincplated thread-forming screws in conjunction with paint-piercing washers against all painted
surfaces. The PIC shall remove paint as required to ensure a metal-to-metal contact.
D.
All conductors shall be routed along the straightest and shortest paths available, unless
otherwise indicated or required be Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where
they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
E.
All jumpers, straps, and other bonding components shall be installed in locations permitting
inspection and maintenance, except where routed through conduit.
F.
Install grounding systems and components so that vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted
equipment.
G.
There shall be no signal ground current paths.
3.5
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install all cabling in accordance with manufacturer requirements or this specification as noted
previously.
B.
All cabling not installed in conduit or conduit stubs shall be properly supported.
C.
Cable runs shall contain no splice or transition points from the endpoint to the source device
unless noted otherwise.
D.
All cables shall be installed such that the respective manufacturers’ recommended bend radius
for each cable type is not exceeded.
E.
The PIC shall be responsible for verifying the actual distances and voltage drops for each cable
run from one point to another.
F.
All paging cables shall be properly dressed, tied and trimmed.
G.
Cable pulling lubricants, where used, shall be approved by the cable manufacturer so that the
lubricating compound cannot deteriorate the cable jacket.
H.
Bridle rings or other equivalent supports shall be installed in areas where ducts, conduits or
cable trays are not available.
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 30 00-7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
I.
Cables shall never rest upon ceiling tiles, lighting fixtures, stud walls, or piping. All cables shall
be properly supported to prevent this, and shall be supported at a minimum of every ten feet to
reduce sag.
J.
Locations and routes of pathways shown on drawings are schematic and not necessarily
reflective of conditions at time of installation, or were positioned for clarity rather than exact
spacing, bending, or desired separation. The PIC shall review any and all such pathways shown
on the drawings to ensure that the proposed solution will function as intended with regard to
quantities, sizes, locations, etc.
K.
The PIC shall review the actual conduit plans proposed by the MEP or EC to ensure that
conduits intended for the paging system are correctly sized, adequately positioned, and have
the requisite number of pull boxes as required by the actual materials proposed by the PIC,
and/or as the PIC desires as optimal for installation. The PIC shall be responsible for any and all
costs associated with conduit changes resulting from failure to preview and approve the
pathways installed by others.
L.
The PIC shall protect all stored or installed materials as part of these systems before, during, or
after installation from damage caused by other trades until turnover and final acceptance. If
damage occurs despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the
entire unit(s) as required to provide a solution in an original, undamaged condition.
M.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before
installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
N.
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on the associated
project drawings.
O.
Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by
differing field conditions outside the control of the PIC, submit a request for information to the
GC according to the requirements specified in Division 01.
3.6
SPEAKER INSTALLATION
A.
Each speaker shall be set with an initial setting so that intelligibility is clear in a moderately noisy
environment.
B.
The PIC shall budget time to return the site after turnover to adjust individual speaker volumes
on a walkthrough with CUSD 4.
C.
Set volume controls to 50% after installation.
D.
Ensure that all zones are independently tested as well as “all call” testing.
E.
Ambient noise sensors, inputs from music, etc. shall be tested to ensure that they are
functioning as required.
3.7
COMMON WORK RESULTS
A.
Locations and routes of pathways shown on drawings are schematic and not necessarily
reflective of conditions at time of installation, or were positioned for clarity rather than exact
spacing, bending, or desired separation. The PIC shall review any and all such pathways shown
on the drawings to ensure that the proposed solution will function as intended with regard to
quantities, sizes, locations, etc.
B.
The PIC shall review the actual conduit plans proposed by the MEP or EC to ensure that
conduits intended for the paging system are correctly sized, adequately positioned, and have
the requisite number of pull boxes as required by the actual materials proposed by the PIC,
and/or as the PIC desires as optimal for installation. The PIC shall be responsible for any and all
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 30 00-8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
costs associated with conduit changes resulting from failure to preview and approve the
pathways installed by others.
C.
Install all materials in compliance with manufacturer’s written directions.
D.
The PIC shall protect all stored or installed materials as part of these systems before, during, or
after installation from damage caused by other trades until turnover and final acceptance. If
damage occurs despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the
entire unit(s) as required to provide a solution in an original, undamaged condition.
E.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before
installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
F.
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on the associated
project drawings.
G.
Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by
differing field conditions outside the control of the PIC, submit a request for information to
according to the requirements specified in Division 01.
3.8
PAGING SYSTEM TESTING
A.
All devices shall be tested for correct functionality as recommended by the respective
manufacturer.
B.
All wiring shall be tested for wiremap, where applicable, and continuity.
3.9
PAGING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.10
The PIC shall thoroughly label the entire paging system for future maintainability.
1.
All wires and cables shall be labeled at both ends.
2.
Labels shall meet the legibility, exposure defacement and adhesion requirements of
UL969.
3.
Labels shall be preprinted or printed by a computer. Labels written by hand are not
acceptable.
4.
Each label shall feature the next device connected at the other end of the cable.
5.
This identification should be listed twice on each label: once on the left side, and once on
the right side. When the center of the label is placed on the wire and the two adhesive
ends of the label are connected, the identification then appears on each side of the label.
The intent of this practice is that a technician can easily read the label regardless of how
it enters, lies, or crosses into the device.
PAGING SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
A.
The PIC shall thoroughly document the entire paging system for future maintainability and
troubleshooting.
B.
Documentation shall include but not be limited to:
1.
AutoCAD or PDF scale drawings of the project (backgrounds available from Sentinel)
clearly showing:
a.
Precise device locations and identification numbers
b.
Approximate pathways of horizontal cable runs to their nearest points of
termination
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 30 00-9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.11
DIVISION 27 – PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
27 30 00 – Common Work Results
c.
Precise locations of installed pull boxes, junction boxes, and enclosures related to
any security conduits that may be installed
d.
Conduit sizes for any conduit above three quarter inch (3/4”) in size (if used)
e.
Detailed elevation views of any wall-mounted equipment, including but not limited
to control panels and head end cabinets
f.
Single line diagrams
2.
Product cut sheets, shop drawings, etc., as outlined in this Section.
3.
Documentation shall be submitted to CUSD 4 prior to final payment.
CUTOVER SERVICES
A.
At closeout, clean or re-clean entire work to normal level for "first class" maintenance/cleaning
of building projects of a similar nature. Remove non-permanent protection and labels, clean
exposed finishes, touch-up minor finish damage, remove debris and broom-clean spaces,
sanitize work, and perform similar cleanup operations needed to produce a clean condition
B.
The PIC shall turn over all operations and maintenance manuals in the quantities and formats
directed by the GC. The PIC should expect to provide one paper copy for each type of device,
and electronic versions on disc to reduce paper usage.
C.
Provide 2 hours of instruction each for two persons, to be conducted at installation site, in the
use of the paging system.
D.
The PIC shall coordinate all training with CUSD 4 to determine the extent, duration, and
schedule of the training session. CUSD 4 will be responsible to identify which of their individuals
must attend training prior to scheduling. Ultimately, CUSD 4 will determine the dates and
sessions at their convenience.
3.12
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY
A.
The PIC shall repair or replace all defective equipment or workmanship (with no cost to CUSD
4) for a period of one (1) year from the date of turnover.
B.
Any and all equipment furnished as part of this installation shall be warranted for parts and labor
for one (1) year or the entire span of the respective manufacturer’s warranty (whichever is
longer).
C.
The PIC shall respond to any reports of defective system performance by CUSD 4 within fortyeight (48) business hours. The PIC shall respond by assessing and diagnosing the problem.
The time to repair or replace any defective item covered by the warranty shall be no longer than
is required to receive replacement parts plus forty-eight (48) hours.
D.
The PIC shall provide a minimum of one (1) service visit to the site for inspection, cleaning, and
adjustment of the equipment during the year-long warranty period. These shall be scheduled
with CUSD 4 prior to each visit so that questions or follow up issues can be gathered and
presented, if and where necessary. The PIC shall deliver to CUSD 4 all documentation outlining
the terms and conditions of the warranty.
E.
The PIC shall provide pricing for optional service contracts that would extend the warranty
period of the installation. Terms shall include any and all benefits of their warranty.
END OF SECTION
DISTRIBUTED PAGING AND INTERCOM SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 30 00-10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
27 50 00 – Common Work Results
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Champaign CUSD 4 (CUSD 4) requires the provision and installation of interactive whiteboard
with integrated projectors and the re-installation of existing interactive whiteboards and
projectors for the renovation and addition to the Kenwood Elementary School located at 101
South Stratford Street in Champaign, Illinois.
B.
This section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution
of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
C.
1.3
1.
Common work results for audiovisual systems
2.
Firestopping for audiovisual systems
Related Sections:
1.
Division 01 Sections pertaining to project management, coordination, jobsite safety and
requirements, operation and maintenance requirements, and closeout procedures.
2.
Division 26 Sections related to raceways, conduits, and electrical boxes.
3.
Division 27 Sections related to communications cabling systems
DEFINITIONS
A.
AVIC: Audiovisual Installation Contractor
B.
CIC: Cabling Installation Contractor
C.
GC: General Contractor
D.
EC: Electrical Installation Contractor
E.
ECIC: Emergency Communications Contractor
F.
MEP: Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing
G.
PIC: Paging Installation Contractor
H.
SIC: Security Installation Contractor
1.4
SCOPE
A.
Champaign CUSD 4 is renovating and expanding the Kenwood Elementary School. The AVIC
shall furnish and install interactive whiteboards (Smartboards) in the classrooms as indicated on
the AV-series drawings. In addition, the AVIC shall remove the existing interactive whiteboards
and re-install them upon completion of the renovation work.
B.
The new interactive whiteboards shall consist of components from Smart and the projector shall
consist of components from Epson with the appropriate short-throw lens. The AVIC can
propose a system based on components from another manufacturer. If the AVIC chooses to
propose an alternative, the AVIC shall ensure that this alternative can meet the performance
and functionality of the Smart and Epson components.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 50 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 50 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
C.
All components (source, audio, video, control, cable) and associated materials and labor
required for a complete installation of the audiovisual system shall be provided by the AVIC
unless otherwise stated in this document.
D.
Due care and diligence has been used in preparation of this information, and it is believed to be
substantially correct. However, the responsibility for determining the full extent of exposure and
the verification of all information presented herein shall rest solely with the CIC. CUSD 4,
Sentinel Technologies, and any other representatives will not be responsible for any errors or
omissions in these specifications, nor for the failure on the part of the CIC to determine the full
extent of the exposures.
E.
The CIC shall not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions in these
specifications and associated project drawings. Where errors or omissions appear in these
specifications or drawings, the CIC shall promptly notify Sentinel Technologies in writing of such
errors or omissions. Any significant errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the specifications
shall be reported no later than five (5) days before the submission deadline. CUSD 4, Sentinel
Technologies, and any other representatives will not be responsible for errors that go
undiscovered.
1.5
DRAWINGS
A.
Associated drawings are diagrammatic in nature and may not represent exact field conditions.
The AVIC shall field-verify critical installation requirements and provide necessary associated
work.
B.
The locations of audiovisual equipment and devices shown are approximate. The AVIC shall,
prior to installation, verify exact locations by cross-checking architectural, electrical, and
communications drawings, field conditions and approved shop drawings.
C.
The AVIC shall be prepared to relocate equipment or devices provided under this scope of work
when directed by the project team without cost, provided equipment has not been installed and
the new location is not greater than twenty five feet (25’) from the location originally shown.
D.
Installed devices shall be located at same height, and of same orientation, unless otherwise
noted.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings and product data of standard cataloged products shall be submitted with
applicable data that meet the job requirements. Submittals that include information on multiple
devices or equipment are acceptable only when items applicable to the job are identified with
arrows, check marks or other call outs. The AVIC shall clearly identify which manufacturer
solutions are being proposed at the time of bid response.
B.
When shop drawings are created from or incorporated with Sentinel’s drawings, the AVIC shall
remove the architect’s, engineer's, and Sentinel’s title blocks and replace it with the AVIC’s own,
unique title block. The AVIC’s title block shall include, at a minimum, the AVIC's name, address
and telephone number, and the project name.
C.
Shop drawings of related equipment, devices and material shall be submitted at same time so
the project team can coordinate the related components.
D.
No material or equipment shall be released for manufacture or shipment without first obtaining
the approval of the project team. Only the AVIC shall be responsible for costs and coordination
of returning items purchased prior to approval.
E.
The AVIC shall submit three (3) hard copy submittals (for Sentinel, the GC’s records, and the
MEP engineer’s records) unless directed otherwise by the GC or the owner. One or all of these
three copies may be subject to approval, or rejection with commentary. Submittals may consist
of but not be limited to one or any appropriate combination of the following:
1.
Manufacturer cut-sheets
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 50 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 50 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
2.
Shop drawings (including single-line diagrams)
F.
1.7
3.
Catalog sheets
4.
Written specifications
5.
Originals or copies of the above
The submittals should be bound in a standard three-ring binder with a minimum of the AVIC's
name, address and telephone number, and the project name.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials and labor provided by the AVIC shall be of the highest quality.
B.
The AVIC shall be certified to install the audiovisual solutions that the AVIC has proposed as
specified in this document.
C.
Only the highest grade components shall be considered, and all components shall be balanced
with each other from an electrical and performance characteristic standpoint.
D.
All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner according to generally accepted trade
practices.
E.
Appropriate union requirements shall be strictly followed and all AVIC employees on site shall
have appropriate union licenses.
F.
All work to be performed by the AVIC shall be coordinated with the other trades and the General
Contractor.
G.
The AVIC shall conform and adhere to all job site requirements as defined by the General
Contractor. It is the responsibility of the AVIC to obtain these requirements from the General
Contractor.
H.
All necessary permits are to be secured by the AVIC.
I.
Appropriate levels of insurance and bonding shall be maintained. Certificates of Insurance may
be requested, and shall be provided at the AVIC’s expense.
J.
Any variations to the installation of the audiovisual system as described in this specification and
the associated project drawings shall be subject to the control and approval of the General
Contractor, CUSD 4 and Sentinel.
K.
Substitution of any materials specified in this document shall only be considered once a request
to do so has been submitted in writing to the General Contractor, CUSD 4 and Sentinel for prior
approval. This submittal shall discuss the scope of the change, the ramifications on the overall
audiovisual systems and the advantages to be gained by CUSD 4.
L.
The AVIC shall conform to the following standards when provisioning and installing the new
audiovisual system:
1.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) AV Design Reference Manual
(AVDRM) (latest edition)
2.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.1
(Including
all
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
3.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 (Including all current addenda),
Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard
4.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 (Including all current addenda), Optical Fiber Cabling Components
Standard
5.
ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial Telecommunications
Cabling
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
current
addenda),
Commercial
Balanced
Building
Twisted-Pair
27 50 00-3
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 50 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
6.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual (latest edition)
M.
1.8
7.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Information Transport
Systems Installation Manual (latest edition)
8.
ANSI/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces
9.
ANSI/TIA-526-14, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable
Plant
10.
ANSI/TIA-526-7, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable
Plant
11.
ANSI/TIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings
12.
ANSI-J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
13.
NEC 2008, National Electrical Code (where more stringent than local codes)
14.
All applicable local, county and state building and electrical codes with local addenda
15.
UL 444, Communication Cables, Published July, 2008
16.
FCC Part 68 Regulations
17.
IEEE 802.3, Ethernet Standard
18.
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
First-Named Manufacturer
1.
Within these specifications and associated drawings, the first-named approved
manufacturer indicates that its respective device, equipment or system may have been
used to meet the job requirements and to determine the space and dimensional
requirements. The AVIC’s use of another pre-approved system may require that the AVIC
verify that the respective devices, equipment, systems or products will meet the job
requirements and will fit the allocated space.
2.
The listing of a manufacturer as acceptable or pre-approved does not in any way relieve
the AVIC from the responsibility for providing devices, equipment or systems that meet
the requirements of the specifications. The AVIC shall verify that performance
requirements are met, as no two manufacturers should be trusted as exactly identical in
function, fit, or finish.
COORDINATION
A.
The AVIC shall coordinate the arrangement, installation, and finishing of the audiovisual system.
1.
Where a given component offers multiple color options, all such finishes shall be
coordinated with the architect.
2.
Any conduit, pathway, or sleeve requirements shall be coordinated with the MEP
engineer.
3.
The alignment and positioning of pull boxes, junction boxes, back boxes, conduit ends,
stubs, sleeves, etc., with AVIC-installed devices.
4.
Any equipment cut into, mounted on, or suspended from architectural elements such as
walls or ceiling shall be coordinated with the architect to ensure there is no conflict with
design intent or functionality.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 50 00-4
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 50 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
5.
Any other elements that might or will interfere with elements installed by other trades
shall be coordinated with the GC and those respective trades.
6.
B.
Network-based devices requiring IP addresses shall be coordinated with CUSD 4.
Conflicts requiring noticeable deviation from the associated project drawings or these
specifications shall be coordinated with Sentinel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Fire stop systems shall be UL-listed or Factory Mutual approved. The AVIC shall furnish and
install the proper fire stop system with classified products and materials compatible with the
appropriate penetrating elements, type of construction material and dimensions of the wall,
partition, barrier, or floor, and the environment and temperature range of both sides of the
opening. Fire stop systems shall maintain the original fire resistance rating of the wall, partition,
barrier, or floor prior to the penetration.
B.
Expansion type fire stop material shall be used where necessary to protect and close the
opening upon failure of the penetrating element due to fire.
C.
Fire stop penetrations in fire-rated walls and floors for sleeves, wiring, cables, conduits, ducts,
and cable trays.
D.
Fire stopping for openings through fire and smoke-rated walls and floor assemblies shall be
listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for “Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems.” The system shall meet the requirements of “Fire Tests of ThroughPenetration Firestops” designated ASTM E814.
E.
The AVIC shall furnish and install systems fire tested by a third party according to ASTM E814
(or UL 1479) tested under positive pressure.
F.
Provide only material combinations that are qualified by independent agencies based on the
material’s performance when tested in a particular configuration.
G.
Thickness of materials must be established by formal ASTM E814 or UL 1479 tests.
2.2
AUDIOVISUAL CABLING
A.
The AVIC shall furnish and install all audiovisual-related wiring and cabling for all components
described herein, except for those cable or wiring runs that will be furnished and installed by
others. Runs installed by others will be clearly noted within these specifications.
B.
Where the AVIC is to furnish and install cabling, all manufacturers’ respective requirements
shall be met. Where manufacturer requirements differ from any requirements provided within
this specification, the more stringent of the two shall be followed.
C.
The wiring and cabling shall be non-plenum-rated.
2.3
CABLE AND WIRE RACEWAYS
A.
The AVIC shall furnish and install all raceways dedicated to the audiovisual system. These shall
consist of surface-mount raceway with detachable covers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FIRESTOPPING
A.
The AVIC shall install fire stopping material in accordance with construction elements and
manufacturer specification.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 50 00-5
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 50 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
B.
Thoroughly clean and remove any fire stopping material that drips or falls onto wall or floor
surfaces.
C.
3.2
After installation, protect the fire stop material from damage during construction. If damage
occurs despite such protections, remove and replace fire stopping material as required to
restore the integrity of the fire rating.
AUDIOVISUAL CABLING
A.
Install all cabling in accordance with manufacturer requirements or this specification as noted
previously.
B.
Follow all labeling and bundling requirements as defined in Section 275700.
C.
All cabling not installed in conduit or conduit stubs shall be properly supported.
D.
Cable runs shall contain no splice or transition points from the endpoint to the source unless
noted otherwise.
E.
All cables shall be installed such that the respective manufacturers’ recommended bend radius
for each cable type is not exceeded.
F.
The AVIC shall be responsible for verifying the actual distances and voltage drops for each
cable run from one point to another.
G.
All audiovisual cables shall be properly dressed, tied and trimmed.
H.
Where applicable, all cable ends shall be wrapped with shrink tubing and each shield or drain
wire shall be sheathed in clear tubing.
I.
All cabling and wiring shall be grouped and bundled according to the signal level in all
enclosures and racks. Velcro® wraps shall be used in lieu of plastic tie wraps.
1.
Cabling carrying speaker-level signals (+24dBu or higher) shall be kept separate from all
other groups.
2.
Cabling carrying microphone-level signals shall be kept separated from all other groups
3.
Cabling carrying line-level or intercom audio signals shall be kept separated from all other
groups.
4.
Video cabling, HDMI, signals traveling over UTP, control system wiring, etc., may be
grouped together.
J.
Audiovisual cabling shall be kept physically separated from power cabling, whether or not the
cabling travels in conduits: power and signal shall be kept physically separated below tables,
within credenzas, inside racks, and so on.
K.
Inspect for and replace all wires and cables suffering from deformed, brittle, or cracked
insulation, stripping in excess of 1/8-inch from point of connection, cold solder joints, flux joints,
solder splatter, un-grommetted, un-bushed, or un-insulated wire or cable entries, deformation or
improper radius bending.
L.
Shielded cables shall be insulated, and shields shall be prevented from any contact with
conduit, raceways, boxes, panels, or equipment enclosures.
M.
Service loops shall be used at all equipment termination points to allow for ease of installation,
cleaning, service, inspection, and modification.
N.
Cable pulling lubricants, where used, shall be approved by the cable manufacturer so that the
lubricating compound cannot deteriorate the cable jacket.
O.
Bridle rings or other equivalent supports shall be installed in areas where ducts, conduits or
cable trays are not available.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 50 00-6
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 50 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
P.
Cables shall never rest upon ceiling tiles, lighting fixtures, stud walls, or piping. All cables shall
be properly supported to prevent this, and shall be supported at a minimum of every ten feet to
reduce sag.
Q.
Locations and routes of pathways shown on drawings are schematic and not necessarily
reflective of conditions at time of installation, or were positioned for clarity rather than exact
spacing, bending, or desired separation. The AVIC shall review any and all such pathways
shown on the drawings to ensure that the proposed solution will function as intended with
regard to quantities, sizes, locations, etc.
R.
The AVIC shall review the actual conduit plans proposed by the MEP or EC to ensure that
conduits intended for the audiovisual cabling system are correctly sized, adequately positioned,
and have the requisite number of pull boxes as required by the actual materials proposed by the
AVIC, and/or as the AVIC desires as optimal for installation. The AVIC shall be responsible for
any and all costs associated with conduit changes resulting from failure to preview and approve
the pathways installed by others.
S.
The AVIC shall protect all stored or installed materials as part of these systems before, during,
or after installation from damage caused by other trades until turnover and final acceptance. If
damage occurs despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the
entire unit(s) as required to provide a solution in an original, undamaged condition.
T.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before
installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
U.
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on the associated
project drawings.
V.
Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by
differing field conditions outside the control of the AVIC, submit a request for information to the
GC according to the requirements specified in Division 01.
3.3
CABLE AND WIRE RACEWAYS
A.
All raceways shall be securely mounted to the wall or plywood surface with screws. Screws not
placed directly into studs shall be rated for gypsum wallboard support.
B.
All horizontally run raceway segments shall be perfectly level.
C.
All vertically run raceway segments shall be perfectly vertical.
D.
After cables and wires have been inserted, raceway covers shall be attached.
E.
The exterior surfaces of the covers shall be cleaned and free of dust by turnover.
3.4
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INSTALLATION
A.
Locations and routes of pathways shown on drawings are schematic and not necessarily
reflective of conditions at time of installation, or were positioned for clarity rather than exact
spacing, bending, or desired separation. The AVIC shall review any and all such pathways
shown on the drawings to ensure that the proposed solution will function as intended with
regard to quantities, sizes, locations, etc.
B.
The AVIC shall review the actual conduit plans proposed by the MEP or EC to ensure that
conduits intended for the audiovisual system are correctly sized, adequately positioned, and
have the requisite number of pull boxes as required by the actual materials proposed by the
AVIC, and/or as the AVIC desires as optimal for installation. The AVIC shall be responsible for
any and all costs associated with conduit changes resulting from failure to preview and approve
the pathways installed by others.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 50 00-7
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 50 00 – Common Work Results
1009/4010.01
C.
Install all materials in compliance with manufacturer’s written directions.
D.
The AVIC shall protect all stored or installed materials as part of these systems before, during,
or after installation from damage caused by other trades until turnover and final acceptance. If
damage occurs despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the
entire unit(s) as required to provide a solution in an original, undamaged condition.
E.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before
installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
F.
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on the associated
project drawings.
G.
Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by
differing field conditions outside the control of the AVIC, submit a request for information to
according to the requirements specified in Division 01.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 50 00-8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
27 51 00 – Interactive Whiteboard Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes all audiovisual work to be done in rooms where interactive white boards
are indicated.
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The AVIC shall furnish and install interactive white board systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 275000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The AVIC shall determine where to place any wall-mounted components to ensure they do not
conflict with any architectural or engineering details.
B.
The AVIC shall coordinate with the architect and other trades to ensure that any devices
mounted to or above the ceiling will not conflict with any systems, equipment, or elements
above the ceiling.
C.
The AVIC shall coordinate with the EC to review any and all conduit and wiring pathway
requirements.
D.
The AVIC shall coordinate with CUSD 4 and Sentinel to confirm final equipment placement
within the room.
E.
The AVIC shall work with the technology department at CUSD 4 to finalize any network
requirements, IP addresses, and access information as required to install the audiovisual
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
The AVIC shall furnish and install the following components. It is the AVIC’s responsibility to
determine the exact quantities of components that are required for a fully functional system,
whether or not those components are listed below:
SMART Board and Projector
a. SMART – SBD680 Dual Touch
b. SMART – Wall Mount Frame
c. Epson – PowerLite 420
d. Epson – ELPMB27 Short Throw Wall Mount
e. VGA Cabling
f. USB Cabling
INTERACTIVE WHITEBOARD SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 51 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
27 51 00 – Interactive Whiteboard Systems
GENERAL
A.
All components shall be installed true and level to the wall-surface, as shown in the attached
drawings.
B.
Wiring shall be neatly dressed and unnecessary slack eliminated; some slack is necessary and
desirable, but shall be neatly routed to prevent obvious and visible cable sag between
components. The AVIC may use Velcro-type or rings where required.
C.
All components shall be grounded and installed according to manufacturer requirements.
D.
Verify that all components work as required by this specification in accordance with
manufacturer intent.
E.
After installation, protect the equipment from damage during construction. If damage occurs
despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the entire system as
required to provide a working system in its original, undamaged condition.
END OF SECTION
INTERACTIVE WHITEBOARD SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 51 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
27 57 00 – Testing, Identification, and Administration Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Audiovisual system testing
2.
Audiovisual identification and labeling
3.
Audiovisual systems administration
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The AVIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the specifications and requirements for the testing, identification and
administration of the audiovisual systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 275000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM TESTING
A.
2.2
Review all testing requirements as described in this specification for each type of product listed.
AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A.
Labels shall meet the legibility, exposure defacement and adhesion requirements of UL969.
B.
Labels shall be preprinted or printed by a computer. Labels written by hand are not acceptable.
2.3
AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
A.
The AVIC shall provide records drawings in an AutoCAD compatible format or in PDF format.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM TESTING
A.
All devices shall be tested for correct functionality as recommended by the respective
manufacturer.
B.
All wiring shall be tested for wiremap, where applicable, and continuity.
C.
Inspect for and replace all wires and cables suffering from deformed, brittle, or cracked
insulation, stripping in excess of 1/8-inch from point of connection, cold solder joints, flux joints,
solder splatter, un-grommetted, un-bushed, or un-insulated wire or cable entries, deformation or
improper radius bending.
3.2
AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A.
The AVIC shall thoroughly label the entire audiovisual system for future maintainability.
TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 57 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 57 00 – Testing, Identification, and Administration Requirements
1009/4010.01
1.
Each device shall be given a unique identifier and labeled accordingly.
2.
B.
3.3
All references to this device in AVIC-prepared documentation, drawings, and labels shall
be consistent, except:
a.
O&M manuals or generic documentation
b.
Training materials, which should use “device friendly names”
c.
Control system interfaces should also use “device friendly names”
3.
A “device friendly name” is one that the typical user can easily identify, such as
“conference room display” or “auditorium projector.” The use of manufacturer names
and/or model numbers is strongly discouraged.
4.
Records drawings shall indicate the device identifier, and be in agreement between the
drawings and the labels on the equipment or labels.
All wires and cables shall be labeled at both ends.
1.
Each label shall feature the next device connected at the other end of the cable.
2.
This identification should be listed twice on each label: once on the left side, and once on
the right side. When the center of the label is placed on the wire and the two adhesive
ends of the label are connected, the identification then appears on each side of the label.
The intent of this practice is that a technician can easily read the label regardless of how
it enters, lies, or crosses into the device.
AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
A.
The AVIC shall thoroughly document the entire audiovisual system for future maintainability and
troubleshooting.
B.
Documentation shall include but not be limited to:
1.
AutoCAD or PDF scale drawings of the project (backgrounds available from Sentinel)
clearly showing:
a.
Precise device locations and identification numbers
b.
Approximate pathways of horizontal cable runs to their nearest points of
termination
c.
Precise locations of installed pull boxes, junction boxes, and enclosures related to
any security conduits that may be installed
d.
Conduit sizes for any conduit above three quarter inch (3/4”) in size (if used)
e.
Detailed elevation views of any wall-mounted equipment, including but not limited
to control panels and headend cabinets
f.
Single line diagrams
g.
Compiled and non-compiled code and programming
2.
Product cut sheets, shop drawings, etc., as outlined in 275000.
3.
Documentation shall be submitted to CUSD 4 prior to final payment.
END OF SECTION
TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 57 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
27 58 00 – Cutover, Demonstration, and Training Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Cutover services
2.
Final acceptance demonstration
3.
Training services
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The AVIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the specifications and requirements for the cutover of the audiovisual
systems and subsequent user training
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 281000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The AVIC shall coordinate the date of the acceptance demonstration with CUSD 4 and Sentinel,
as well as which personnel should be present.
B.
The AVIC shall coordinate all training with CUSD 4 to determine the extent, duration, and
schedule of the training session.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CUTOVER SERVICES
A.
By design of the project schedule, CUSD 4 understands and expects that not all audiovisual
systems or services may be undergoing final installation, configuration, refinement, or testing by
the date of their occupancy. Therefore, prior to CUSD 4’s occupancy of the facility, the AVIC
shall issue a detailed list to Sentinel of any and all systems which will not be fully operational by
the move-in date, as well as an expected date of completion.
B.
The AVIC shall be available for on-site support during and immediately after start-up for a
period of 2 business days.
C.
The AVIC shall turn over all operations and maintenance manuals in the quantities and formats
directed by the GC. The AVIC should expect to provide one paper copy for each type of device,
and electronic versions on disc to reduce paper usage.
D.
Code and programming for the control systems, device drivers, patches, upgrades, etc., shall
be submitted on compact disc. All discs for product software, backups, etc., shall be submitted
in a single binder designed to hold compact discs or DVDs and labeled clearly.
CUTOVER, DEMONSTRATION, AND TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 58 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 58 00 – Cutover, Demonstration, and Training Requirements
1009/4010.01
2.2
FINAL ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATION
A.
The AVIC shall, after cutover, be prepared to provide a final acceptance demonstration to
CUSD 4 that shall demonstrate and prove that all goals of the specification and design intent
have been met, except where and if modified by the project team and the AVIC during
installation.
B.
The demonstration must be scheduled at a date mutually agreeable to CUSD 4 and the AVIC,
as audiovisual systems may, by design of the overall project schedule, still undergo final testing
and configuration after the official date of turnover.
C.
The demonstration shall be substantive, but not exhaustive. Basic functionality and capabilities
shall be demonstrated; however, this is not intended to be a training session.
D.
CUSD 4 personnel shall determine which features must be demonstrated on demand during the
presentation. The AVIC shall not be responsible to demonstrate any requests which were never
part of this specification or any documented discussions during installation.
E.
The AVIC will not be expected to demonstrate an incomplete or partially installed system.
F.
Items which are incomplete, or fail to operate as expected, or lack final control programming,
during the demonstration will be noted. A follow-up demonstration must be scheduled solely for
these items.
2.3
TRAINING SESSIONS
A.
The AVIC shall provide training for CUSD 4 personnel to ensure knowledge transfer regarding
documentation and operation of the audiovisual systems. This may consist of multiple training
sessions depending on CUSD 4’s requirements near cutover.
B.
CUSD 4 will be responsible to identify which of their individuals must attend training prior to
scheduling. Ultimately, CUSD 4 will determine the dates and sessions at their convenience,
provided the system has undergone final acceptance demonstration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CUTOVER SERVICES
A.
3.2
At closeout, clean or re-clean entire work to normal level for "first class" maintenance/cleaning
of building projects of a similar nature. Remove non-permanent protection and labels, clean
exposed finishes, touch-up minor finish damage, remove debris and broom-clean spaces,
sanitize work, and perform similar cleanup operations needed to produce a clean condition
FINAL ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATION
A.
At this time, the AVIC shall turnover all microphones, remote control devices, keys to locked
equipment, and any and all items stored by the AVIC for safekeeping, as previously defined in
this specification.
B.
The AVIC shall be available or on-call with a 2-hour response time for 2 business days after the
audiovisual system is certified in order to investigate and repair any components of the system
that do not function properly.
3.3
TRAINING SESSIONS
A.
The AVIC shall provide a programming as well as a training session with the appropriate CUSD
4 staff to explain and orient the staff in the use and maintenance of the audiovisual system:
1.
Operation of the interactive whiteboard system.
END OF SECTION
CUTOVER, DEMONSTRATION, AND TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 58 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
27 59 00 – Support and Warranty Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes the support and warranty of the audiovisual system.
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The AVIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the specifications and requirements for the support and warranty of the
audiovisual system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 281000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY
A.
The audiovisual system shall be end-to-end certified by the AVIC.
B.
An extended material, labor and performance warranty shall be provided by the installer for
period of at least one (1) year.
C.
The AVIC shall provide ongoing support for warranty work as well as modifications and
enhancements that may be required as part of that warranty.
D.
The AVIC shall provide pricing for optional service contracts that would extend the warranty
period of the installation. Terms shall include any and all benefits of their warranty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY
A.
The AVIC shall repair or replace all defective equipment or workmanship (with no cost to CUSD
4) for a period of one (1) year from the date of the acceptance demonstration, regardless of
when the equipment was originally purchased or workmanship performed by the AVIC. The
commencement date of the warranty shall begin and only begin with the acceptance
demonstration.
B.
Any and all equipment furnished as part of this installation shall be warranted for parts and labor
for one (1) year or the entire span of the respective manufacturer’s warranty (whichever is
longer).
C.
The AVIC shall respond to any reports of defective system performance by CUSD 4 within fortyeight (48) business hours. The AVIC shall respond by assessing and diagnosing the problem.
The time to repair or replace any defective item covered by the warranty shall be no longer than
is required to receive replacement parts plus forty-eight (48) hours.
D.
The AVIC shall provide a minimum of four (4) service visits to the site for inspection, cleaning,
and adjustment of the equipment during the year-long warranty period. These shall be
scheduled with CUSD 4 prior to each visit so that questions or follow up issues can be gathered
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 59 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
DIVISION 27 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
Renovation and Addition
27 59 00 – Support and Warranty Requirements
1009/4010.01
and presented, if and where necessary. The AVIC shall deliver to CUSD 4 all documentation
outlining the terms and conditions of the warranty.
END OF SECTION
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
27 59 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 10 00 – Common Work Results
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Champaign CUSD 4 (CUSD 4) requires the provision and installation of a new physical security
system for the renovation and addition to the Kenwood Elementary School located at 101 South
Stratford Street in Champaign, Illinois
B.
This section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution
of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
C.
1.3
1.
Common work results for security systems
2.
Firestopping for security systems
Related Sections:
1.
Division 01 Sections pertaining to project management, coordination, jobsite safety and
requirements, operation and maintenance requirements, and closeout procedures.
2.
Division 26 Sections related to raceways, conduits, and electrical boxes.
3.
Division 27 Sections related to communications cabling systems
DEFINITIONS
A.
AVIC: Audiovisual Installation Contractor
B.
CIC: Cabling Installation Contractor
C.
GC: General Contractor
D.
EC: Electrical Installation Contractor
E.
ECIC: Emergency Communications Contractor
F.
MEP: Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing
G.
PIC: Paging Installation Contractor
H.
SIC: Security Installation Contractor
1.4
SCOPE
A.
Champaign CUSD 4 is renovating and expanding the Kenwood Elementary School. A card
access system and motion detectors are required to secure key entrances to the building and to
detect intruders when the alarm system (alarm system provided and installed by others) is
activated. The SIC shall coordinate with the alarm system company to ensure connectivity
between the access control system and motion detectors to the alarm company panel. In
addition, a surveillance camera will be required in the entry vestibule and the image from the
camera display on a monitor at the reception desk.
B.
The SIC shall furnish and install a new physical security system including the following
components:
1.
Access control system, including headend, card readers, and door controls
2.
An intrusion detection system
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 10 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 10 00 – Common Work Results
Programming coordination services
C.
All cable, associated materials and labor required for a complete installation of the physical
security system shall be provided by the SIC unless otherwise stated in this document.
D.
The SIC shall remove all previously installed and abandoned security cabling and wiring before
the installation of new cabling takes place. This may consist of abandoned security cabling not
removed during demolition as well as any temporary cabling installed by the SIC as part of the
installation.
E.
Due care and diligence has been used in preparation of this information, and it is believed to be
substantially correct. However, the responsibility for determining the full extent of exposure and
the verification of all information presented herein shall rest solely with the SIC. CUSD 4,
Sentinel Technologies, and any other representatives will not be responsible for any errors or
omissions in these specifications, nor for the failure on the part of the SIC to determine the full
extent of the exposures.
F.
The SIC shall not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions in these
specifications and associated project drawings. Where errors or omissions appear in these
specifications or drawings, the SIC shall promptly notify Sentinel Technologies in writing of such
errors or omissions. Any significant errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the specifications
shall be reported no later than five (5) days before the submission deadline. CUSD 4, Sentinel
Technologies, and any other representatives will not be responsible for errors that go
undiscovered.
1.5
DRAWINGS
A.
Associated drawings are diagrammatic in nature and may not represent exact field conditions.
The SIC shall field-verify critical installation requirements and provide necessary associated
work.
B.
The locations of security equipment and devices shown are approximate. The SIC shall, prior
to installation, verify exact locations by cross-checking security, architectural, electrical, and
communications drawings, field conditions and approved shop drawings.
C.
The SIC shall be prepared to relocate equipment or devices provided under this scope of work
when directed by the project team without cost, provided equipment has not been installed and
the new location is not greater than twenty five feet (25’) from the location originally shown.
D.
Installed devices shall be located at same height, and of same orientation, unless otherwise
noted.
E.
Wiring, signal and control devices, where provided, shall be flush-mounted in finished areas.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings and product data of standard cataloged products shall be submitted with
applicable data that meet the job requirements. Submittals that include information on multiple
devices or equipment are acceptable only when items applicable to the job are identified with
arrows, check marks or other call outs. The SIC shall clearly identify which manufacturer
solutions are being proposed at the time of bid response.
B.
When shop drawings are created from or incorporated with Sentinel’s drawings, the SIC shall
remove the architect’s, engineer's, and Sentinel’s title blocks and replace it with the SIC’s own,
unique title block. The SIC’s title block shall include, at a minimum, the SIC's name, address
and telephone number, and the project name.
C.
Shop drawings of related equipment, devices and material shall be submitted at same time so
the project team can coordinate the related components.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 10 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 10 00 – Common Work Results
D.
No material or equipment shall be released for manufacture or shipment without first obtaining
the approval of the project team. Only the SIC shall be responsible for costs and coordination of
returning items purchased prior to approval.
E.
The SIC shall submit three (3) hard copy submittals (for Sentinel, the GC’s records, and the
MEP engineer’s records) unless directed otherwise by the GC or the owner. One or all of these
three copies may be subject to approval, or rejection with commentary. Submittals may consist
of but not be limited to one or any appropriate combination of the following:
F.
1.7
1.
Manufacturer cut-sheets
2.
Shop drawings (including single-line diagrams)
3.
Catalog sheets
4.
Written specifications
5.
Originals or copies of the above
The submittals should be bound in a standard three-ring binder with a minimum of the SIC's
name, address and telephone number, and the project name.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials and labor provided by the SIC shall be of the highest quality.
B.
The SIC shall be certified to install the security solutions that the SIC has proposed as specified
in this document.
C.
Only the highest grade components shall be considered, and all components shall be balanced
with each other from an electrical and performance characteristic standpoint.
D.
All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner according to generally accepted trade
practices.
E.
Appropriate union requirements shall be strictly followed and all SIC employees on site shall
have appropriate union licenses.
F.
All work to be performed by the SIC shall be coordinated with the other trades and the General
Contractor.
G.
The SIC shall conform and adhere to all job site requirements as defined by the General
Contractor. It is the responsibility of the SIC to obtain these requirements from the General
Contractor.
H.
All necessary permits are to be secured by the SIC.
I.
Appropriate levels of insurance and bonding shall be maintained. Certificates of Insurance may
be requested, and shall be provided at the SIC’s expense.
J.
Any variations to the installation of the security system as described in this specification and the
associated project drawings shall be subject to the control and approval of the General
Contractor, CUSD 4 and Sentinel.
K.
Substitution of any materials specified in this document shall only be considered once a request
to do so has been submitted in writing to the General Contractor, CUSD 4 and Sentinel for prior
approval. This submittal shall discuss the scope of the change, the ramifications on the overall
physical security system and the advantages to be gained by CUSD 4.
L.
The SIC shall conform to the following standards when provisioning and installing the new
physical security system:
1.
NFPA 101, Life Safety Code (latest edition),
2.
NFPA 101A, Alternative Approaches to Life Safety (latest edition),
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 10 00-3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
M.
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 10 00 – Common Work Results
3.
NFPA 101B, Code for Means of Egress for Buildings and Structures (latest edition)
4.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Electronic Safety and Security
Reference Manual (ESSDRM) (latest edition)
5.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.1
(Including
all
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
6.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 (Including all current addenda),
Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard
7.
ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 (Including all current addenda), Optical Fiber Cabling Components
Standard
8.
ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial Telecommunications
Cabling
9.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) (latest edition)
10.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Information Transport
Systems Installation Manual (latest edition)
11.
ANSI/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces
12.
ANSI/TIA-526-14, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable
Plant
13.
ANSI/TIA-526-7, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable
Plant
14.
ANSI/TIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings
15.
ANSI-J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
16.
NEC 2008, National Electrical Code (where more stringent than local codes)
17.
All applicable local, county and state building and electrical codes with local addenda
18.
UL 444, Communication Cables, Published July, 2008
19.
FCC Part 68 Regulations
20.
IEEE 802.3, Ethernet Standard
21.
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
22.
NFPA 731, Standard for the Installation of Electronic Premises Security Systems (latest
edition)
23.
ANSI/TIA-758 (Including all current addenda), Customer-Owned Outside Plant
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
24.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Customer-Owned Outside
Plant Manual (latest edition)
current
addenda),
Commercial
Balanced
Building
Twisted-Pair
First-Named Manufacturer
1.
Within these specifications and associated drawings, the first-named approved
manufacturer indicates that its respective device, equipment or system may have been
used to meet the job requirements and to determine the space and dimensional
requirements. The SIC’s use of another pre-approved system may require that the SIC
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 10 00-4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 10 00 – Common Work Results
verify that the respective devices, equipment, systems or products will meet the job
requirements and will fit the allocated space.
2.
1.8
The listing of a manufacturer as acceptable or pre-approved does not in any way relieve
the SIC from the responsibility for providing devices, equipment or systems that meet the
requirements of the specifications. The SIC shall verify that performance requirements
are met, as no two manufacturers should be trusted as exactly identical in function, fit, or
finish.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
The SIC shall coordinate the arrangement, installation, and finishing of the physical security
system.
1.
Where a given component offers multiple color options, all such finishes shall be
coordinated with the architect.
2.
Any conduit, pathway, or sleeve requirements shall be coordinated with the MEP
engineer.
3.
The alignment and positioning of pull boxes, junction boxes, back boxes, conduit ends,
stubs, sleeves, etc., with SIC-installed devices.
4.
Any equipment cut into, mounted on, or suspended from architectural elements such as
walls or ceiling shall be coordinated with the architect to ensure there is no conflict with
design intent or functionality.
5.
Any other elements that might or will interfere with elements installed by other trades
shall be coordinated with the GC and those respective trades.
6.
Network-based devices requiring IP addresses shall be coordinated with CUSD 4.
Conflicts requiring noticeable deviation from the associated project drawings or these
specifications shall be coordinated with Sentinel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Fire stop systems shall be UL-listed or Factory Mutual approved. The SIC shall furnish and
install the proper fire stop system with classified products and materials compatible with the
appropriate penetrating elements, type of construction material and dimensions of the wall,
partition, barrier, or floor, and the environment and temperature range of both sides of the
opening. Fire stop systems shall maintain the original fire resistance rating of the wall, partition,
barrier, or floor prior to the penetration.
B.
Expansion type fire stop material shall be used where necessary to protect and close the
opening upon failure of the penetrating element due to fire.
C.
Fire stop penetrations in fire-rated walls and floors for sleeves, wiring, cables, conduits, ducts,
and cable trays.
D.
Fire stopping for openings through fire and smoke-rated walls and floor assemblies shall be
listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for “Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems.” The system shall meet the requirements of “Fire Tests of ThroughPenetration Firestops” designated ASTM E814.
E.
The SIC shall furnish and install systems fire tested by a third party according to ASTM E814 (or
UL 1479) tested under positive pressure.
F.
Provide only material combinations that are qualified by independent agencies based on the
material’s performance when tested in a particular configuration.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 10 00-5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
G.
2.2
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 10 00 – Common Work Results
Thickness of materials must be established by formal ASTM E814 or UL 1479 tests.
SECURITY CABLING
A.
The SIC shall furnish and install all security-related wiring and cabling for all components
described herein, except for those cable or wiring runs that will be furnished and installed by
others. Runs installed by others will be clearly noted within these specifications.
B.
Where others are providing the wiring or cabling, the SIC shall coordinate with those respective
trades to ensure that all security requirements are met, that there are adequate quantities
installed, and that the installed solution will perform as expected for warranty purposes.
C.
Where the SIC is to furnish and install cabling, all manufacturers’ respective requirements shall
be met. Where manufacturer requirements differ from any requirements provided within this
specification, the more stringent of the two shall be followed.
D.
The wiring and cabling shall be non-plenum rated.
2.3
CABLE AND WIRE RACEWAYS
A.
The SIC shall furnish and install all raceways dedicated to security. These shall consist of
surface-mount raceway with detachable covers.
B.
The raceway shall be made of plastic, four-inches wide by two or four-inches tall, with sides
made of finger ducts to facilitate cable entry.
C.
The raceway shall be black in color.
2.4
SECURITY HEADEND CABINET
A.
2.5
The SIC shall utilize the equipment cabinet provided by CUSD 4 to support the headend
equipment. The SIC shall install all headend systems into cabinet unless directed otherwise and
coordinate the placement of the equipment with CUSD 4.
SECURITY WORKSTATION
A.
In order to reduce the need for security personnel to access the headend, the SIC shall furnish
and install a security workstation to support security management and administration.
B.
This workstation shall be located at the main office.
C.
The workstation shall include all necessary management and administration software to support
the systems described in this specification.
D.
The workstation shall feature:
1.
A 3 GHz processor.
2.
4 GB RAM, minimum.
3.
An internal hard drive with a minimum of 200 GB free space after operating system
installation.
4.
Dual 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface cards (one configured for the security
network and one configured for CUSD 4’s data network)
5.
Microsoft Windows 7 with all applicable service packs, patches, and updates at time of
install.
6.
Original software installation disks for operating system and related components.
7.
Internal DVD burner.
8.
A graphics card capable of supporting up to 16 simultaneous camera images.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 10 00-6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
9.
2.6
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 10 00 – Common Work Results
An HDMI or DVI monitor output.
WORKSTATION MONITOR
A.
The SIC shall furnish an install an external 19-inch-diagonal flat panel display suitable for the
display of video images.
B.
The monitor shall support HDMI or DVI input, to match the video output of the security
workstation.
C.
The monitor may be 16:9 or 4:3 ratio depending upon availability. However, images on the
monitor may not be stretched or compressed due to improper ratio scaling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FIRESTOPPING
A.
The SIC shall install fire stopping material in accordance with construction elements and
manufacturer specification.
B.
Thoroughly clean and remove any fire stopping material that drips or falls onto wall or floor
surfaces.
C.
After installation, protect the fire stop material from damage during construction. If damage
occurs despite such protections, remove and replace fire stopping material as required to
restore the integrity of the fire rating.
3.2
SECURITY CABLING
A.
Install all cabling in accordance with manufacturer requirements or this specification as noted
previously.
B.
Follow all labeling and bundling requirements as defined in Section 281700.
C.
All cabling not installed in conduit or conduit stubs shall be properly supported.
D.
In distributed telecommunications rooms that are vertically stacked, all fiber optic, UTP and
coaxial backbone cable shall be installed in sleeves or conduits (supplied and installed by
others). If sleeves are used, then all cables shall be secured to the wall every forty eight inches
(48”).
E.
Cable runs shall contain no splice or transition points from the endpoint to the controller unless
noted otherwise.
F.
All cables shall be installed such that the respective manufacturers’ recommended bend radius
for each cable type is not exceeded.
G.
The SIC shall be responsible for verifying the actual distances and voltage drops for each cable
run from one point to another.
H.
All security cables shall be properly dressed, tied and trimmed.
I.
Cable pulling lubricants, where used, shall be approved by the cable manufacturer so that the
lubricating compound cannot deteriorate the cable jacket.
J.
Bridle rings or other equivalent supports shall be installed in areas where ducts, conduits or
cable trays are not available.
K.
Cables shall never rest upon ceiling tiles, lighting fixtures, stud walls, or piping. All cables shall
be properly supported to prevent this, and shall be supported at a minimum of every ten feet to
reduce sag.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 10 00-7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 10 00 – Common Work Results
L.
Locations and routes of pathways shown on drawings are schematic and not necessarily
reflective of conditions at time of installation, or were positioned for clarity rather than exact
spacing, bending, or desired separation. The SIC shall review any and all such pathways shown
on the drawings to ensure that the proposed solution will function as intended with regard to
quantities, sizes, locations, etc.
M.
The SIC shall review the actual conduit plans proposed by the MEP or EC to ensure that
conduits intended for the physical security cabling are correctly sized, adequately positioned,
and have the requisite number of pull boxes as required by the actual materials proposed by the
SIC, and/or as the SIC desires as optimal for installation. The SIC shall be responsible for any
and all costs associated with conduit changes resulting from failure to preview and approve the
pathways installed by others.
N.
The SIC shall protect all stored or installed materials as part of these systems before, during, or
after installation from damage caused by other trades until turnover and final acceptance. If
damage occurs despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the
entire unit(s) as required to provide a solution in an original, undamaged condition.
O.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before
installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
P.
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on the associated
project drawings.
Q.
Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by
differing field conditions outside the control of the SIC, submit a request for information to the
GC according to the requirements specified in Division 01.
3.3
CABLE AND WIRE RACEWAYS
A.
All raceways shall be securely mounted to the wall or plywood surface with screws. Screws not
placed directly into studs shall be rated for gypsum wallboard support.
B.
All horizontally run raceway segments shall be perfectly level.
C.
All vertically run raceway segments shall be perfectly vertical.
D.
After cables and wires have been inserted, raceway covers shall be attached.
E.
The exterior surfaces of the covers shall be cleaned and free of dust by turnover.
3.4
SECURITY WORKSTATION
A.
Assemble the workstation according to manufacturer requirements.
B.
Load all security-related software and perform basic functional tests to ensure that software has
loaded correctly.
C.
Coordinate all network requirements with CUSD 4 to ensure the workstation can communicate
on CUSD 4’s data network as well as on the security network.
3.5
WORKSTATION MONITOR
A.
Assemble the monitor components according to manufacturer requirements.
B.
Connect the monitor to the workstation video output.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 10 00-8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.6
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 10 00 – Common Work Results
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INSTALLATION
A.
Locations and routes of pathways shown on drawings are schematic and not necessarily
reflective of conditions at time of installation, or were positioned for clarity rather than exact
spacing, bending, or desired separation. The SIC shall review any and all such pathways shown
on the drawings to ensure that the proposed solution will function as intended with regard to
quantities, sizes, locations, etc.
B.
The SIC shall review the actual conduit plans proposed by the MEP or EC to ensure that
conduits intended for the physical security system are correctly sized, adequately positioned,
and have the requisite number of pull boxes as required by the actual materials proposed by the
SIC, and/or as the SIC desires as optimal for installation. The SIC shall be responsible for any
and all costs associated with conduit changes resulting from failure to preview and approve the
pathways installed by others.
C.
Install all materials in compliance with manufacturer’s written directions.
D.
The SIC shall protect all stored or installed materials as part of these systems before, during, or
after installation from damage caused by other trades until turnover and final acceptance. If
damage occurs despite such protections, remove and replace all damaged components or the
entire unit(s) as required to provide a solution in an original, undamaged condition.
E.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before
installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
F.
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on the associated
project drawings.
G.
Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by
differing field conditions outside the control of the SIC, submit a request for information to
according to the requirements specified in Division 01.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 10 00-9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Headend components for the access control system
2.
Controllers
3.
Door hardware specific for physical security
4.
Integration with other trades for access control operations
5.
Badge printer and printing software requirements
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The SIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the provision and installation of CUSD 4’s access control system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 281000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The General Contractor is required by the Owner to coordinate with the following OwnerContracted entities for their respective scope of work:
1.
Cabling Installation Contractor (CIC): Data cabling, coaxial cabling, fiber optic cabling,
voice cabling. “Finish-out” of all jacks, boxes, devices, etc.
2.
Cabling Installation Contractor (CIC): Talk-back and paging speakers, horns, and
intercoms. “Finish-out” of all jacks, boxes, devices, etc.
3.
Security Installation Contractor (SIC): Door Access
a.
The Security Installation Contractor (SIC) shall subcontract the burglar alarm
scope of work to FE Moran.
B.
The SIC shall coordinate with the fire protection contractors for the fire alarm system tie-in.
C.
The SIC shall determine where to place any wall-mounted components to ensure they do not
conflict with any architectural or engineering details.
D.
The SIC shall coordinate with the architect and other trades to ensure that any devices mounted
to or above the ceiling will not conflict with any systems, equipment, or elements above the
ceiling.
E.
The SIC shall coordinate with the EC to review any and all conduit and wiring pathway
requirements.
F.
The SIC shall coordinate with CUSD 4 and Sentinel to confirm final equipment placement within
the security cabinet.
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
G.
The SIC shall meet as required with CUSD 4 to review access control system options, zones,
holidays, card holder names, administrator names, report formats and customization, alarm
reporting requirements and formats, and other options and preferences.
H.
The SIC shall work with the technology department at CUSD 4 to finalize any network
requirements, IP addresses, and access information as required to install the access control
system.
I.
Access control system integration requires coordinating meetings related to the door hardware.
1.
The SIC shall review all door hardware schedules supplied by the architect to confirm all
hardware requirements, and identify any changes to the hardware bill of materials
required due to differences between Sentinel’s project drawings and the final architectural
hardware schedule as it may pertain to exit hardware, strikes, locks, and other devices.
2.
Exit hardware wiring and tie-ins for request to exit functions.
3.
Electric strike wiring.
4.
ADA door operator integration.
5.
Delayed egress door integration.
6.
Magnetic hold open device integration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.0
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements, provide access control system by the
following:
1.
Schneider Electric Continuum.
B.
Installers: The access control system shall be installed by the SIC.
C.
Access control system shall consist of controllers, card readers, door contacts, PIR request to
exit devices, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control door access.
D.
All products used in this project installation shall be new and currently under manufacture and
shall have been applied in similar installations for a minimum of two years. Do not use this
installation as a product test site unless explicitly approved in writing by an Owner’s
representative. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this
contract.
E.
Installation shall include providing and installing all devices and controllers and extending
electrical power wiring to controllers provided by division 26000; and installation of low voltage
cabling including terminations using raceway and conduit system provided by division 2600 as
shown on the technology drawings as required for the access control system.
2.1
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM HEADEND
A.
The SIC shall furnish and install a headend system consisting of the access control server, foldup flat screen monitor, keyboard, and access control software. This system shall have all
necessary interfaces and hardware keys.
B.
The system shall be server-based, with capability to create or change zones and perimeters,
make moves, add new cardholders, and delete or make changes to existing users, print reports,
and monitor, prioritize, acknowledge, and change alarm notification requirements from an easyto-use software interface.
C.
The server shall consist of:
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
1.
Twice the recommended minimum RAM required by the access control software.
2.
Twice the hard drive storage recommended by the access control software.
3.
A compatible operating system with all current patches, fixes, and updates.
4.
All other components and requirements as presently recommended or required by the
access control software.
D.
The SIC shall not provide report printers: the system shall instead utilize network printing
(supplied by CUSD 4) for report and log printing.
E.
The SIC shall furnish and install a flat screen display and keyboard.
F.
2.2
1.
The keyboard shall fit within a 1 rack unit enclosure tray and feature an integrated mouse
or trackball.
2.
The flat screen display shall by a small, rack-sized LCD screen that automatically folds or
unfolds as the tray closes or opens.
3.
This flat screen display and keyboard shall support the access control server directly, and
not support other security or non-security systems through a keyboard/video/mouse
switch or other signal switcher.
The server shall provide the capability to:
1.
Add/edit/delete users and zones based on permission levels to grant or restrict access to
various screens and functions
2.
Change access and alarm requirements to any individual door
3.
Produce user-customized summary reports to any network printer (detailing alarm
events, alarm histories, configuration information, etc.)
4.
Provide utility software for its own management
5.
Allow multiple credentials to be assigned to one person
6.
Support at least 25 holidays, including start and stop dates and times; dates and times
can vary by schedule or access levels
7.
Allow alarms to trigger outputs, send pages, and/or email to groups of users based on the
nature of the alarm
8.
Adjust the unlock time for locking devices, as well as allow for programming shunt times
for door contacts
9.
The system shall be able to provide reports indicating access granted, access denied or
failed entry
10.
Execute manual and automatic backups. The operator shall have the option of a full
database backup that includes configuration, database, and history transactions, or
database or history transactions only.
This shall include the ability to restore
programming from these backups.
11.
This headend shall also provide elevator access control.
12.
The SIC shall initially supply 150-250 cards with capability for easy future expansion.
CONTROL PANELS
A.
Controllers shall consist of T.A.C. ACX Series model 5740 and be able to communicate with
HID 5365 series readers, and shall support no less than 2 reader locations per controller.
Multiple reader controllers are preferred for reducing space requirements.
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-3
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
B.
Controllers shall be mounted to the wall in the telecommunications rooms.
coordinate the placement of the controllers with Sentinel prior to installation.
C.
Panels should be sized specifically for the supported headend system: controllers must be
compact and size-efficient to minimize wall-space mounting requirements.
D.
Controllers shall utilize RS-485 or Ethernet-based communications. If the SIC is proposing an
IP-based controller system, the SIC shall clearly indicate on its bid response the quantity of
POE switch ports and UTP jacks required of the owner. The SIC shall also propose, as an
alternate, the cost to provide the necessary POE switch.
E.
Panels shall be able to provide 12 VDC, 24VDC, or both simultaneously as required by devices.
F.
Separate panels shall also provide power to the control panels:
2.3
The SIC shall
1.
Power panels shall be approximately the same size and color as the access control
panels where possible.
2.
Power panels shall feature a key lock to maintain the safety of the systems.
3.
All power shall be fed by conduit or surface-mount raceway as allowed by code.
4.
Power panels shall connect to building power by hard-wire connection, not by wall-wart
transformers or NEMA-style plus.
PROXIMITY CARD READERS
A.
The SIC shall furnish and install HID 5365 series card reader locations within the space as
shown on the associated project drawings.
B.
All card readers shall be mounted 42-inches A.F.F. unless noted otherwise.
C.
All card readers of this type shall be positioned either:
1.
On the mullion of the door itself, using flexible conduit fed through the door frame itself, or
if not possible…
2.
Six edges from the edge of the door frame on the handle side of the door, or…
3.
Six edges from the edge of the door frame on the same side of the active leaf of double
doors.
D.
All card readers shall be black in color.
E.
The LED shall flash green when the user is authenticated; no audible tone shall chime.
2.4
CARDS AND FOBS
A.
Keycards
1.
The SIC shall furnish 200 proximity key cards to CUSD 4.
2.
Each card shall be manufactured by the same company and be the same type.
3.
Each card shall be RF-based and be reprogrammable and fully reusable.
4.
Cards shall not exceed 2.127-inches high by 3.375-inches wide.
5.
Each card shall support up to 85 bits; smart card technology is not requested; the card
shall support up to 137 billion unique codes or greater. Cards shall operate at 125 kHz.
6.
A slot punch is required in the card, located at the center of the short end of the card
(vertical punch).
7.
Cards shall support photographic identification information.
8.
Lanyards (one per card).
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-4
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
B.
C.
2.5
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
Adhesive Labels
1.
The SIC shall furnish 200 adhesive labels to CUSD 4 for direct image printing; these
labels shall than be adhered to the cards.
2.
Labels shall be single-sided.
3.
The SIC shall print the card labels in conjunction with CUSD 4’s strict instructions, and
ensure that the label matches the card holder credentials.
Key Fobs
1.
The SIC shall furnish 100 proximity key fobs to CUSD 4.
2.
Each fob shall be manufactured the same company as the proximity key cards, and be
fully compatible with the access control system.
3.
The fob shall be passive, and require no battery or other power source.
4.
No key rings are required.
DOOR CONTACT POSITION SWITCHES
A.
The SIC shall furnish and install door position contacts as required by the access control
design.
B.
Contacts shall be 1-inch or less in size, and be designed for installation in steel door frames.
C.
Contacts shall utilize Form C contacts up to 30V DC.
D.
Contacts shall feature either an open or closed loop, and be double-pull double-throw.
E.
Each contact shall be installed six inches from the door edge opposite the hinge side.
2.6
MOTION DETECTORS
A.
The SIC shall furnish and install a dual technology motion sensor for each location shown on
the associated project drawings.
B.
Motion detectors shall provide multi-range capability. Ranges shall meet or exceed a 10-foot to
50-foot range. Desired ranges and coverage angles are shown on the associated project
drawings.
2.7
PASSIVE INFRARED REQUEST TO EXIT DEVICES
A.
Some doors shall require a passive infrared request-to-exit device (PIR REX) for exiting
purposes.
B.
The PIR REX shall be a Bosch DS150i-series or pre-approved equivalent.
C.
Each PIR REX shall be placed unobtrusively above the door (on the door frame or wall) or on
the ceiling above the door no more than 2-feet to 3-feet from the door and no more than 15-feet
A.F.F., unless door swing interferes with placement. Maximum concealment without impairing
detection is essential for esthetic reasons. The appropriate mounting bracket shall be used
and, if wall-mounted, the SIC shall adjust the detector’s lens to cover the immediate doorway
only.
D.
The detection pattern shall have adjustable masking to allow installation in a variety of
situations.
E.
The PIR REX shall feature the capability to operate in either fail-safe or fail-secure modes.
Unless noted otherwise, all doors (even any equipped with magnetic locks) shall fail open (fail
safe or fail unlocked).
F.
The PIRs shall function on a 12V DC system.
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-5
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
G.
Each PIR shall feature a local sounder for propped-open alarms, forced-open alarms, etc., that
is adjustable in volume up to at least 85 dB.
H.
The SIC shall, where necessary, supply any and all associated trim plates when the PIR REX is
installed on a drywall surface.
2.8
DOOR RELEASE BUTTON
A.
2.9
The SIC shall furnish and install manual door release components to allow the entry doors to
the main office to be opened by the office staff through a button on the phone system. The SIC
shall coordinate with the CIC installing the phone system.
EXIT HARDWARE INTEGRATION
A.
Some doorways will feature exit hardware that can act as a manual request to exit, and thereby
shunt the alarm.
B.
The SIC shall review the architect’s final door hardware schedule and provide and install all
materials necessary to integrate the door hardware (by others) into the access control system,
limiting involvement only to needed integration of the two systems: the SIC shall not be
responsible for providing, installing, correcting, or adjusting the door hardware.
2.10
ELECTRIC STRIKE INTEGRATION
A.
Some doorways will feature electric strikes, provided by the GC. These strikes have been
requested as 24 VDC continuous duty strikes with positive latching, and tied to a backup power
supply.
B.
The SIC shall review the architect’s final door hardware schedule and provide and install all
materials necessary to integrate the strikes (by others) into the access control system, limiting
involvement only to needed integration of the two systems: the SIC shall not be responsible for
providing, installing, correcting, or adjusting the strikes or for providing backup battery power to
the strikes themselves.
2.11
ELECTRIC LOCKSET INTEGRATION
A.
Some doorways will feature electronic locksets and power transfer hinges, provided by the GC.
These systems have been requested as 12 VDC continuous duty components, tied to a backup
power supply.
B.
The SIC shall review the architect’s final door hardware schedule and provide and install all
materials necessary to integrate the locksets (by others) into the access control system, limiting
involvement only to needed integration of the two systems: the SIC shall not be responsible for
providing, installing, correcting, or adjusting the locksets or hinges nor for providing backup
battery power to the locksets or hinges themselves.
2.12
ADA DOOR OPERATOR INTEGRATION
A.
Some doorways will feature door operators with ADA-assisted motorized openers.
B.
The SIC shall review the architect’s final door hardware schedule and provide and install all
materials necessary to integrate the operator (by others) into the access control system so that
card reader-type functions work seamlessly with the operator, limiting involvement only to
needed integration of the two systems: the SIC shall not be responsible for providing, installing,
correcting, or adjusting the door hardware.
C.
The ANSI standards referenced in the Illinois ADA (IL ADA p.49, section 400.310.j.11) require
doors to stand in the fully open position for not less than five (5) seconds. The ADA operators
shall be set to stand open for the minimum amount of time required by code.
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-6
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
D.
2.13
A.
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
When an access card of key fob is used at the card reader, it shall retract the latch for entry and
not activate the automatic ADA opener. Ensure wiring is completed for this operation.
BADGE PRINTER AND SOFTWARE
The SIC shall furnish and install badge production equipment including:
1.
An enrollment reader, as shown in the plans, that serves only to enroll and test new cards
as they are created.
2.
A digital camera suitable for taking users’ head and shoulder portraits, and downloading
them to a printer or workstation (workstation by CUSD 4).
3.
A tripod for the digital camera.
4.
A color printer for the card labels.
a.
The printer shall use dye sublimation and/or resin thermal transfer to print onto the
card.
b.
The printer shall have a cartridge or magazine into which multiple cards can be
loaded for printing, and an output hopper to receive printed cards when complete.
c.
The printer shall be fully compatible with the cards proposed by the SIC within this
access control system.
d.
The SIC’s solution shall also include the manufacturer’s recommended color
ribbons or color cartridges.
5.
All necessary software to create cards from a database, and associate the photograph
with the user name. Software shall also provide the ability to customize background or
card colors so that CUSD 4 can employ color schemes to identify users by categories,
groups, or functions. This system shall be able to upload enrollment information to the
access control server.
6.
All applicable software licenses to integrate the access control system with the badge
printing software.
7.
All necessary cables, cords, and connectors to provide a complete, turnkey system
compatible with the access control system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM HEADEND
A.
The SIC shall provide all necessary hardware, cabling, and peripherals for the assembly of the
headend system.
B.
The SIC shall load and test all software on the system to ensure complete functionality.
C.
The SIC shall assemble this system in the computer room.
D.
Activation of the building fire alarm system shall immediately open all stairwell doors, and any
doors in communicating spaces between stairway exits. If the SIC discovers that basebuilding
stairwell doors are not released by the basebuilding alarm system, the SIC shall notify the GC
and Sentinel Technologies immediately. The SIC shall coordinate the connection of the fire
alarm system to the security system, and its programming as described above, with the GC.
E.
The SIC shall determine the facility code for the basebuilding to ensure compatibility with any
existing basebuilding access control system.
F.
The SIC shall budget time to meet with CUSD 4 to determine and finalize:
1.
The exact number of cards and/or fobs
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-7
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
2.
Zones, door access requirements, holidays, and which cardholders have access to which
doors at which days and times.
3.
The final list of card holder names in a spreadsheet format, so that the SIC can, on
CUSD 4’s behalf, export this data directly into the system to create a working system.
4.
Reports not already included in the package or existing reports requiring customization.
5.
Options, alternatives, and other enhancements unique to the SIC’s proposed system.
G.
Meet with the CUSD 4 IT staff to coordinate IP address needs, switch configurations, and which
events shall be treated by the SIC versus those treatable by the IT staff
H.
The SIC shall not provide report printers: the system shall instead utilize network printing
(supplied by CUSD 4) for report and log printing.
3.2
CONTROL PANELS
A.
The SIC shall coordinate with the architect and Sentinel Technologies for controller mounting.
B.
All panels shall be tested and verified as functional.
C.
All panels shall be mounted plumb and level.
D.
Access control panels shall be mounted above the power supply panels. The SIC shall utilize a
1 X 1, 2 X 2, 3 X 2 grid, et cetera, to keep panels organized on the wall surfaces.
E.
All access control panels shall be mounted so that they are at a comfortable working height.
F.
A document describing each type of panel, their respective locations, number of readers and
other inputs or outputs installed, and which options are included on each panel.
G.
Records drawings shall include wiring information so that wiring, from the headend to each
panel and from each panel to each endpoint, can be easily identified and traced.
H.
Fully check all electrical circuits of the various devices for correct wiring polarity, grounding, and
adequate signal strength.
3.3
PROXIMITY CARD READERS
A.
Install all readers in compliance with manufacturer’s directions.
B.
Ensure all card readers are level and true with respect to the frame and floor.
C.
LED indication lights (if applicable) shall be clearly visible and active when the reader is brought
on-line.
D.
Faceplates of readers shall be cleaned.
E.
All wiring shall be tested for continuity and wire map.
F.
The SIC shall estimate the distance between the power supply and each device to ensure that
voltage drop falls within the operating parameters of the device in question as set by the device
manufacturer. A budget of an additional 10-15 percent shall be included as a safety margin.
3.4
CARDS AND FOBS
A.
Keycards
1.
The SIC shall secure the cards in original boxes until needed by CUSD 4.
2.
All key cards pre-programmed by the SIC shall be checked by the SIC to ensure
interoperability and functionality; however, if the SIC has been asked to provide more
than 50 pre-programmed cards, the SIC shall only test 50 selected at random. Beyond
500, the SIC shall test only 10% of the cards. Un-programmed cards shall not be tested.
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-8
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
Damaged cards (cracked, bent, deformed, or marred) shall be replaced by the SIC prior
to turnover.
Adhesive Labels
1.
The SIC shall secure the labels until needed by CUSD 4.
2.
Print and apply the labels in accordance with manufacturer directions.
3.
Labels shall be adhered straight and even, with no wrinkling or overrun on the edges of
the card; in the event of a crooked or wrinkled label, remove the label and reapply a new
label to meet these requirements.
Key Fobs
1.
The SIC shall secure the fobs until needed by CUSD 4.
2.
All key fobs pre-programmed by the SIC shall be checked by the SIC to ensure
interoperability and functionality; however, if the SIC has been asked to provide more
than 50 pre-programmed fobs, the SIC shall only test 50 selected at random. Beyond
500, the SIC shall test only 10% of the fobs. Un-programmed fobs shall not be tested.
Card Tags
1.
Install the adhesive tag to the key card (or other components as directed by CUSD 4) in
accordance with manufacturer directions.
2.
Perform a functional test with 10% of the key card tags to ensure compatibility with the
access control system.
3.
Tags placed by the SIC shall not interfere with swipe functions, card slides, or other
functions.
4.
If the key card contains an embedded contact smart chip module, the SIC shall place the
tag on the end of the card opposite the contact module (if the SIC is placing the tags).
5.
If the SIC is placing the tags onto non card devices, the SIC shall not attach the tags to
metal surfaces.
DOOR CONTACT POSITION SWITCHES
A.
Install all contacts in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
B.
Verify that the total length of cable run from the contact to the input on the controller is within
manufacturer limits for voltage drop.
C.
UL-listed fire-rated hardware shall be used for all fire-rated doors.
3.6
MOTION DETECTORS
A.
Install all motion detectors in compliance with manufacturer’s directions.
B.
Ensure all motion detectors are level and true with respect to the wall and floor (unless
coverage pattern requires specific canting or angling).
C.
The detectors shall be cleaned of any dirt, dust or construction debris, and the door closed prior
to turnover.
D.
All wiring shall be tested for continuity and wire map.
E.
Cable lengths shall be within manufacturer’s recommendation for voltage draw and wire gauge.
F.
A thorough test of the alarm system shall be conducted from each motion sensor to determine
that fast and slow motions within its near, medium, and far ranges (relative to the maximum
range setting as shown on the associated project drawings) are detected.
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-9
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.7
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
PASSIVE INFRARED REQUEST TO EXIT DEVICES
A.
Install all PIR REXs in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
B.
Verify that the total length of cable run from the PIR REX to the controller is within manufacturer
limits for voltage drop.
C.
Verify functionality of the unit when installed.
D.
Ensure masking detection pattern is appropriately sized for the area covered, and is not overly
sensitive to cross-traffic.
E.
Ensure the shunt time is adjusted to a period reasonable for that particular door’s function.
F.
Whether or not a given door requires a local alarm, test the sounder to ensure the local alarm is
clearly audible.
3.8
DOOR RELEASE BUTTON
A.
Install all door release buttons in compliance with manufacturer’s directions.
B.
All wiring shall be tested for continuity and wire map.
C.
Cable lengths shall be within manufacturer’s recommendation for voltage draw and wire gauge.
3.9
EXIT HARDWARE INTEGRATION
A.
Ensure that activation of the door’s exit hardware shunts the alarm correctly.
B.
Simulate a forced opening of the door to verify that appropriate alarms are received by the
access control system.
C.
Simulate a power failure at each door to ensure the door unlocks as intended. Verify that the
access control server receives and reports the subsequent alarm.
D.
Simulate a fire alarm condition at each door to ensure that the door unlocks as intended. Verify
that the access control server receives and reports the subsequent alarm.
3.10
ELECTRIC STRIKE INTEGRATION
A.
Ensure the strike is a continuous duty, 24 VDC strike as required by this specification.
B.
If not, notify the GC and Sentinel before attempting to wire the strike into the access control
system.
C.
If so, verify each door unlocks with the presentation of a valid credential and relocks within the
correct time requested by CUSD 4.
D.
Simulate a power failure at each door to ensure the door unlocks as intended. Verify that the
access control server receives and reports the subsequent alarm.
E.
Simulate a fire alarm condition at each door to ensure that the door unlocks as intended. Verify
that the access control server receives and reports the subsequent alarm.
3.11
ADA DOOR OPERATOR INTEGRATION
A.
Ensure the door operator is compatible with the access control system.
B.
If not, notify the GC and Sentinel before integrating the card reader into the system.
C.
If so:
1.
Verify that a valid card read is required before the paddle opens the door.
2.
Verify that pushing the paddle without the use of card does not open the door.
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-10
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
3.12
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 11 00 – Access Control System
BADGE PRINTER AND SOFTWARE
A.
Meet with CUSD 4 to determine the card layout, format, and background colors they desire, and
finalize the initial number of cards they desire to have on hand at installation.
B.
Determine how to obtain a high-resolution CUSD 4 logo from this meeting if CUSD 4 desires its
inclusion on the label.
C.
Ensure the printer and software works by creating a test enrollment, applying a test photograph
prepared by the same camera system, and producing a card with printed label.
D.
Secure the camera and cards until turnover to prevent theft or misuse.
END OF SECTION
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC
28 11 00-11
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 12 00 – Video Surveillance Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes:
1.
1.3
Cameras and related components
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The SIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the provision and installation of CUSD 4’s video surveillance system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 281000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The SIC shall review any and all conduit, stubs, pull boxes, back boxes, and junction boxes with
the EC prior to installing cabling.
B.
The SIC shall coordinate the mounting of all camera power panels with Sentinel, the GC, and
CUSD 4 prior to installation. The SIC shall coordinate with the EC on all power requirements for
the power panel input.
C.
The SIC shall confirm the locations and quantities of cabling being furnished and provided by
the SIC.
D.
The SIC shall meet with CUSD 4 to determine which, if any, IP-based cameras will be available
to the general public, to CUSD 4 personnel generally, or only to specific CUSD 4 employees.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INDOOR FIXED-VIEW CAMERAS
A.
The SIC shall furnish and install an indoor fixed view IP based camera.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install all components according to their manufacturers’ respective requirements.
B.
The SIC shall mount each ceiling camera flush and level within the ceiling surface. Coordinate
locations with the architect to verify ceiling type in each location.
C.
The SIC shall ensure the motion activation features are operating.
D.
For each fixed view camera, the SIC shall mask any areas of predictable frequent movement,
so that motion activation is not needlessly utilized. Exterior cameras that look into non-CUSD 4
facility windows or residential areas shall also be masked to prevent invasions of privacy.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 12 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 12 00 – Video Surveillance Systems
E.
The SIC shall ensure that the camera image is stable, clear, and works in all anticipated lighting
conditions.
F.
The SIC shall ensure that all camera images are visible from the viewing monitor.
END OF SECTION
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 12 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 17 00 – Testing, Identification, and Administration Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Security system testing
2.
Security identification and labeling
3.
Security system administration
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The SIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the specifications and requirements for the testing, identification and
administration of the physical security system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 281000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM TESTING
A.
2.2
Review all testing requirements as described in this specification for each type of product listed.
PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A.
Labels shall meet the legibility, exposure defacement and adhesion requirements of UL969.
B.
Labels shall be preprinted or printed by a computer. Labels written by hand are not acceptable.
2.3
PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
A.
The SIC shall provide records drawings in an AutoCAD compatible format or in PDF format.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM TESTING
A.
All devices shall be tested for correct functionality as recommended by the respective
manufacturer.
B.
All wiring shall be tested for wiremap, where applicable, and continuity.
3.2
PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A.
The SIC shall thoroughly label the entire physical security system for future maintainability.
B.
All wires and cables shall be labeled at both ends.
TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 17 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
C.
Devices shall be labeled consistently throughout. In the event that associated project drawings
do not provide naming conventions, the SIC shall be consistent in how devices are named:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 17 00 – Testing, Identification, and Administration Requirements
Card readers shall be labeled CR + floor number + device number
a.
For example, CR-1-3 (for the third card reader on the first floor)
b.
Card readers can be numbered 1 through n, but the SIC shall attempt to follow a
consistent pattern rather than number readers randomly.
Control panels shall be labeled CP + floor number + panel number
a.
For example, CP-3-2 (for the second panel on the third floor)
b.
Panels can be numbered 1 through n, but the SIC shall attempt to follow a
consistent pattern rather than number readers randomly.
Cameras shall be labeled CAM + floor number + device number
a.
For example, CAM-1-3 (for the third camera on the first floor)
b.
Cameras can be numbered 1 through n, but the SIC shall attempt to follow a
consistent pattern rather than number readers randomly.
c.
Pan/tilt/zoom cameras may be named PTZ-x-n in lieu of CAM-x-n.
PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
A.
The SIC shall thoroughly document the entire physical security system for future maintainability
and troubleshooting.
B.
Documentation shall include but not be limited to:
1.
AutoCAD or PDF scale drawings of the project (backgrounds available from Sentinel)
clearly showing:
a.
Precise device locations and identification numbers
b.
Approximate pathways of horizontal cable runs to their nearest points of
termination
c.
Precise locations of installed pull boxes, junction boxes, and enclosures related to
any security conduits that may be installed
d.
Conduit sizes for any conduit above three quarter inch (3/4”) in size (if used)
e.
Detailed elevation views of any wall-mounted equipment, including but not limited
to control panels, alarm panels, and headend cabinets
f.
Single line diagrams
g.
Any exterior devices, dimensioned from building corners or other permanent
structures (trees, plants, parking lot curbing, fencing, etc., are not acceptable
landmarks).
2.
Product cut sheets, shop drawings, etc., as outlined in 281000.
3.
Documentation shall be submitted to CUSD 4 prior to final payment.
END OF SECTION
TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 17 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 18 00 – Cutover and Training Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes:
1.
Cutover services
2.
Training services
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The SIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the specifications and requirements for the cutover of the communications
cable system and subsequent user training
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Refer to Section 281000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
The SIC shall coordinate all training with CUSD 4 to determine the extent, duration, and
schedule of the training session.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CUTOVER AND TRAINING SERVICES
A.
The SIC shall be available for on-site support during and immediately after start-up for a period
of 2 business days.
B.
The SIC shall provide training for CUSD 4 personnel to ensure knowledge transfer regarding
documentation and operation of the physical security system. This may consist of multiple
training sessions depending on CUSD 4’s requirements near cutover.
C.
The SIC shall turn over all operations and maintenance manuals in the quantities and formats
directed by the GC. The SIC should expect to provide one paper copy for each type of device,
and electronic versions on disc to reduce paper usage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CUTOVER AND TRAINING SERVICES
A.
The SIC shall be available or on-call with a 2-hour response time for 2 business days after the
physical security system is certified in order to investigate and repair any components of the
system that do not function properly.
B.
The SIC shall provide a programming as well as a training session with the appropriate CUSD 4
staff to explain and orient the staff in the use and maintenance of the physical security system:
1.
Enrollment of the access control system
CUTOVER AND TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 18 00-1
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
C.
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 18 00 – Cutover and Training Requirements
2.
Operation of the CCTV system including backup, playback, as well as network operation
3.
Operation of the intercom system, as required, so that CUSD 4 staff can understand how
to operate the two-way communication and door release functions.
4.
Creating, changing, and deleting administrator accounts
5.
Changing passwords
6.
Creating, changing, and deleting new account groups and profiles
7.
Creating, changing, and deleting new cardholder accounts
8.
Setting, removing, and modifying restrictions and permissions for new cardholders
9.
Setting, changing, and removing holidays and special events
10.
Creating, changing, and deleting report formats
11.
Creating and modifying alarm reporting events and the manners with which a report
behaves
12.
Alarm clearance
13.
Identifying issues and problems with the system which warrant a support call to the SIC
14.
System backup
15.
Data archiving
At closeout, clean or re-clean entire work to normal level for "first class" maintenance/cleaning
of building projects of a similar nature. Remove non-permanent protection and labels, clean
exposed finishes, touch-up minor finish damage, remove debris and broom-clean spaces,
sanitize work, and perform similar cleanup operations needed to produce a clean condition
END OF SECTION
CUTOVER AND TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 18 00-2
Kenwood Elementary School
Renovation and Addition
1009/4010.01
DIVISION 28 – PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEMS
28 19 00 – Support and Warranty Requirements
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings (“associated project drawings”) and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes the support and warranty of the physical security system.
SCOPE
A.
1.4
The SIC shall provide all materials, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation of the Work called for in the contract documents provided by the General Contractor
or CUSD 4 related to the specifications and requirements for the support and warranty of the
physical security system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 281000, Part 1, Section 1.6, for all submittal requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY
A.
The physical security system shall be end-to-end certified by the SIC.
B.
An extended material, labor and performance warranty shall be provided by the installer for
period of at least one (1) year.
C.
The SIC shall provide ongoing support for warranty work as well as modifications and
enhancements that may be required as part of that warranty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY
A.
Once the physical security system is certified, the SIC shall repair–at no additional charge–any
part of the physical security system that is not working properly within 24 hours of the report of
the problem.
B.
The SIC shall deliver to CUSD 4 all documentation outlining the terms and conditions of the
warranty.
END OF SECTION
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
SENTINEL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
28 19 00-1